MegaRaidSASSWUG_RevF
USER’S
GUIDE
MegaRAID SAS Software
March 2009
80-00156-01 Rev. F
This document contains proprietary information of LSI Corporation. The information contained herein is not to be used by or disclosed to third parties without the
express written permission of an officer of LSI Corporation.
Document 80-00156-01 Rev. F (March 2009)
This document describes the LSI Corporation’s MegaRAID Storage Manager
software. This document will remain the official reference source for all
revisions/releases of this product until rescinded by an update.
LSI Corporation reserves the right to make changes to any products herein at
any time without notice. LSI does not assume any responsibility or liability arising
out of the application or use of any product described herein, except as expressly
agreed to in writing by LSI; nor does the purchase or use of a product from LSI
convey a license under any patent rights, copyrights, trademark rights, or any
other of the intellectual property rights of LSI or third parties.
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
TRADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGMENT
LSI, the LSI logo design, iBBU, MegaRAID, and MegaRAID Storage Manager are
trademarks or registered trademarks of LSI Corporation. Microsoft and Windows
are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Linux is a
registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Intel and Pentium are registered
trademarks of Intel Corporation. SCO and SCO UnixWare are registered
trademarks and OpenServer is a trademark of the SCO Group, Inc. This product
includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation
(http://www.apache.org/). All other brand and product names may be
trademarks of their respective companies.
CD
To receive product literature, visit us at http://www.lsi.com.
For a current list of our distributors, sales offices, and design resource
centers, view our web page located at
http://www.lsi.com/cm/ContactSearch.do?locale=EN
ii
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Preface
This document explains how to use the MegaRAID Storage Manager™
software, WebBIOS, and Command Line Interface (CLI) utilities to
configure, monitor, and maintain MegaRAID® Serial-attached SCSI
(SAS) RAID controllers and the storage-related devices connected to
them.
Audience
This document assumes that you are familiar with SAS controllers and
configuration utilities. The people who benefit from this book are network
administrators who need to create storage configurations on LSI SAS
controllers.
Organization
This document has the following chapters and appendixes:
•
Chapter 1, “Overview,” describes the SAS, Serial ATA (SATA) II, and
Solid State Disk (SSD) technologies, configuration scenarios, and
Technical Support information.
•
Chapter 2, “Introduction to RAID,” describes RAID (Redundant Array
of Independent Disks), RAID functions and benefits, RAID
components, RAID levels, and configuration strategies. In addition, it
defines the RAID availability concept, and offers tips for configuration
planning.
•
Chapter 3, “WebBIOS Configuration Utility,” explains how to use the
pre-boot WebBIOS Configuration Utility to create and manage
storage configurations.
•
Chapter 4, “MegaRAID Command Tool,” explains how to use the
MegaRAID Command Tool to create and manage storage
MegaRAID SAS Software User’s Guide
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
iii
configurations. The MegaRAID Command Tool is a CLI application
for SAS.
•
Chapter 5, “MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation,”
introduces the main features of MegaRAID Storage Manager
software and explains how to install it.
•
Chapter 6, “MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus,”
describes the layout of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window and
lists the available menu options.
•
Chapter 7, “Configuration,” describes how to use the MegaRAID
Storage Manager software to configure or reconfigure storage
devices, how to save configurations, and how to apply saved
configurations to a controller.
•
Chapter 8, “Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices,”
explains how the MegaRAID Storage Manager software monitors the
status of storage configurations and devices and displays information
about them.
•
Chapter 9, “Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations,”
describes the MegaRAID Storage Manager maintenance functions
for virtual drives and other storage devices.
•
Appendix A, “Events and Messages,” provides descriptions of the
MegaRAID Storage Manager events.
•
Appendix B, “Glossary,” contains definitions of storage-related terms.
Conventions
iv
Note:
Notes contain supplementary information that can have an
effect on system performance.
Caution:
Cautions are notifications that an action has the potential to
adversely affect equipment operation, system performance,
or data integrity.
Preface
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Revision History
Document
Number
Date
Revision
80-00156-01 Rev. F
March 2009
Remarks
Updated the WebBIOS Configuration Utility, MegaRAID
Storage Manager, and MegaCLI chapters.
80-00156-01 Rev. E December 2008
Added the overview chapter. Updated the WebBIOS Configuration Utility, MegaRAID Storage Manager, and MegaCLI
chapters.
80-00156-01 Rev. D April 2008
Updated the RAID overview section. Updated the WebBIOS
Configuration Utility and the MegaRAID Storage Manager.
Updated the MegaCLI commands.
80-00156-01 Rev. C July 2007
Version 2.1
Updated operating system support for MegaCLI.
80-00156-01 Rev. B June 2007
Version 2.0
Updated the WebBIOS Configuration Utility and the MegaRAID Storage Manager. Updated the MegaCLI commands.
Added the RAID introduction chapter.
80-00156-01 Rev. A August 2006
Version 1.1
Corrected the procedure for creating RAID 10 and RAID 50
drive groups in the WebBIOS Configuration Utility.
DB15-000339-00
Initial release of this document.
December 2005
Version 1.0
Preface
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
v
vi
Preface
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Contents
Chapter 1
Overview
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
Chapter 2
Introduction to RAID
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
SAS Technology
Serial-attached SCSI Device Interface
Serial ATA II Features
Solid State Drive Features
1.4.1
Solid State Drive Guard
Dimmer Switch Feature
UEFI 2.0 Support
Configuration Scenarios
1.7.1
Valid Drive Mix Configurations with HDDs and
SSDs
Technical Support
1-1
1-3
1-3
1-4
1-4
1-5
1-5
1-6
RAID Description
RAID Benefits
RAID Functions
Components and Features
2.4.1
Physical Array
2.4.2
Virtual Drive
2.4.3
RAID Drive Group
2.4.4
Fault Tolerance
2.4.5
Consistency Check
2.4.6
Copyback
2.4.7
Background Initialization
2.4.8
Patrol Read
2.4.9
Disk Striping
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-3
2-5
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-7
MegaRAID SAS Software User’s Guide
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
1-8
1-9
vii
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
Chapter 3
WebBIOS Configuration
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
viii
2.4.10 Disk Mirroring
2.4.11 Parity
2.4.12 Disk Spanning
2.4.13 Hot Spares
2.4.14 Disk Rebuilds
2.4.15 Rebuild Rate
2.4.16 Hot Swap
2.4.17 Drive States
2.4.18 Virtual Drive States
2.4.19 Enclosure Management
RAID Levels
2.5.1
Summary of RAID Levels
2.5.2
Selecting a RAID Level
2.5.3
RAID 0
2.5.4
RAID 1
2.5.5
RAID 5
2.5.6
RAID 6
2.5.7
RAID 00
2.5.8
RAID 10
2.5.9
RAID 50
2.5.10 RAID 60
RAID Configuration Strategies
2.6.1
Maximizing Fault Tolerance
2.6.2
Maximizing Performance
2.6.3
Maximizing Storage Capacity
RAID Availability
2.7.1
RAID Availability Concept
Configuration Planning
2.8.1
Number of Drives
2.8.2
Drive Group Purpose
Utility
Overview
Starting the WebBIOS CU
WebBIOS CU Main Screen Options
Creating a Storage Configuration
Contents
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-13
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-16
2-16
2-17
2-18
2-19
2-19
2-21
2-22
2-23
2-24
2-26
2-27
2-28
2-29
2-31
2-32
2-32
2-33
2-34
2-34
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-5
3.4.1
3.5
3.6
3.7
Selecting the Configuration with the Configuration
Wizard
3.4.2
Using Automatic Configuration
3.4.3
Using Manual Configuration
Viewing and Changing Device Properties
3.5.1
Viewing and Changing Controller Properties
3.5.2
Viewing and Changing Virtual Drive Properties
3.5.3
Viewing Drive Properties
3.5.4
Viewing and Changing Battery Backup Unit
Information
Viewing System Event Information
Managing Configurations
3.7.1
Running a Consistency Check
3.7.2
Deleting a Virtual Drive
3.7.3
Importing or Clearing a Foreign Configuration
3.7.4
Migrating the RAID Level of a Virtual Drive
Chapter 4
MegaRAID Command Tool
4.1
Product Overview
4.2
Novell NetWare, SCO, Solaris, FreeBSD, and DOS
Operating System Support
4.3
Command Line Abbreviations and Conventions
4.3.1
Abbreviations Used in the Command Line
4.3.2
Conventions
4.4
Controller Property-Related Options
4.4.1
Display Controller Properties
4.4.2
Display Number of Controllers Supported
4.4.3
Enable or Disable Automatic Rebuild
4.4.4
Flush Controller Cache
4.4.5
Set Controller Properties
4.4.6
Display Specified Controller Properties
4.4.7
Set Factory Defaults
4.4.8
Set SAS Address
4.4.9
Set Time and Date on Controller
4.4.10 Display Time and Date on Controller
4.5
Patrol Read-Related Controller Properties
4.5.1
Set Patrol Read Options
Contents
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-6
3-8
3-9
3-58
3-58
3-63
3-65
3-67
3-70
3-72
3-72
3-73
3-73
3-77
4-2
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-6
4-7
4-7
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-10
4-10
4-10
4-11
4-11
ix
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
x
4.5.2
Set Patrol Read Delay Interval
BIOS-Related Properties
4.6.1
Set or Display Bootable Virtual Drive ID
4.6.2
Select BIOS Status Options
Battery Backup Unit-Related Properties
4.7.1
Display BBU Information
4.7.2
Display BBU Status Information
4.7.3
Display BBU Capacity
4.7.4
Display BBU Design Parameters
4.7.5
Display Current BBU Properties
4.7.6
Start BBU Learning Cycle
4.7.7
Place Battery in Low-Power Storage Mode
4.7.8
Set BBU Properties
Options for Displaying Logs Kept at Firmware Level
4.8.1
Event Log Management
4.8.2
Set BBU Terminal Logging
Configuration-Related Options
4.9.1
Create a RAID Drive Group from All Unconfigured
Good Drives
4.9.2
Add RAID 0, 1, 5, or 6 Configuration
4.9.3
Add RAID 10, 50, or 60 Configuration
4.9.4
Clear the Existing Configuration
4.9.5
Save the Configuration on the Controller
4.9.6
Restore the Configuration Data from File
4.9.7
Manage Foreign Configuration Information
4.9.8
Delete Specified Virtual Drive(s)
4.9.9
Display the Free Space
Virtual Drive-Related Options
4.10.1 Display Virtual Drive Information
4.10.2 Change the Virtual Drive Cache and Access
Parameters
4.10.3 Display the Virtual Drive Cache and Access
Parameters
4.10.4 Manage Virtual Drives Initialization
4.10.5 Manage a Consistency Check
4.10.6 Manage a Background Initialization
4.10.7 Perform a Virtual Drive Reconstruction
Contents
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
4-11
4-12
4-12
4-12
4-13
4-13
4-13
4-14
4-15
4-15
4-16
4-16
4-16
4-17
4-17
4-18
4-18
4-18
4-19
4-21
4-21
4-22
4-22
4-22
4-23
4-23
4-24
4-24
4-24
4-25
4-25
4-26
4-26
4-27
4.10.8
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
Display Information about Virtual Drives and
Drives
4.10.9 Display the Number of Virtual Drives
Drive-Related Options
4.11.1 Display Drive Information
4.11.2 Set the Drive State to Online
4.11.3 Set the Drive State to Offline
4.11.4 Change the Drive State to Unconfigured Good
4.11.5 Change Drive State
4.11.6 Manage a Drive Initialization
4.11.7 Rebuild a Drive
4.11.8 Locate the Drive(s) and Activate LED
4.11.9 Mark the Configured Drive as Missing
4.11.10 Display the Drives in Missing Status
4.11.11 Replace the Configured Drives and Start an
Automatic Rebuild
4.11.12 Prepare the Unconfigured Drive for Removal
4.11.13 Display Total Number of Drives
4.11.14 Display List of Physical Devices
4.11.15 Download Firmware to the Physical Devices
Enclosure-Related Options
Flashing the Firmware
4.13.1 Flash the Firmware with the ROM File
4.13.2 Flash the Firmware in Mode 0 with the ROM File
SAS Topology
Diagnostic-Related Options
4.15.1 Start Controller Diagnostics
4.15.2 Start Battery Test
4.15.3 Start NVRAM Diagnostic
Miscellaneous Options
4.16.1 Display the MegaCLI Version
4.16.2 Display Help for MegaCLI
Chapter 5
MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation
5.1
Overview
5.1.1
Creating Storage Configurations
5.1.2
Monitoring Storage Devices
Contents
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
4-27
4-27
4-28
4-28
4-28
4-28
4-29
4-29
4-30
4-30
4-31
4-31
4-31
4-31
4-32
4-32
4-32
4-33
4-33
4-33
4-33
4-34
4-34
4-35
4-35
4-35
4-35
4-36
4-36
4-36
5-1
5-1
5-2
xi
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.1.3
Maintaining Storage Configurations
Hardware and Software Requirements
Installation
5.3.1
Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager Software
on Microsoft Windows
5.3.2
Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager Software
for Linux
5.3.3
Linux Error Messages
MegaRAID Storage Manager Support and Installation on
VMWare
5.4.1
Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager for
VMWare Classic
5.4.2
Uninstalling MegaRAID Storage Manager for
VMWare
5.4.3
MegaRAID Storage Manager Support on the
VMWare ESX Operating System
Installing and Configuring a CIM Provider
5.5.1
Installing a CIM SAS Storage Provider on Linux
5.5.2
Installing a CIM SAS Storage Provider on
Windows
Installing and Configuring an SNMP Agent
5.6.1
Installing and Configuring an SNMP Agent on
Linux
5.6.2
Installing and Configuring an SNMP Agent on
Solaris
5.6.3
Installing an SNMP Agent on Windows
MegaRAID Storage Manager Support and Installation on
Solaris 10U5 and U6 (Both x86 and x64)
5.7.1
Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager Software
for Solaris 10
5.7.2
Uninstalling MegaRAID Storage Manager
Software for Solaris 10
Chapter 6
MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus
6.1
Starting MegaRAID Storage Manager Software
6.2
MegaRAID Storage Manager Window
6.2.1
Physical/Logical View Panel
xii
Contents
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-10
5-10
5-11
5-19
5-19
5-21
5-21
5-22
5-24
5-28
5-29
5-29
5-30
6-1
6-4
6-5
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
Properties/Operations/Graphical View Panel
Event Log Panel
Menu Bar
6-6
6-8
6-9
Creating a New Storage Configuration
7.1.1
Understanding Virtual Drive Parameters
7.1.2
Using Auto Configuration
7.1.3
Using Guided Configuration
7.1.4
Using Manual Configuration: RAID 0
7.1.5
Using Manual Configuration: RAID 1
7.1.6
Using Manual Configuration: RAID 5
7.1.7
Using Manual Configuration: RAID 6
7.1.8
Using Manual Configuration: RAID 10
7.1.9
Using Manual Configuration: RAID 50
7.1.10 Using Manual Configuration: RAID 60
Adding Hot Spare Drives
Changing Adjustable Task Rates
Changing Power Settings
Changing Virtual Drive Properties
Changing a Virtual Drive Configuration
7.6.1
Adding a Drive to a Configuration
7.6.2
Removing a Drive from a Configuration
7.6.3
Changing the RAID Level of a Configuration
Deleting a Virtual Drive
Saving a Storage Configuration to Drive
Clearing a Storage Configuration from a Controller
Adding a Saved Storage Configuration
7-2
7-3
7-5
7-7
7-10
7-13
7-15
7-16
7-18
7-19
7-21
7-22
7-24
7-26
7-27
7-28
7-29
7-30
7-31
7-31
7-32
7-32
7-33
Chapter 7
Configuration
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.10
Chapter 8
Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices
8.1
Monitoring System Events
8.2
Configuring Alert Notifications
8.2.1
Setting Alert Delivery Methods
8.2.2
Changing Alert Delivery Methods for Individual
Events
Contents
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
8-1
8-3
8-5
8-6
xiii
8.2.3
8.2.4
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
Changing the Severity Level for Individual Events
Entering or Editing the Sender Email Address
and SMTP Server
8.2.5
Authenticating a Server
8.2.6
Saving Backup Configurations
8.2.7
Loading Backup Configurations
8.2.8
Adding Email Addresses of Recipients of Alert
Notifications
8.2.9
Testing Email Addresses of Recipients of Alert
Notifications
8.2.10 Removing Email Addresses of Recipients of
Alert Notifications
Monitoring Controllers
Monitoring Drives
Running a Patrol Read
Monitoring Virtual Drives
Monitoring Enclosures
Monitoring Battery Backup Units
8.8.1
Battery Learn Cycle
Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes
Chapter 9
Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations
9.1
Initializing a Virtual Drive
9.2
Running a Consistency Check
9.3
Scanning for New Drives
9.4
Rebuilding a Drive
9.5
Making a Drive Offline or Missing
9.6
Upgrading the Firmware
Appendix A
Events and Messages
Appendix B
Glossary
Customer Feedback
xiv
Contents
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
8-7
8-9
8-10
8-10
8-10
8-11
8-12
8-13
8-13
8-15
8-16
8-19
8-21
8-22
8-24
8-26
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-3
9-4
9-5
Figures
1.1
1.2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.17
3.18
3.19
3.20
Example of an LSI SAS Direct-Connect Application
Example of an LSI SAS RAID Controller Configured with
an LSISASx12 Expander
Example of Disk Striping (RAID 0)
Example of Disk Mirroring (RAID 1)
Example of Distributed Parity (RAID 5)
Example of Disk Spanning
RAID 0 Drive Group Example with Two Drives
RAID 1 Drive Group
RAID 5 Drive Group with Six Drives
Example of Distributed Parity across Two Blocks in a
Stripe (RAID 6)
RAID 00 Drive Group Example with Two Drives
RAID 10 Level Virtual Drive
RAID 50 Level Virtual Drive
RAID 60 Level Virtual Drive
WebBIOS CU Main Screen
WebBIOS Configuration Wizard Screen
WebBIOS Configuration Method Screen
WebBIOS Disk Group Definition Screen
WebBIOS Virtual Drive Definition Screen
RAID 0 Configuration Preview
WebBIOS Disk Group Definition Screen
WebBIOS Virtual Drive Definition Screen
RAID 1 Configuration Preview
WebBIOS Disk Group Definition Screen
WebBIOS Virtual Drive Definition Screen
RAID 5 Configuration Preview
WebBIOS Disk Group Definition Screen
WebBIOS Virtual Drive Definition Screen
RAID 6 Configuration Preview
WebBIOS Disk Group Definition Screen
WebBIOS Span Definition Screen
WebBIOS Virtual Drive Definition Screen
RAID 00 Configuration Preview
WebBIOS Drive Group Definition Screen
Contents
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
1-7
1-7
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-18
2-19
2-20
2-22
2-23
2-24
2-25
2-27
3-3
3-6
3-7
3-10
3-11
3-14
3-15
3-16
3-19
3-20
3-21
3-24
3-26
3-27
3-30
3-32
3-33
3-34
3-37
3-39
xv
3.21
3.22
3.23
3.24
3.25
3.26
3.27
3.28
3.29
3.30
3.31
3.32
3.33
3.34
3.35
3.36
3.37
3.38
3.39
3.40
3.41
3.42
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
xvi
WebBIOS Span Definition Screen
WebBIOS Virtual Drive Definition Screen
RAID 10 Configuration Preview
WebBIOS Disk Group Definition Screen
WebBIOS Span Definition Screen
WebBIOS Virtual Drive Definition Screen
RAID 50 Configuration Preview
WebBIOS Disk Group Definition Screen
WebBIOS Span Definition Screen
WebBIOS Virtual Drive Definition Screen
RAID 60 Configuration Preview
First Controller Properties Screen
Second Controller Properties Screen
Third Controller Properties Screen
Virtual Drive Screen
Physical Drive Screen
First Controller Properties Screen
Second Controller Properties Screen
Battery Module Screen
Event Information Screen
Foreign Configuration Import Screen
Foreign Configuration Preview Screen
Customer Information Screen
Setup Type Screen
Setup Type Screen
Custom Setup Screen
Server Screen
Select Server Window
Server Login Window
Main MegaRAID Storage Manager Window
Operations Tab
Graphical View Tab
First Configuration Wizard Screen
Auto Configuration Screen
First Guided Configuration Screen
Second Guided Configuration Screen
First Manual Configuration Screen
Manual Configuration – Defining a Virtual Drive
Contents
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-40
3-41
3-44
3-46
3-47
3-48
3-51
3-53
3-54
3-55
3-58
3-59
3-60
3-61
3-64
3-66
3-68
3-68
3-69
3-71
3-74
3-75
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-7
6-8
7-2
7-6
7-8
7-9
7-10
7-12
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.10
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
8.10
8.11
8.12
8.13
8.14
8.15
8.16
Creating a Global Hot Spare
Set Adjustable Task Rates
Set Virtual Drive Properties
Reconstruction Wizard
Event Information Window
Alert Notification Configuration Menu
Alerts Notification Configuration Screen
Alert Notification Delivery Methods Dialog Box
Change Individual Events Dialog Box
Change Individual Events Severity Level Menu
Mail Server Options
Email Settings
Controller Information
Drive Information
Patrol Read Configuration
Virtual Drive Properties
Enclosure Information – Graphical View
Battery Backup Unit Information
Battery Backup Unit Operations
Group Show Progress Window
Contents
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
7-23
7-25
7-27
7-29
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-6
8-7
8-8
8-9
8-12
8-14
8-15
8-17
8-20
8-22
8-23
8-25
8-26
xvii
xviii
Contents
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Tables
1.1
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
3.1
3.2
3.3
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
Valid Drive Mix Configurations
Types of Parity
Spanning for RAID 10, RAID 50, and RAID 60
Drive States
Virtual Drive States
RAID 0 Overview
RAID 1 Overview
RAID 5 Overview
RAID 6 Overview
RAID 00 Overview
RAID 10 Overview
RAID 50 Overview
RAID 60 Overview
RAID Levels and Fault Tolerance
RAID Levels and Performance
RAID Levels and Capacity
Factors to Consider for Drive Group Configuration
WebBIOS CU Toolbar Icons
Controller Properties Menu Options
Additional Drives Required for RAID-Level Migration
Command Line Abbreviations
Conventions
Controller Parameters
Number of Controllers Supported
Enable or Disable Automatic Rebuild
Cache Flush on Selected Controller
Set Controller Properties
Display Specified Controller Properties
Set Factory Defaults
Set SAS Address on Controller
Set Time and Date on Controller
Display Time and Date on Controller
Set Patrol Read Options
Set Patrol Read Delay Interval
Bootable Virtual Drive ID
Options for BIOS Status
Contents
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
1-8
2-9
2-11
2-14
2-15
2-18
2-19
2-20
2-21
2-22
2-24
2-25
2-26
2-28
2-30
2-31
2-35
3-4
3-61
3-78
4-5
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-7
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-10
4-10
4-10
4-11
4-12
4-12
4-12
xix
4.17
4.18
4.19
4.20
4.21
4.22
4.23
4.24
4.25
4.26
4.27
4.28
4.29
4.30
4.31
4.32
4.33
4.34
4.35
4.36
4.37
4.38
4.39
4.40
4.41
4.42
4.43
4.44
4.45
4.46
4.47
4.48
4.49
4.50
4.51
4.52
4.53
4.54
xx
Display BBU Information
Display BBU Status Information
Display BBU Capacity Information
Display BBU Design Parameters
Display Current BBU Properties
Start BBU Learning Cycle
Place Battery in Low-Power Storage Mode
Set BBU Properties
Event Log Management
Set BBU Terminal Logging
Create a Drive Group from All of the Unconfigured Drives
Add RAID 0, 1, 5, or 6 Configuration
Add RAID 10, 50, or 60 Configuration
Clear Existing Configuration
Save Configuration on the Controller
Restore Configuration Data from File
Manage Foreign Configuration Information
Delete Specified Virtual Drives
Display Free Space
Display Virtual Drive Information
Change Virtual Drive Cache and Access Parameters
Display Virtual Drive Cache and Access Parameters
Manage Virtual Drive Initialization
Manage Consistency Check
Manage Background Initialization
Virtual Drive Reconstruction
Display Virtual Drive and Drive Information
Display Number of Virtual Drives
Display Drive Information
Set Drive State to Online
Set Drive State to Offline
Change Drive State to Unconfigured Good
Change Drive State
Drive Initialization
Rebuild a Drive
Locate Drive and Activate LED
Mark Configured Drive as Missing
Display Drives in Missing Status
Contents
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
4-13
4-13
4-15
4-15
4-16
4-16
4-16
4-17
4-17
4-18
4-19
4-20
4-21
4-21
4-22
4-22
4-23
4-23
4-23
4-24
4-24
4-25
4-25
4-26
4-26
4-27
4-27
4-27
4-28
4-28
4-29
4-29
4-29
4-30
4-30
4-31
4-31
4-31
4.55
4.56
4.57
4.58
4.59
4.60
4.61
4.62
4.63
4.64
4.65
4.66
4.67
4.68
8.1
A.1
A.2
Replace Configured Drive(s) and Start Automatic Rebuild
Prepare Unconfigured Drive(s) for Removal
Display Number of Drives Attached to an Controller
Display List of Physical Devices Attached to Controller(s)
Download Firmware to the Physical Devices
Display Enclosure Information
Flash Firmware with ROM File
Flash Firmware in Mode 0 with ROM File
Display PHY Connection Information
Start Diagnostics Setting
Start Battery Test
Start NVRAM Diagnostic
Display MegaCLI Version
Display Help for MegaCLI
Event Severity Levels
Event Error Levels
Event Messages
Contents
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
4-31
4-32
4-32
4-32
4-33
4-33
4-33
4-34
4-35
4-35
4-35
4-36
4-36
4-36
8-2
A-1
A-2
xxi
xxii
Contents
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Chapter 1
Overview
This guide documents the utilities used to configure, monitor, and
maintain MegaRAID® Serial-attached SCSI (SAS) RAID controllers with
RAID control capabilities and the storage-related devices connected to
them. This guide explains how to use the MegaRAID Storage Manager™
software, WebBIOS, and Command Line Interface (CLI). In addition, it
documents SAS technology, Serial ATA (SATA) technology, Solid State
Disk (SSD) technology, configuration scenarios, and drive types.
This chapter consists of the following sections:
1.1
•
Section 1.1, “SAS Technology”
•
Section 1.2, “Serial-attached SCSI Device Interface”
•
Section 1.3, “Serial ATA II Features”
•
Section 1.4, “Solid State Drive Features”
•
Section 1.5, “Dimmer Switch Feature”
•
Section 1.7, “Configuration Scenarios”
•
Section 1.8, “Technical Support”
SAS Technology
The MegaRAID SAS RAID controllers are high-performance intelligent
PCI Express-to-SCSI/Serial ATA II controllers with RAID control
capabilities. MegaRAID SAS RAID controllers provide reliability, high
performance, and fault-tolerant disk subsystem management. They are
an ideal RAID solution for the internal storage of workgroup,
departmental, and enterprise systems. MegaRAID SAS RAID controllers
offer a cost-effective way to implement RAID in a server.
MegaRAID SAS Software User’s Guide
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
1-1
SAS technology brings a wealth of options and flexibility with the use of
SAS devices, Serial ATA (SATA) II devices, and SSD devices within the
same storage infrastructure. These devices bring individual
characteristics that make each one a more suitable choice depending on
your storage needs. MegaRAID gives you the flexibility to combine these
two similar technologies on the same controller, within the same
enclosure, and in the same virtual drive.
Note:
LSI recommends that you carefully assess any decision to
mix SAS drives and SATA drives within the same virtual
drives. Although you can mix drives, LSI strongly
discourages the practice. This recommendation applies to
both HDDs and SSDs.
The MegaRAID SAS RAID controllers are based on the LSI
first-to-market SAS IC technology and proven MegaRAID technology.
As second-generation PCI Express RAID controllers, the MegaRAID
SAS RAID controllers address the growing demand for increased data
throughput and scalability requirements across midrange and enterpriseclass server platforms. LSI offers a family of MegaRAID SAS RAID
controllers addressing the needs for both internal and external solutions.
The SAS controllers support the ANSI Serial Attached SCSI standard,
version 1.1. In addition, the controller supports the SATA II protocol
defined by the Serial ATA specification, version 1.0a. Supporting both the
SAS and SATA II interfaces, the SAS controller is a versatile controller
that provides the backbone of both server environments and high-end
workstation environments.
Each port on the SAS RAID controller supports SAS devices, SATA II
devices, or SSD devices using the following protocols:
1-2
•
SAS Serial SCSI Protocol (SSP), which enables communication with
other SAS devices
•
SATA II, which enables communication with other SATA II devices
•
Serial Management Protocol (SMP), which communicates
topology management information directly with an attached SAS
expander device
•
Serial Tunneling Protocol (STP), which enables communication with
a SATA II device through an attached expander
Overview
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
1.2
Serial-attached SCSI Device Interface
SAS is a serial, point-to-point, enterprise-level device interface that
leverages the proven SCSI protocol set. SAS is a convergence of the
advantages of SATA II, SCSI, and Fibre Channel, and is the future
mainstay of the enterprise and high-end workstation storage markets.
SAS offers a higher bandwidth per pin than parallel SCSI, and it
improves signal and data integrity.
The SAS interface uses the proven SCSI command set to ensure reliable
data transfers, while providing the connectivity and flexibility of
point-to-point serial data transfers. The serial transmission of SCSI
commands eliminates clock-skew challenges. The SAS interface
provides improved performance, simplified cabling, smaller connectors,
lower pin count, and lower power requirements when compared to
parallel SCSI.
SAS controllers leverage a common electrical and physical connection
interface that is compatible with Serial ATA technology. The SAS and
SATA II protocols use a thin, 7-wire connector instead of the 68-wire
SCSI cable or 26-wire ATA cable. The SAS/SATA II connector and cable
are easier to manipulate, allow connections to smaller devices, and do
not inhibit airflow. The point-to-point SATA II architecture eliminates
inherent difficulties created by the legacy ATA master-slave architecture,
while maintaining compatibility with existing ATA firmware.
1.3
Serial ATA II Features
The SATA bus is a high-speed, internal bus that provides a low pin count,
low voltage level bus for device connections between a host controller
and a SATA device.
The following list describes the SATA II features of the RAID controllers:
•
Supports SATA II data transfers of 3.0 Gbits/s
•
Supports STP data transfers of 3.0 Gbits/s
•
Provides a serial, point-to-point storage interface
•
Simplifies cabling between devices
Serial-attached SCSI Device Interface
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
1-3
1.4
•
Eliminates the master-slave construction used in parallel ATA
•
Allows addressing of multiple SATA II targets through an expander
•
Allows multiple initiators to address a single target (in a fail-over
configuration) through an expander
Solid State Drive Features
MegaRAID firmware supports SSD drives attached to MegaRAID SAS
controllers. These drives are expected to behave like SATA HDDs or SAS
HDDs. The major advantages of SSD drives include:
•
High random read speed (because there is no read-write head to
move)
•
High performance-to-power ratio, as these drives have very low
power consumption compared to HDDs
•
Low latency
•
High mechanical reliability
•
Lower weight and size (for low-capacity SSD drives)
The features and operations on SSD drives are the same as for hard disk
drives (HDD).
Note:
MegaRAID implements support for only those SATA SSD
drives which support ATA-8 ACS compliance.
You can choose whether to allow a virtual drive to consist of both SSD
devices and HDDs. For a virtual drive that consists of SSDs only, you
can choose whether to allow SAS SSD drives and SATA SSD drives in
that virtual drive. For virtual drives that have both SSDs and HDDs, you
can choose whether to mix SAS and SATA HDD drives with SAS and
SATA SSD devices in various combinations.
Note:
1.4.1
Support for SATA SDD drives applies only to those drives
that support ATA-8 ACS compliance.
Solid State Drive Guard
SSDs are known for their reliability and performance. SSD Guard™, a
feature that is unique to MegaRAID, increases the reliability of SSDs by
1-4
Overview
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
automatically copying data from a drive with potential to fail to a
designated hot spare or newly inserted drive. Because SSDs are very
reliable, non-redundant RAID 0 configurations are much more common
than in the past. SSD Guard offers added data protection for RAID 0
configurations.
SSD Guard works by looking for a predictive failure while monitoring the
SDD S.M.A.R.T. (Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology)
error log. If errors indicate a SSD failure is imminent, MegaRAID starts
a rebuild to preserve the data on the SSD and sends appropriate warning
event notifications.
1.5
Dimmer Switch Feature
Powering and cooling drives represents a major cost for data centers.
The new MegaRAID Dimmer™ Switch reduces the power consumption
of the devices connected to a MegaRAID controller. This helps to share
resources more efficiently and lower costs.
With Dimmer Switch, any unconfigured drive connected to a MegaRAID
controller is spun down after 30 minutes of inactivity, reducing its power
usage. Spun down drives are spun up automatically when you create a
configuration using those drives.
1.6
UEFI 2.0 Support
Significant challenges face operating system and platform developers to
innovate using the legacy PC-AT BIOS boot environment. These include
memory constraints, maintenance challenges, and increased
complexities due to a lack of industry-wide standards.
To handle these challenges, the Unified Extensible Firmware Interface
(UEFI) was developed to do the following:
•
Define a clean interface between operating systems and the
hardware platform at boot time.
•
Support an architecture-independent mechanism for initializing
add-in cards.
Dimmer Switch Feature
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
1-5
UEFI 2.0 provides MegaRAID customers with expanded platform
support. The MegaRAID UEFI 2.0 driver, a boot service device driver,
handles block IO requests and SCSI pass-through commands (SPT),
and offers the ability to launch pre-boot MegaRAID management
applications through a driver configuration protocol (DCP). The UEFI
driver also supports driver diagnostic protocol, which allows
administrators to access pre-boot diagnostics.
1.7
Configuration Scenarios
There are three main scenarios in which you can use the SAS RAID
controllers:
•
Low-end, internal SATA II configurations: In this configuration, use
the RAID controller as a high-end SATA II compatible controller that
connects up to eight disks either directly or through a port expander.
This configuration is mostly for low-end or entry servers. Enclosure
management is provided through out-of-band I2C bus. Side bands of
both types of internal SAS connectors support the SFF-8485
(SGPIO) interface.
•
Midrange internal SAS configurations: This configuration is like
the internal SATA II configurations, but with high-end disks. This
configuration is more suitable for low-range to midrange servers.
•
High-end external SAS/SATA II configurations: This configuration
is for both internal connectivity and external connectivity, using SATA
II drives, SAS drives, or both. External enclosure management is
supported through in-band, SCSI-enclosed storage. The
configuration must support STP and SMP.
Figure 1.1 shows a direct-connect configuration. The Inter-IC (I2C)
interface communicates with peripherals. The external memory bus
provides a 32-bit memory bus, parity checking, and chip select signals
for pipelined synchronous burst static random access memory
(PSBRAM), nonvolatile static random access memory (NVSRAM), and
Flash ROM.
Note:
1-6
The external memory bus is 32-bit for the SAS 8704ELP
and the SAS 8708ELP, and 64-bit for the SAS 8708EM2,
the SAS 8880EM2, and the SAS 8888ELP.
Overview
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figure 1.1
Example of an LSI SAS Direct-Connect Application
SAS/SATA II Device
SAS
PCI Express
RAID Controller
SAS/SATA II Device
SAS/SATA II Device
32-Bit Memory
Address/Data
Bus
I2 C
Interface
Flash ROM/
PSBRAM/
NVSRAM
I2 C
SAS/SATA II Device
PCI Express Interface
Figure 1.2 shows an example of a SAS RAID controller configured with
an LSISASx12 expander that is connected to SAS disks, SATA II disks,
or both.
Figure 1.2
Example of an LSI SAS RAID Controller Configured
with an LSISASx12 Expander
PCI Express Interface
8
SAS RAID Controller
LSISAS1078
PCI Express to SAS ROC
SAS/SATA
Drives
LSISASx12
Expander
SAS/SATA II
Drives
SAS/SATA II
Drives
Configuration Scenarios
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Peripheral
Bus
72-bit DDR/DDR2
with ECC
Interface
Flash ROM/
NVSRAM/
I2C/UART
SRAM
SDRAM
SRAM
LSISASx12
Expander
SAS/SATA II
Drives
SAS/SATA II
Drives
1-7
1.7.1
Valid Drive Mix Configurations with HDDs and SSDs
You can allow a virtual drive to consist of both SSDs and HDDs.
For virtual drives that have both SSDs and HDDs, you can choose
whether to mix SAS drives and SATA drives on the SSD devices.
You can choose whether to allow a virtual drive to consist of both SSD
devices and HDDs. For a virtual drive that consists of SSDs only, you
can choose whether to allow SAS SSD drives and SATA SSD drives in
that virtual drive. For virtual drives that have both SSDs and HDDs, you
can choose whether to mix SAS and SATA HDD drives with SAS and
SATA SSD devices in various combinations.
Table 1.1 lists the valid drive mix configurations you can use when you
create virtual drives and allow HDD and SSD mixing. The valid drive mix
configurations are based on manufacturer settings.
Table 1.1
1-8
Valid Drive Mix Configurations
#
Valid Drive Mix Configurations
1.
SAS HDD with SAS SDD (SAS-only configuration)
2.
SATA HDD with SATA SSD (SATA-only configuration)
3.
SAS HDD with a mix of SAS and SATA SSD (a SATA HDD
cannot be added)
4.
SATA HDD with a mix of SAS and SATA SSD (a SAS HDD
cannot be added)
5.
SAS SSD with a mix of SAS and SATA HDD (a SATA SSD
cannot be added)
6.
SATA SSD with a mix of SAS and SATA HDD (a SAS SSD
cannot be added)
7.
A mix of SAS and SATA HDD with a mix of SAS and SATA
SSD
8.
A SSD cannot be added to a HDD, but a SAS/SATA mix is
allowed.
Note:
Only one of the valid configurations listed in Table 1.1 is
allowed based on your controller card manufacturing
setting.
Note:
The valid drive mix also applies to hot spares. For hot spare
information, see Section 2.4.13, “Hot Spares,” page 2-11.
Overview
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
1.8
Technical Support
For assistance with installing, configuring, or running your MegaRAID
SAS RAID controller, contact LSI Technical Support:
Phone Support:
1-800-633-4545 (North America)
Technical Support
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
1-9
1-10
Overview
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Chapter 2
Introduction to RAID
This chapter describes RAID (Redundant Array of Independent Disks),
RAID functions and benefits, RAID components, RAID levels, and
configuration strategies. In addition, it defines the RAID availability
concept, and offers tips for configuration planning.
2.1
RAID Description
RAID is an array, or group of multiple independent physical drives that
provide high performance and fault tolerance. A RAID drive group
improves I/O (input/output) performance and reliability. The RAID drive
group appears to the host computer as a single storage unit or as
multiple virtual units. I/O is expedited because several drives can be
accessed simultaneously.
2.2
RAID Benefits
RAID drive groups improve data storage reliability and fault tolerance
compared to single-drive storage systems. Data loss resulting from a
drive failure can be prevented by reconstructing missing data from the
remaining drives. RAID has gained popularity because it improves I/O
performance and increases storage subsystem reliability.
2.3
RAID Functions
Virtual drives are drive groups or spanned drive groups that are available
to the operating system. The storage space in a virtual drive is spread
across all of the drives in the drive group.
MegaRAID SAS Software User’s Guide
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
2-1
Your drives must be organized into virtual drives in a drive group and
they must be able to support the RAID level that you select. Below are
some common RAID functions:
2.4
•
Creating hot spare drives
•
Configuring drive groups and virtual drives
•
Initializing one or more virtual drives
•
Accessing controllers, virtual drives, and drives individually
•
Rebuilding failed drives
•
Verifying that the redundancy data in virtual drives using RAID level
1, 5, 6, 10, 50, or 60 is correct
•
Reconstructing virtual drives after changing RAID levels or adding a
drive to a drive group
•
Selecting a host controller to work on
Components and Features
RAID levels describe a system for ensuring the availability and
redundancy of data stored on large disk subsystems. See Section 2.5,
“RAID Levels,” for detailed information about RAID levels. The following
subsections describes the components of RAID drive groups and RAID
levels.
2.4.1
Physical Array
A physical array is a group of drives. The drives are managed in
partitions known as virtual drives.
2.4.2
Virtual Drive
A virtual drive is a partition in a drive group that is made up of contiguous
data segments on the drives. A virtual drive can consist of an entire drive
group, more than one entire drive group, a part of a drive group, parts of
more than one drive group, or a combination of any two of these
conditions.
2-2
Introduction to RAID
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
2.4.3
RAID Drive Group
A RAID drive group is one or more drives controlled by the RAID
controller.
2.4.4
Fault Tolerance
Fault tolerance is the capability of the subsystem to undergo a drive
failure or failures without compromising data integrity, and processing
capability. The RAID controller provides this support through redundant
drive groups in RAID levels 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60. The system can still
work properly even with drive failure in a drive group, though
performance can be degraded to some extent.
In a span of RAID 1 drive groups, each RAID 1 drive group has two
drives and can tolerate one drive failure. The span of RAID 1 drive
groups can contain up to 32 drives, and tolerate up to 16 drive failures one in each drive group. A RAID 5 drive group can tolerate one drive
failure in each RAID 5 drive group. A RAID 6 drive group can tolerate up
to two drive failures.
Each spanned RAID 10 virtual drive can tolerate multiple drive failures,
as long as each failure is in a separate drive group. A RAID 50 virtual
drive can tolerate two drive failures, as long as each failure is in a
separate drive group. RAID 60 drive groups can tolerate up to two drive
failures in each drive group.
Note:
RAID level 0 is not fault tolerant. If a drive in a RAID 0 drive
group fails, the whole virtual drive (all drives associated
with the virtual drive) will fail.
Fault tolerance is often associated with system availability because it
allows the system to be available during the failures. However, this
means that it is also important for the system to be available during the
repair of the problem.
A hot spare is an unused drive that, in case of a disk failure in a
redundant RAID drive group, can be used to rebuild the data and reestablish redundancy. After the hot spare is automatically moved into the
RAID drive group, the data is automatically rebuilt on the hot spare drive.
The RAID drive group continues to handle requests while the rebuild
occurs.
Components and Features
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
2-3
Auto-rebuild allows a failed drive to be replaced and the data
automatically rebuilt by “hot-swapping” the drive in the same drive bay.
The RAID drive group continues to handle requests while the rebuild
occurs.
2.4.4.1
Multipathing
The firmware provides support for detecting and using multiple paths
from the RAID controllers to the SAS devices that are in enclosures.
Devices connected to enclosures have multiple paths to them. With
redundant paths to the same port of a device, if one path fails, another
path can be used to communicate between the controller and the device.
Using multiple paths with load balancing, instead of a single path, can
increase reliability through redundancy.
Applications show the enclosures and the drives connected to the
enclosures. The firmware dynamically recognizes new enclosures added
to a configuration along with their contents (new drives). In addition, the
firmware dynamically adds the enclosure and its contents to the
management entity currently in-use.
Multipathing provides the following features:
•
Support for failover, in the event of path failure
•
Auto-discovery of new or restored paths while the system is online,
and reversion to system load balancing policy
•
Measurable bandwidth improvement to the multi-path device
•
Support for changing the load balancing path while the system is
online
The firmware determines whether enclosure modules (ESMs) are part of
the same enclosure. When a new enclosure module is added (allowing
multi-path) or removed (going single path), an Asynchronous Event
Notification (AEN) is generated. AENs about drives contain correct
information about the "enclosure", when the drives are connected by
multiple paths. The enclosure module detects partner ESMs and issue
events appropriately.
In a system with two ESMs, you can replace one of the ESMs without
affecting the virtual drive availability. For example, the controller can run
heavy I/Os, and when you replace one of the ESM modules, I/Os should
2-4
Introduction to RAID
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
not stop. The controller uses different paths to balance the load on the
entire system.
In the MegaRAID Storage Manager utility, when multiple paths are
available to a drive, the drive information will show only one enclosure.
The utility shows that a redundant path is available to a drive. All drives
with a redundant path display this information. The firmware supports
online replacement of enclosure modules.
2.4.5
Consistency Check
The Consistency Check operation verifies correctness of the data in
virtual drives that use RAID levels 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60. (RAID 0 does
not provide data redundancy). For example, in a system with parity,
checking consistency means computing the data on one drive and
comparing the results to the contents of the parity drive.
Note:
2.4.6
It is recommended that you perform a consistency check at
least once a month.
Copyback
The copyback feature allows you to copy data from a source drive of a
virtual drive to a destination drive that is not a part of the virtual drive.
Copyback is often used to create or restore a specific physical
configuration for a drive group (for example, a specific arrangement of
drive group members on the device I/O buses). Copyback can be run
automatically or manually.
Typically, when a drive fails or is expected to fail, the data is rebuilt on a
hot spare. The failed drive is replaced with a new disk. Then the data is
copied from the hot spare to the new drive, and the hot spare reverts
from a rebuild drive to its original hot spare status. The copyback
operation runs as a background activity, and the virtual drive is still
available online to the host.
Copyback is also initiated when the first Self-Monitoring Analysis and
Reporting Technology (SMART) error occurs on a drive that is part of a
virtual drive. The destination drive is a hot spare that qualifies as a
rebuild drive. The drive with the SMART error is marked as "failed" only
after the successful completion of the copyback. This avoids putting the
drive group in degraded status.
Components and Features
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
2-5
Note:
During a copyback operation, if the drive group involved in
the copyback is deleted because of a virtual drive deletion,
the destination drive reverts to an Unconfigured Good state
or hot spare state.
Order of Precedence –
In the following scenarios, rebuild takes precedence over the copyback
operation:
1. If a copyback operation is already taking place to a hot spare drive,
and any virtual drive on the controller degrades, the copyback
operation aborts, and a rebuild starts. The rebuild changes the virtual
drive to the optimal state.
2. The rebuild operation takes precedence over the copyback operation
when the conditions exist to start both operations. For example:
a. Where the hot spare is not configured (or unavailable) in the
system.
2.4.7
b.
There are two drives (both members of virtual drives), with one
drive exceeding the SMART error threshold, and the other failed.
c.
If you add a hot spare (assume a global hot spare) during a
copyback operation, the copyback is aborted, and the rebuild
operation starts on the hot spare.
Background Initialization
Background initialization is a consistency check that is forced when you
create a virtual drive. The difference between a background initialization
and a consistency check is that a background initialization is forced on
new virtual drives. This is an automatic operation that starts 5 minutes
after you create the virtual drive.
Background initialization is a check for media errors on the drives.
It ensures that striped data segments are the same on all drives in a
drive group. The default and recommended background initialization rate
is 30 percent. Before you change the rebuild rate, you must stop the
background initialization or the rate change will not affect the background
initialization rate. After you stop background initialization and change the
rebuild rate, the rate change takes effect when you restart background
initialization.
2-6
Introduction to RAID
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
2.4.8
Patrol Read
Patrol read involves the review of your system for possible drive errors
that could lead to drive failure and then action to correct errors. The goal
is to protect data integrity by detecting drive failure before the failure can
damage data. The corrective actions depend on the drive group
configuration and the type of errors.
Patrol read starts only when the controller is idle for a defined period of
time and no other background tasks are active, though it can continue to
run during heavy I/O processes.
You can use the MegaRAID Command Tool or the MegaRAID Storage
Manager to select the patrol read options, which you can use to set
automatic or manual operation, or disable patrol read. See Section 4.4,
“Controller Property-Related Options,” or Section 8.5, “Running a Patrol
Read”.
2.4.9
Disk Striping
Disk striping allows you to write data across multiple drives instead of
just one drive. Disk striping involves partitioning each drive storage space
into stripes that can vary in size from 8 KB to 1024 KB. These stripes
are interleaved in a repeated sequential manner. The combined storage
space is composed of stripes from each drive. It is recommended that
you keep stripe sizes the same across RAID drive groups.
For example, in a four-disk system using only disk striping (used in RAID
level 0), segment 1 is written to disk 1, segment 2 is written to disk 2,
and so on. Disk striping enhances performance because multiple drives
are accessed simultaneously, but disk striping does not provide data
redundancy.
Figure 2.1
Segment 1
Segment 5
Segment 9
Example of Disk Striping (RAID 0)
Segment 2
Segment 6
Segment 10
Components and Features
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Segment 3
Segment 7
Segment 11
Segment 4
Segment 8
Segment 12
2-7
2.4.9.1
Stripe Width
Stripe width is the number of drives involved in a drive group where
striping is implemented. For example, a four-disk drive group with disk
striping has a stripe width of four.
2.4.9.2
Stripe Size
The stripe size is the length of the interleaved data segments that the
RAID controller writes across multiple drives, not including parity drives.
For example, consider a stripe that contains 64 KB of disk space and has
16 KB of data residing on each disk in the stripe. In this case, the stripe
size is 64 KB and the strip size is 16 KB.
2.4.9.3
Strip Size
The strip size is the portion of a stripe that resides on a single drive.
2.4.10 Disk Mirroring
With mirroring (used in RAID 1 and RAID 10), data written to one drive
is simultaneously written to another drive. The primary advantage of disk
mirroring is that it provides 100 percent data redundancy. Because the
contents of the disk are completely written to a second disk, data is not
lost if one disk fails. In addition, both drives contain the same data at all
times, so either disk can act as the operational disk. If one disk fails, the
contents of the other disk can be used to run the system and reconstruct
the failed disk.
Disk mirroring provides 100 percent redundancy, but is expensive
because each drive in the system must be duplicated. Figure 2.2 shows
an example of disk mirroring.
Figure 2.2
Example of Disk Mirroring (RAID 1)
Segment 1
Segment 2
Segment 3
Segment 4
2-8
Segment 1 Duplicated
Segment 2 Duplicated
Segment 3 Duplicated
Segment 4 Duplicated
Introduction to RAID
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
2.4.11 Parity
Parity generates a set of redundancy data from two or more parent data
sets. The redundancy data can be used to reconstruct one of the parent
data sets in the event of a drive failure. Parity data does not fully
duplicate the parent data sets, but parity generation can slow the write
process. In RAID, this method is applied to entire drives or stripes across
all of the drives in a drive group. The types of parity are described in
Table 2.1.
Table 2.1
Types of Parity
Parity Type
Description
Dedicated
The parity data on two or more drives is stored on an
additional disk.
Distributed
The parity data is distributed across more than one drive in
the system.
RAID 5 combines distributed parity with disk striping. If a single drive
fails, it can be rebuilt from the parity and the data on the remaining
drives. An example of a RAID 5 drive group is shown in Figure 2.3. RAID
5 uses parity to provide redundancy for one drive failure without
duplicating the contents of entire drives. RAID 6 uses distributed parity
and disk striping, also, but adds a second set of parity data so that it can
survive up to two drive failures.
Figure 2.3
Example of Distributed Parity (RAID 5)
Segment 1
Segment 7
Segment 2
Segment 8
Segment 3
Segment 9
Segment 4
Segment 10
Segment 13
Segment 19
Segment 25
Parity (26–30)
Segment 14
Segment 20
Parity (21-25)
Segment 26
Segment 15
Parity (16-20)
Segment 21
Segment 27
Parity (11–15)
Segment 16
Segment 22
Segment 28
Segment 5
Parity (6-10)
Segment 11
Segment 17
Segment 23
Segment 29
Parity (1-5)
Segment 6
Segment 12
Segment 18
Segment 24
Segment 30
Note: Parity is distributed across all drives in the drive group.
Components and Features
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
2-9
2.4.12 Disk Spanning
Disk spanning allows multiple drives to function like one big drive.
Spanning overcomes lack of disk space and simplifies storage
management by combining existing resources or adding relatively
inexpensive resources. For example, four 20 GB drives can be combined
to appear to the operating system as a single 80 GB drive.
Spanning alone does not provide reliability or performance
enhancements. Spanned virtual drives must have the same stripe size
and must be contiguous. In Figure 2.4, RAID 1 drive groups are turned
into a RAID 10 drive group.
Note:
Figure 2.4
Make sure that the spans are in different backplanes, so
that if one span fails, you do not lose the whole drive group.
Example of Disk Spanning
60 GB/s
60 GB/s
Can Be Accessed as
One 120 GB/s Drive
Note:
2.4.12.1
60 GB/s
60 GB/s
Can Be Accessed as
One 120 GB/s Drive
Spanning two contiguous RAID 0 virtual drives does not
produce a new RAID level or add fault tolerance. It does
increase the capacity of the virtual drive and improves
performance by doubling the number of spindles.
Spanning for RAID 00, RAID 10, RAID 50, and RAID 60
Table 2.2 describes how to configure RAID 00, RAID 10, RAID 50, and
RAID 60 by spanning. The virtual drives must have the same stripe size
and the maximum number of spans is eight. The full drive capacity is
used when you span virtual drives; you cannot specify a smaller drive
capacity.
See Section Chapter 7, “Configuration” for detailed procedures for
configuring drive groups and virtual drives, and spanning the drives.
2-10
Introduction to RAID
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Table 2.2
Spanning for RAID 10, RAID 50, and RAID 60
Level
Description
00
Configure RAID 00 by spanning two contiguous RAID 0 virtual
drives, up to the maximum number of supported devices for the
controller.
10
Configure RAID 10 by spanning two contiguous RAID 1 virtual
drives, up to the maximum number of supported devices for the
controller. RAID 10 supports a maximum of eight spans. You must
use an even number of drives in each RAID virtual drive in the
span. The RAID 1 virtual drives must have the same stripe size.
50
Configure RAID 50 by spanning two contiguous RAID 5 virtual
drives. The RAID 5 virtual drives must have the same stripe size.
60
Configure RAID 60 by spanning two contiguous RAID 6 virtual
drives. The RAID 6 virtual drives must have the same stripe size.
2.4.13 Hot Spares
A hot spare is an extra, unused drive that is part of the disk subsystem.
It is usually in standby mode, ready for service if a drive fails. Hot spares
permit you to replace failed drives without system shutdown or user
intervention. MegaRAID SAS RAID controllers can implement automatic
and transparent rebuilds of failed drives using hot spare drives, providing
a high degree of fault tolerance and zero downtime.
Note:
When running RAID 0 and RAID 5 virtual drives on the
same set of drives (a sliced configuration), a rebuild to a
hot spare will not occur after a drive failure until the
RAID 0 virtual drive is deleted.
The RAID management software allows you to specify drives as hot
spares. When a hot spare is needed, the RAID controller assigns the hot
spare that has a capacity closest to and at least as great as that of the
failed drive to take the place of the failed drive. The failed drive is
removed from the virtual drive and marked ready awaiting removal once
the rebuild to a hot spare begins. You can make hot spares of the drives
that are not in a RAID virtual drive.
You can use the RAID management software to designate the hot spare
to have enclosure affinity, meaning that if there are drive failures present
on a split backplane configuration, the hot spare will be used first on the
backplane side that it resides in.
Components and Features
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
2-11
If the hot spare is designated as having enclosure affinity, it will attempt
to rebuild any failed drives on the backplane that it resides in before
rebuilding any other drives on other backplanes.
Note:
If a rebuild to a hot spare fails for any reason, the hot spare
drive will be marked as "failed". If the source drive fails,
both the source drive and the hot spare drive will be
marked as "failed".
There are two types of hot spares:
2.4.13.1
•
Global hot spare
•
Dedicated hot spare
Global Hot Spare
A global hot spare drive can be used to replace any failed drive in a
redundant drive group as long as its capacity is equal to or larger than
the coerced capacity of the failed drive. A global hot spare defined on
any channel should be available to replace a failed drive on both
channels.
2.4.13.2
Dedicated Hot Spare
A dedicated hot spare can be used to replace a failed drive only in a
selected drive group. One or more drives can be designated as a
member of a spare drive pool. The most suitable drive from the pool is
selected for fail over. A dedicated hot spare is used before one from the
global hot spare pool.
Hot spare drives can be located on any RAID channel. Standby hot
spares (not being used in RAID drive group) are polled every 60 seconds
at a minimum, and their status made available in the drive group
management software. RAID controllers offer the ability to rebuild with a
disk that is in a system, but not initially set to be a hot spare.
Observe the following parameters when using hot spares:
2-12
•
Hot spares are used only in drive groups with redundancy: RAID
levels 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60.
•
A hot spare connected to a specific RAID controller can be used to
rebuild a drive that is connected to the same controller only.
Introduction to RAID
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
•
You must assign the hot spare to one or more drives through the
controller BIOS or use drive group management software to place it
in the hot spare pool.
•
A hot spare must have free space equal to or greater than the drive
it replaces. For example, to replace an 18 GB drive, the hot spare
must be 18 GB or larger.
2.4.14 Disk Rebuilds
When a drive in a RAID drive group fails, you can rebuild the drive by
recreating the data that was stored on the drive before it failed. The RAID
controller recreates the data using the data stored on the other drives in
the drive group. Rebuilding can be done only in drive groups with data
redundancy, which includes RAID 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60 drive groups.
The RAID controller uses hot spares to rebuild failed drives automatically
and transparently, at user-defined rebuild rates. If a hot spare is available,
the rebuild can start automatically when a drive fails. If a hot spare is not
available, the failed drive must be replaced with a new drive so that the
data on the failed drive can be rebuilt.
The failed drive is removed from the virtual drive and marked ready
awaiting removal when the rebuild to a hot spare begins. If the system
goes down during a rebuild, the RAID controller automatically restarts
the rebuild after the system reboots.
Note:
When the rebuild to a hot spare begins, the failed drive is
often removed from the virtual drive before management
applications detect the failed drive. When this occurs, the
events logs show the drive rebuilding to the hot spare
without showing the failed drive. The formerly failed drive
will be marked as "ready" after a rebuild begins to a hot
spare.
Note:
If a source drive fails during a rebuild to a hot spare, the
rebuild fails, and the failed source drive is marked as offline.
In addition, the rebuilding hot spare drive is changed back
to a hot spare. After a rebuild fails because of a source
drive failure, the dedicated hot spare is still dedicated and
assigned to the correct drive group, and the global hot
spare is still global.
Components and Features
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
2-13
An automatic drive rebuild will not start if you replace a drive during a
RAID-level migration. The rebuild must be started manually after the
expansion or migration procedure is complete.
2.4.15 Rebuild Rate
The rebuild rate is the percentage of the compute cycles dedicated to
rebuilding failed drives. A rebuild rate of 100 percent means that the
system gives priority to rebuilding the failed drives.
The rebuild rate can be configured between 0 percent and 100 percent.
At 0 percent, the rebuild is done only if the system is not doing anything
else. At 100 percent, the rebuild has a higher priority than any other
system activity. Using 0 or 100 percent is not recommended. The default
rebuild rate is 30 percent.
2.4.16 Hot Swap
A hot swap is the manual replacement of a defective drive unit while the
computer is still running. When a new drive has been installed, a rebuild
will occur automatically if:
•
The newly inserted drive is the same capacity as or larger than the
failed drive
•
It is placed in the same drive bay as the failed drive it is replacing
The RAID controller can be configured to detect the new drives and
rebuild the contents of the drive automatically.
2.4.17 Drive States
A drive state is a property indicating the status of the drive. The drive
states are described in Table 2.3.
Table 2.3
2-14
Drive States
State
Description
Online
A drive that can be accessed by the RAID controller and
is part of the virtual drive.
Unconfigured
Good
A drive that is functioning normally but is not configured
as a part of a virtual drive or as a hot spare.
Introduction to RAID
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Table 2.3
Drive States (Cont.)
State
Description
Hot Spare
A drive that is powered up and ready for use as a spare
in case an online drive fails.
Failed
A drive that was originally configured as Online or Hot
Spare, but on which the firmware detects an
unrecoverable error.
Rebuild
A drive to which data is being written to restore full
redundancy for a virtual drive.
Unconfigured
Bad
A drive on which the firmware detects an unrecoverable
error; the drive was Unconfigured Good or the drive could
not be initialized.
Missing
A drive that was Online but which has been removed from
its location.
Offline
A drive that is part of a virtual drive but which has invalid
data as far as the RAID configuration is concerned.
Note: When a virtual drive with cached data goes offline,
the cache for the virtual drive is discarded. Because
the virtual drive is offline, the cache cannot be
saved.
2.4.18 Virtual Drive States
The virtual drive states are described in Table 2.4.
Table 2.4
Virtual Drive States
State
Description
Optimal
The virtual drive operating condition is good. All configured
drives are online.
Degraded
The virtual drive operating condition is not optimal. One of
the configured drives has failed or is offline.
Partial
Degraded
The operating condition in a RAID 6 virtual drive is not
optimal. One of the configured drives has failed or is offline.
RAID 6 can tolerate up to two drive failures.
Failed
The virtual drive has failed.
Offline
The virtual drive is not available to the RAID controller.
Components and Features
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
2-15
2.4.19 Enclosure Management
Enclosure management is the intelligent monitoring of the disk
subsystem by software and/or hardware. The disk subsystem can be part
of the host computer or can reside in an external disk enclosure.
Enclosure management helps you stay informed of events in the disk
subsystem, such as a drive or power supply failure. Enclosure
management increases the fault tolerance of the disk subsystem.
2.5
RAID Levels
The RAID controller supports RAID levels 0, 00, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60.
The supported RAID levels are summarized in the following section.
In addition, it supports independent drives (configured as RAID 0 and
RAID 00.) The following sections describe the RAID levels in detail.
2.5.1
Summary of RAID Levels
RAID 0 uses striping to provide high data throughput, especially for large
files in an environment that does not require fault tolerance.
RAID 1 uses mirroring so that data written to one drive is simultaneously
written to another drive. This is good for small databases or other
applications that require small capacity but complete data redundancy.
RAID 5 uses disk striping and parity data across all drives (distributed
parity) to provide high data throughput, especially for small random
access.
RAID 6 uses distributed parity, with two independent parity blocks per
stripe, and disk striping. A RAID 6 virtual drive can survive the loss of
two drives without losing data. A RAID 6 drive group, which requires a
minimum of three drives, is similar to a RAID 5 drive group. Blocks of
data and parity information are written across all drives. The parity
information is used to recover the data if one or two drives fail in the drive
group.
A RAID 00 drive group is a spanned drive group that creates a striped
set from a series of RAID 0 drive groups.
2-16
Introduction to RAID
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
RAID 10, a combination of RAID 0 and RAID 1, consists of striped data
across mirrored spans. A RAID 10 drive group is a spanned drive group
that creates a striped set from a series of mirrored drives. RAID 10
allows a maximum of eight spans. You must use an even number of
drives in each RAID virtual drive in the span. The RAID 1 virtual drives
must have the same stripe size. RAID 10 provides high data throughput
and complete data redundancy but uses a larger number of spans.
RAID 50, a combination of RAID 0 and RAID 5, uses distributed parity
and disk striping. A RAID 50 drive group is a spanned drive group in
which data is striped across multiple RAID 5 drive groups. RAID 50
works best with data that requires high reliability, high request rates, high
data transfers, and medium-to-large capacity.
Note:
Having virtual drives of different RAID levels, such as RAID
0 and RAID 5, in the same drive group is not allowed.
For example, if an existing RAID 5 virtual drive is created
out of partial space in an array, the next virtual drive in the
array has to be R5 only.
RAID 60, a combination of RAID 0 and RAID 6, uses distributed parity,
with two independent parity blocks per stripe in each RAID set, and disk
striping. A RAID 60 virtual drive can survive the loss of two drives in each
of the RAID 6 sets without losing data. It works best with data that
requires high reliability, high request rates, high data transfers, and
medium-to-large capacity.
2.5.2
Selecting a RAID Level
To ensure the best performance, you should select the optimal RAID
level when you create a system drive. The optimal RAID level for your
drive group depends on a number of factors:
•
The number of drives in the drive group
•
The capacity of the drives in the drive group
•
The need for data redundancy
•
The disk performance requirements
RAID Levels
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
2-17
2.5.3
RAID 0
RAID 0 provides disk striping across all drives in the RAID drive group.
RAID 0 does not provide any data redundancy, but, along with RAID 0,
does offer the best performance of any RAID level. RAID 0 breaks up
data into smaller segments, and then stripes the data segments across
each drive in the drive group. The size of each data segment is
determined by the stripe size. RAID 0 offers high bandwidth.
Note:
RAID level 0 is not fault tolerant. If a drive in a RAID 0 drive
group fails, the whole virtual drive (all drives associated
with the virtual drive) will fail.
By breaking up a large file into smaller segments, the RAID controller
can use both SAS drives and SATA drives to read or write the file faster.
RAID 0 involves no parity calculations to complicate the write operation.
This makes RAID 0 ideal for applications that require high bandwidth but
do not require fault tolerance. Table 2.5 provides an overview of RAID 0.
Figure 2.5 provides a graphic example of a RAID 0 drive group.
Table 2.5
RAID 0 Overview
Uses
Provides high data throughput, especially for large files.
Any environment that does not require fault tolerance.
Strong Points
Provides increased data throughput for large files.
No capacity loss penalty for parity.
Weak Points
Does not provide fault tolerance or high bandwidth.
All data lost if any drive fails.
Drives
1 to 32
Figure 2.5
RAID 0 Drive Group Example with Two Drives
Segment 1
Segment 3
Segment 5
Segment 7
2-18
Segment 2
Segment 4
Segment 6
Segment 8
Introduction to RAID
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
2.5.4
RAID 1
In RAID 1, the RAID controller duplicates all data from one drive to a
second drive in the drive group. RAID 1 supports an even number of
drives from 2 to 32 in a single span. RAID 1 provides complete data
redundancy, but at the cost of doubling the required data storage
capacity. Table 2.6 provides an overview of RAID 1. Figure 2.6 provides
a graphic example of a RAID 1 drive group.
Table 2.6
RAID 1 Overview
Uses
Use RAID 1 for small databases or any other
environment that requires fault tolerance but small
capacity.
Strong Points
Provides complete data redundancy. RAID 1 is ideal for
any application that requires fault tolerance and minimal
capacity.
Weak Points
Requires twice as many drives. Performance is impaired
during drive rebuilds.
Drives
2 - 32 (must be an even number of drives)
Figure 2.6
RAID 1 Drive Group
Segment 1
Segment 1
Duplicate
2
Segment 2 Segment
Duplicate
Segment 3 Segment 3
Duplicate
Segment 4
Segment 5
Segment 5
Duplicate
Segment 6 Segment 6
Duplicate
...
7
Segment 7 Segment
Duplicate
...
8
Segment 8 Segment
Duplicate
...
...
RAID1
RAID1
2.5.5
RAID1
Segment 4
Duplicate
RAID1
RAID 5
RAID 5 includes disk striping at the block level and parity. Parity is the
data’s property of being odd or even, and parity checking is used to
detect errors in the data. In RAID 5, the parity information is written to
all drives. RAID 5 is best suited for networks that perform a lot of small
input/output (I/O) transactions simultaneously.
RAID Levels
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
2-19
RAID 5 addresses the bottleneck issue for random I/O operations.
Because each drive contains both data and parity, numerous writes can
take place concurrently.
Table 2.7 provides an overview of RAID 5. Figure 2.7 provides a graphic
example of a RAID 5 drive group.
Table 2.7
RAID 5 Overview
Uses
Provides high data throughput, especially for large files.
Use RAID 5 for transaction processing applications
because each drive can read and write independently.
If a drive fails, the RAID controller uses the parity drive
to recreate all missing information. Use also for office
automation and online customer service that requires
fault tolerance. Use for any application that has high
read request rates but low write request rates.
Strong Points
Provides data redundancy, high read rates, and good
performance in most environments. Provides
redundancy with lowest loss of capacity.
Weak Points
Not well-suited to tasks requiring lot of writes. Suffers
more impact if no cache is used (clustering). Drive
performance will be reduced if a drive is being rebuilt.
Environments with few processes do not perform as
well because the RAID overhead is not offset by the
performance gains in handling simultaneous processes.
Drives
3 to 32
Figure 2.7
RAID 5 Drive Group with Six Drives
Segment 1
Segment 7
Segment 2
Segment 8
Segment 3
Segment 9
Segment 4
Segment 10
Segment 13
Segment 19
Segment 25
Parity (26–30)
Segment 14
Segment 20
Parity (21-25)
Segment 26
Segment 15
Parity (16-20)
Segment 21
Segment 27
Parity (11–15)
Segment 16
Segment 22
Segment 28
Note: Parity is distributed across all drives in the drive group.
2-20
Introduction to RAID
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Segment 5
Parity (6-10)
Segment 11
Segment 17
Segment 23
Segment 29
Parity (1-5)
Segment 6
Segment 12
Segment 18
Segment 24
Segment 30
2.5.6
RAID 6
RAID 6 is similar to RAID 5 (disk striping and parity), except that instead
of one parity block per stripe, there are two. With two independent parity
blocks, RAID 6 can survive the loss of two drives in a virtual drive without
losing data. Provides a high level of data protection through the use of a
second parity block in each stripe. Use RAID 6 for data that requires a
very high level of protection from loss.
In the case of a failure of one drive or two drives in a virtual drive, the
RAID controller uses the parity blocks to recreate all of the missing
information. If two drives in a RAID 6 virtual drive fail, two drive rebuilds
are required, one for each drive. These rebuilds do not occur at the same
time. The controller rebuilds one failed drive, and then the other failed
drive.
Table 2.6 provides a graphic example of a RAID 6 drive group.
Table 2.8
RAID 6 Overview
Uses
Use for office automation and online customer service
that requires fault tolerance. Use for any application that
has high read request rates but low write request rates.
Strong Points
Provides data redundancy, high read rates, and good
performance in most environments. Can survive the
loss of two drives or the loss of a drive while another
drive is being rebuilt. Provides the highest level of
protection against drive failures of all of the RAID levels.
Read performance is similar to that of RAID 5.
Weak Points
Not well-suited to tasks requiring a lot of writes. A RAID
6 virtual drive has to generate two sets of parity data for
each write operation, which results in a significant
decrease in performance during writes. Drive
performance is reduced during a drive rebuild.
Environments with few processes do not perform as
well because the RAID overhead is not offset by the
performance gains in handling simultaneous processes.
RAID 6 costs more because of the extra capacity
required by using two parity blocks per stripe.
Drives
3 to 32
Figure 2.8 shows a RAID 6 data layout. The second set of parity drives
are denoted by Q. The P drives follow the RAID 5 parity scheme.
RAID Levels
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
2-21
Figure 2.8
Segment 1
Segment 6
Segment 2
Segment 7
Segment 11
Segment 16
Parity (P17-P20)
Segment 12
Parity (P13-P16)
Parity (Q17-Q20)
Example of Distributed Parity across Two Blocks in a
Stripe (RAID 6)
Segment 3
Segment 8
Segment 4
Parity (P5-P8)
Parity (P9-P12) Parity (Q9–Q12)
Segment 13
Parity (Q13-Q16)
Segment 17
Segment 18
Parity (P1-P4)
Parity (Q5-Q8)
Segment 9
Segment 14
Segment 19
Parity (Q1-Q4)
Segment 5
Segment 10
Segment 15
Segment 20
Note: Parity is distributed across all drives in the drive group.
2.5.7
RAID 00
A RAID 00 drive group is a spanned drive group that creates a striped
set from a series of RAID 0 drive groups. RAID 00 does not provide any
data redundancy, but, along with RAID 0, does offer the best
performance of any RAID level. RAID 00 breaks up data into smaller
segments and then stripes the data segments across each drive in the
drive groups. The size of each data segment is determined by the stripe
size. RAID 00 offers high bandwidth.
Note:
RAID level 00 is not fault tolerant. If a drive in a RAID 0
drive group fails, the whole virtual drive (all drives
associated with the virtual drive) will fail.
By breaking up a large file into smaller segments, the RAID controller
can use both SAS drives and SATA drives to read or write the file faster.
RAID 00 involves no parity calculations to complicate the write operation.
This makes RAID 00 ideal for applications that require high bandwidth
but do not require fault tolerance. Table 2.6 provides an overview of
RAID 00. Figure 2.6 provides a graphic example of a RAID 00 drive
group.
Table 2.9
2-22
RAID 00 Overview
Uses
Provides high data throughput, especially for large files.
Any environment that does not require fault tolerance.
Strong Points
Provides increased data throughput for large files.
No capacity loss penalty for parity.
Introduction to RAID
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Table 2.9
RAID 00 Overview
Weak Points
Does not provide fault tolerance or high bandwidth.
All data lost if any drive fails.
Drives
2 to 256
Figure 2.9
RAID 00
RAID 00 Drive Group Example with Two Drives
Segment 3 Segment 4
Segment 1 Segment 2
Segment 5 Segment 6
Segment 7
Segment 8
Segment 9 Segment 10
Segment 11 Segment 12
Segment 13 Segment 14 Segment 15 Segment 16
Segment 17 Segment 18
...
Segment 19 Segment 20
...
Segment 21 Segment 22
...
RAID 0
RAID 0
RAID 0
Segment 23 Segment 24
...
RAID 0
RAID 0
2.5.8
RAID 10
RAID 10 is a combination of RAID 0 and RAID 1, and consists of stripes
across mirrored drives. RAID 10 breaks up data into smaller blocks and
then mirrors the blocks of data to each RAID 1 drive group. The first
RAID 1 drive in each drive group then duplicates its data to the second
drive. The size of each block is determined by the stripe size parameter,
which is set during the creation of the RAID set. The RAID 1 virtual
drives must have the same stripe size.
Spanning is used because one virtual drive is defined across more than
one drive group. Virtual drives defined across multiple RAID 1 level drive
groups are referred to as RAID level 10, (1+0). Data is striped across
drive groups to increase performance by enabling access to multiple
drive groups simultaneously.
Each spanned RAID 10 virtual drive can tolerate multiple drive failures,
as long as each failure is in a separate drive group. If there are drive
failures, less than total drive capacity is available.
Configure RAID 10 by spanning two contiguous RAID 1 virtual drives, up
to the maximum number of supported devices for the controller. RAID 10
supports a maximum of eight spans, with a maximum of 32 drives per
RAID Levels
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
2-23
span. You must use an even number of drives in each RAID 10 virtual
drive in the span.
Note:
Other factors, such as the type of controller, can restrict the
number of drives supported by RAID 10 virtual drives.
Table 2.10 provides an overview of RAID 10.
Table 2.10
RAID 10 Overview
Uses
Appropriate when used with data storage that needs
100 percent redundancy of mirrored drive groups and
that also needs the enhanced I/O performance of RAID
0 (striped drive groups.) RAID 10 works well for
medium-sized databases or any environment that
requires a higher degree of fault tolerance and moderate
to medium capacity.
Strong Points
Provides both high data transfer rates and complete
data redundancy.
Weak Points
Requires twice as many drives as all other RAID levels
except RAID 1.
Drives
4 - the maximum number of drives supported by the
controller (with a maximum of eight spans)
In Figure 2.10, virtual drive 0 is created by distributing data across four
drive groups (drive groups 0 through 3).
Figure 2.10 RAID 10 Level Virtual Drive
RAID 10
Segment 1
Segment 1
Duplicate
2
Segment 2 Segment
Duplicate
Segment 3 Segment 3
Duplicate
Segment 4
Segment 5
Segment 5
Duplicate
Segment 6 Segment 6
Duplicate
...
7
Segment 7 Segment
Duplicate
...
8
Segment 8 Segment
Duplicate
...
...
RAID1
RAID1
RAID1
Segment 4
Duplicate
RAID1
RAID 0
2.5.9
RAID 50
RAID 50 provides the features of both RAID 0 and RAID 5. RAID 50
includes both parity and disk striping across multiple drive groups. RAID
2-24
Introduction to RAID
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
50 is best implemented on two RAID 5 drive groups with data striped
across both drive groups.
RAID 50 breaks up data into smaller blocks and then stripes the blocks
of data to each RAID 5 disk set. RAID 5 breaks up data into smaller
blocks, calculates parity by performing an exclusive-or on the blocks and
then writes the blocks of data and parity to each drive in the drive group.
The size of each block is determined by the stripe size parameter, which
is set during the creation of the RAID set.
RAID level 50 can support up to eight spans and tolerate up to eight
drive failures, though less than total drive capacity is available. Though
multiple drive failures can be tolerated, only one drive failure can be
tolerated in each RAID 5 level drive group.
Table 2.11 provides an overview of RAID 50.
Table 2.11
RAID 50 Overview
Uses
Appropriate when used with data that requires high
reliability, high request rates, high data transfer, and
medium to large capacity.
Strong Points
Provides high data throughput, data redundancy, and
very good performance.
Weak Points
Requires 2 to 8 times as many parity drives as RAID 5.
Drives
Eight spans of RAID 5 drive groups containing 3-32
drives each (limited by the maximum number of devices
supported by the controller)
Figure 2.11 RAID 50 Level Virtual Drive
RAID 50
Segment 1
Segment 6
Segment 2
(Segment 1,2)
(Segment 5,6) Segment 5
(Segment 9,10) Segment 9
Segment 3
Segment 8
Segment 10
Segment 4 (Segment 3,4)
(Segment 7,8) Segment 7
(Segment 11,12) Segment 11 Segment 12
RAID 5
RAID 5
RAID 0
RAID Levels
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
2-25
2.5.10 RAID 60
RAID 60 provides the features of both RAID 0 and RAID 6, and includes
both parity and disk striping across multiple drive groups. RAID 6
supports two independent parity blocks per stripe. A RAID 60 virtual
drive can survive the loss of two drives in each of the RAID 6 sets
without losing data. RAID 60 is best implemented on two RAID 6 drive
groups with data striped across both drive groups.
RAID 60 breaks up data into smaller blocks, and then stripes the blocks
of data to each RAID 6 disk set. RAID 6 breaks up data into smaller
blocks, calculates parity by performing an exclusive-or on the blocks and
then writes the blocks of data and parity to each drive in the drive group.
The size of each block is determined by the stripe size parameter, which
is set during the creation of the RAID set.
RAID 60 can support up to 8 spans and tolerate up to 16 drive failures,
though less than total drive capacity is available. Two drive failures can
be tolerated in each RAID 6 level drive group.
Table 2.12
RAID 60 Overview
Uses
Provides a high level of data protection through the use
of a second parity block in each stripe. Use RAID 60 for
data that requires a very high level of protection from
loss.
In the case of a failure of one drive or two drives in a
RAID set in a virtual drive, the RAID controller uses the
parity blocks to recreate all of the missing information.
If two drives in a RAID 6 set in a RAID 60 virtual drive
fail, two drive rebuilds are required, one for each drive.
These rebuilds can occur at the same time.
Use for office automation and online customer service
that requires fault tolerance. Use for any application that
has high read request rates but low write request rates.
Strong Points
2-26
Provides data redundancy, high read rates, and good
performance in most environments. Each RAID 6 set
can survive the loss of two drives or the loss of a drive
while another drive is being rebuilt. Provides the highest
level of protection against drive failures of all of the
RAID levels. Read performance is similar to that of
RAID 50, though random reads in RAID 60 might be
slightly faster because data is spread across at least
one more disk in each RAID 6 set.
Introduction to RAID
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Table 2.12
RAID 60 Overview
Weak Points
Not well suited to tasks requiring lot of writes. A RAID
60 virtual drive has to generate two sets of parity data
for each write operation, which results in a significant
decrease in performance during writes. Drive
performance is reduced during a drive rebuild.
Environments with few processes do not perform as
well because the RAID overhead is not offset by the
performance gains in handling simultaneous processes.
RAID 6 costs more because of the extra capacity
required by using two parity blocks per stripe.
Drives
A minimum of 8
Figure 2.12 shows a RAID 6 data layout. The second set of parity drives
are denoted by Q. The P drives follow the RAID 5 parity scheme.
Figure 2.12 RAID 60 Level Virtual Drive
RAID
60
Segment 1
Segment 2
Parity (Q3-Q4)
Parity (Q1-Q2)
Parity (P1-P2)
Segment 3
Segment 4
Parity (Q3-Q4)
Parity (P3-P4)
Segment 8
Parity (P3-P4)
Segment 7
Segment 6
Parity (Q5-Q6)
Parity (P5-P6)
Parity (Q11–Q12)
Parity (P11-P12)
Segment 11
Segment 12
Parity (Q9–Q10)
Segment 9
Segment 5
Segment 10
Parity (P15-P16)
Segment 15
Segment 16
Parity (Q15-Q16)
Parity (P13-P14)
Parity (P9-P10)
Segment 13
Segment 14
Parity (Q13-Q14)
RAID 6
RAID 6
RAID 0
Note: Parity is distributed across all drives in the drive group.
2.6
RAID Configuration Strategies
The most important factors in RAID drive group configuration are:
•
Virtual drive availability (fault tolerance)
•
Virtual drive performance
•
Virtual drive capacity
You cannot configure a virtual drive that optimizes all three factors, but it
is easy to choose a virtual drive configuration that maximizes one factor
at the expense of another factor. For example, RAID 1 (mirroring)
provides excellent fault tolerance, but requires a redundant drive.
The following subsections describe how to use the RAID levels to
RAID Configuration Strategies
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
2-27
maximize virtual drive availability (fault tolerance), virtual drive
performance, and virtual drive capacity.
2.6.1
Maximizing Fault Tolerance
Fault tolerance is achieved through the ability to perform automatic and
transparent rebuilds using hot spare drives and hot swaps. A hot spare
drive is an unused online available drive that the RAID controller instantly
plugs into the system when an active drive fails. After the hot spare is
automatically moved into the RAID drive group, the failed drive is
automatically rebuilt on the spare drive. The RAID drive group continues
to handle requests while the rebuild occurs.
A hot swap is the manual substitution of a replacement unit in a disk
subsystem for a defective one, where the substitution can be performed
while the subsystem is runninghot swap drives. Auto-Rebuild in the
WebBIOS Configuration Utility allows a failed drive to be replaced and
automatically rebuilt by “hot-swapping” the drive in the same drive bay.
The RAID drive group continues to handle requests while the rebuild
occurs, providing a high degree of fault tolerance and zero downtime.
Table 2.13
RAID
Level
RAID Levels and Fault Tolerance
Fault Tolerance
0
Does not provide fault tolerance. All data is lost if any drive fails. Disk striping writes
data across multiple drives instead of just one drive. It involves partitioning each drive
storage space into stripes that can vary in size. RAID 0 is ideal for applications that
require high bandwidth but do not require fault tolerance.
1
Provides complete data redundancy. If one drive fails, the contents of the other drive in
the drive group can be used to run the system and reconstruct the failed drive.
The primary advantage of disk mirroring is that it provides 100 percent data
redundancy. Since the contents of the drive are completely written to a second drive,
no data is lost if one of the drives fails. Both drives contain the same data at all times.
RAID 1 is ideal for any application that requires fault tolerance and minimal capacity.
5
Combines distributed parity with disk striping. Parity provides redundancy for one drive
failure without duplicating the contents of entire drives. If a drive fails, the RAID
controller uses the parity data to reconstruct all missing information. In RAID 5, this
method is applied to entire drives or stripes across all drives in a drive group. Using
distributed partiy, RAID 5 offers fault tolerance with limited overhead.
2-28
Introduction to RAID
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
RAID
Level
Fault Tolerance
6
Combines distributed parity with disk striping. RAID 6 can sustain two drive failures and
still maintain data integrity. Parity provides redundancy for two drive failures without
duplicating the contents of entire drives. If a drive fails, the RAID controller uses the
parity data to reconstruct all missing information. In RAID 6, this method is applied to
entire drives or stripes across all of the drives in a drive group. Using distributed partiy,
RAID 6 offers fault tolerance with limited overhead.
00
Does not provide fault tolerance. All data in a virtual drive is lost if any drive in that
virtual drive fails. Disk striping writes data across multiple drives instead of just one
drive. It involves partitioning each drive storage space into stripes that can vary in size.
RAID 00 is ideal for applications that require high bandwidth but do not require fault
tolerance.
10
Provides complete data redundancy using striping across spanned RAID 1 drive
groups. RAID 10 works well for any environment that requires the 100 percent
redundancy offered by mirrored drive groups. RAID 10 can sustain a drive failure in
each mirrored drive group and maintain drive integrity.
50
Provides data redundancy using distributed parity across spanned RAID 5 drive groups.
RAID 50 includes both parity and disk striping across multiple drives. If a drive fails, the
RAID controller uses the parity data to recreate all missing information. RAID 50 can
sustain one drive failure per RAID 5 drive group and still maintain data integrity.
60
Provides data redundancy using distributed parity across spanned RAID 6 drive groups.
RAID 60 can sustain two drive failures per RAID 6 drive group and still maintain data
integrity. It provides the highest level of protection against drive failures of all of the
RAID levels. RAID 60 includes both parity and disk striping across multiple drives. If a
drive fails, the RAID controller uses the parity data to recreate all missing information.
2.6.2
Maximizing Performance
A RAID disk subsystem improves I/O performance. The RAID drive
group appears to the host computer as a single storage unit or as
multiple virtual units. I/O is faster because drives can be accessed
simultaneously. Table 2.14 describes the performance for each RAID
level.
RAID Configuration Strategies
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
2-29
Table 2.14
RAID
Level
RAID Levels and Performance
Performance
0
RAID 0 (striping) offers excellent performance. RAID 0 breaks up data into smaller
blocks and then writes a block to each drive in the drive group. Disk striping writes data
across multiple drives instead of just one drive. It involves partitioning each drive
storage space into stripes that can vary in size from 8 KB to 1024 KB. These stripes
are interleaved in a repeated sequential manner. Disk striping enhances performance
because multiple drives are accessed simultaneously.
1
With RAID 1 (mirroring), each drive in the system must be duplicated, which requires
more time and resources than striping. Performance is impaired during drive rebuilds.
5
RAID 5 provides high data throughput, especially for large files. Use this RAID level for
any application that requires high read request rates, but low write request rates, such
as transaction processing applications, because each drive can read and write
independently. Since each drive contains both data and parity, numerous writes can
take place concurrently. In addition, robust caching algorithms and hardware based
exclusive-or assist make RAID 5 performance exceptional in many different
environments.
Parity generation can slow the write process, making write performance significantly
lower for RAID 5 than for RAID 0 or RAID 1. Drive performance is reduced when a drive
is being rebuilt. Clustering can also reduce drive performance. Environments with few
processes do not perform as well because the RAID overhead is not offset by the
performance gains in handling simultaneous processes.
6
RAID 6 works best when used with data that requires high reliability, high request rates,
and high data transfer. It provides high data throughput, data redundancy, and very
good performance. However, RAID 6 is not well suited to tasks requiring a lot of writes.
A RAID 6 virtual drive has to generate two sets of parity data for each write operation,
which results in a significant decrease in performance during writes. Drive performance
is reduced during a drive rebuild. Environments with few processes do not perform as
well because the RAID overhead is not offset by the performance gains in handling
simultaneous processes.
00
RAID 00 (striping in a spanned drive group) offers excellent performance. RAID 00
breaks up data into smaller blocks and then writes a block to each drive in the drive
groups. Disk striping writes data across multiple drives instead of just one drive. Striping
involves partitioning each drive storage space into stripes that can vary in size from
8 KB to 1024 KB. These stripes are interleaved in a repeated sequential manner. Disk
striping enhances performance because multiple drives are accessed simultaneously.
10
RAID 10 works best for data storage that need the enhanced I/O performance of
RAID 0 (striped drive groups), which provides high data transfer rates. Spanning
increases the capacity of the virtual drive and improves performance by doubling the
number of spindles. The system performance improves as the number of spans
increases. (The maximum number of spans is eight.) As the storage space in the spans
is filled, the system stripes data over fewer and fewer spans and RAID performance
degrades to that of a RAID 1 or RAID 5 drive group.
2-30
Introduction to RAID
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
RAID
Level
Performance
50
RAID 50 works best when used with data that requires high reliability, high request
rates, and high data transfer. It provides high data throughput, data redundancy, and
very good performance. Spanning increases the capacity of the virtual drive and
improves performance by doubling the number of spindles. The system performance
improves as the number of spans increases. (The maximum number of spans is eight.)
As the storage space in the spans is filled, the system stripes data over fewer and fewer
spans and RAID performance degrades to that of a RAID 1 or RAID 5 drive group.
60
RAID 60 works best when used with data that requires high reliability, high request
rates, and high data transfer. It provides high data throughput, data redundancy, and
very good performance. Spanning increases the capacity of the virtual drive and
improves performance by doubling the number of spindles. The system performance
improves as the number of spans increases. (The maximum number of spans is eight.)
As the storage space in the spans is filled, the system stripes data over fewer and fewer
spans and RAID performance degrades to that of a RAID 1 or RAID 6 drive group.
RAID 60 is not well suited to tasks requiring a lot of writes. A RAID 60 virtual drive has
to generate two sets of parity data for each write operation, which results in a significant
decrease in performance during writes. Drive performance is reduced during a drive
rebuild. Environments with few processes do not perform as well because the RAID
overhead is not offset by the performance gains in handling simultaneous processes.
2.6.3
Maximizing Storage Capacity
Storage capacity is an important factor when selecting a RAID level.
There are several variables to consider. Striping alone (RAID 0) requires
less storage space than mirrored data (RAID 1) or distributed parity
(RAID 5 or RAID 6). RAID 5, which provides redundancy for one drive
failure without duplicating the contents of entire drives, requires less
space then RAID 1. Table 2.15 explains the effects of the RAID levels on
storage capacity.
Table 2.15
RAID
Level
RAID Levels and Capacity
Capacity
0
RAID 0 (striping) involves partitioning each drive storage space into stripes that can
vary in size. The combined storage space is composed of stripes from each drive.
RAID 0 provides maximum storage capacity for a given set of drives.
1
With RAID 1 (mirroring), data written to one drive is simultaneously written to another
drive, which doubles the required data storage capacity. This is expensive because
each drive in the system must be duplicated.
RAID Configuration Strategies
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
2-31
RAID
Level
Capacity
5
RAID 5 provides redundancy for one drive failure without duplicating the contents of
entire drives. RAID 5 breaks up data into smaller blocks, calculates parity by performing
an exclusive-or on the blocks, then writes the blocks of data and parity to each drive in
the drive group. The size of each block is determined by the stripe size parameter,
which is set during the creation of the RAID set.
6
RAID 6 provides redundancy for two drive failures without duplicating the contents of
entire drives. However, it requires extra capacity because it uses two parity blocks per
stripe. This makes RAID 60 more expensive to implement.
00
RAID 00 (striping in a spanned drive group) involves partitioning each drive storage
space into stripes that can vary in size. The combined storage space is composed of
stripes from each drive. RAID 00 provides maximum storage capacity for a given set of
drives.
10
RAID 10 requires twice as many drives as all other RAID levels except RAID 1.
RAID 10 works well for medium-sized databases or any environment that requires a
higher degree of fault tolerance and moderate to medium capacity. Disk spanning
allows multiple drives to function like one big drive. Spanning overcomes lack of disk
space and simplifies storage management by combining existing resources or adding
relatively inexpensive resources.
50
RAID 50 requires two to four times as many parity drives as RAID 5. This RAID level
works best when used with data that requires medium to large capacity.
60
RAID 60 provides redundancy for two drive failures in each RAID set without duplicating
the contents of entire drives. However, it requires extra capacity because a RAID 60
virtual drive has to generate two sets of parity data for each write operation. This makes
RAID 60 more expensive to implement.
2.7
2.7.1
RAID Availability
RAID Availability Concept
Data availability without downtime is essential for many types of data
processing and storage systems. Businesses want to avoid the financial
costs and customer frustration associated with failed servers. RAID helps
you maintain data availability and avoid downtime for the servers that
provide that data. RAID offers several features, such as spare drives and
rebuilds, that you can use to fix any drive problems, while keeping the
servers running and data available. The following subsections describe
these features.
2-32
Introduction to RAID
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
2.7.1.1
Spare Drives
You can use spare drives to replace failed or defective drives in a drive
group. A replacement drive must be at least as large as the drive it
replaces. Spare drives include hot swaps, hot spares, and cold swaps.
A hot swap is the manual substitution of a replacement unit in a disk
subsystem for a defective one, where the substitution can be performed
while the subsystem is running (performing its normal functions).
The backplane and enclosure must support hot swap in order for the
functionality to work.
Hot spare drives are drives that power up along with the RAID drives and
operate in a standby state. If a drive used in a RAID virtual drive fails, a
hot spare automatically takes its place and the data on the failed drive is
rebuilt on the hot spare. Hot spares can be used for RAID levels 1, 5, 6,
10, 50, and 60.
Note:
If a rebuild to a hot spare fails for any reason, the hot spare
drive will be marked as "failed." If the source drive fails,
both the source drive and the hot spare drive will be
marked as "failed."
A cold swap requires that you power down the system before replacing
a defective drive in a disk subsystem.
2.7.1.2
Rebuilding
If a drive fails in a drive group that is configured as a RAID 1, 5, 6, 10,
50, or 60 virtual drive, you can recover the lost data by rebuilding the
drive. If you have configured hot spares, the RAID controller
automatically tries to use them to rebuild failed drives. Manual rebuild is
necessary if no hot spares with enough capacity to rebuild the failed
drives are available.You must insert a drive with enough storage into the
subsystem before rebuilding the failed drive.
2.8
Configuration Planning
Factors to consider when planning a configuration are the number of
drives the RAID controller can support, the purpose of the drive group,
and the availability of spare drives.
Configuration Planning
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
2-33
Each type of data stored in the disk subsystem has a different frequency
of read and write activity. If you know the data access requirements, you
can more successfully determine a strategy for optimizing the disk
subsystem capacity, availability, and performance.
Servers that support video on demand typically read the data often, but
write data infrequently. Both the read and write operations tend to be
long. Data stored on a general-purpose file server involves relatively
short read and write operations with relatively small files.
2.8.1
Number of Drives
Your configuration planning for the SAS RAID controller depends in part
on the number of drives that you want to use in a RAID drive group.
The number of drives in a drive group determines the RAID levels that
can be supported. Only one RAID level can be assigned to each virtual
drive.
2.8.2
Drive Group Purpose
Important factors to consider when creating RAID drive groups include
availability, performance, and capacity. Define the major purpose of the
drive group by answering questions related to these factors, such as the
following, which are followed by suggested RAID levels for each situation:
•
Will this drive group increase the system storage capacity for
general-purpose file and print servers? Use RAID 5, 6, 10, 50, or 60.
•
Does this drive group support any software system that must be
available 24 hours per day? Use RAID 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, or 60.
•
Will the information stored in this drive group contain large audio or
video files that must be available on demand? Use RAID 0 or 00.
•
Will this drive group contain data from an imaging system? Use
RAID 0, 00, or 10.
Fill out Table 2.16 to help you plan the drive group configuration. Rank
the requirements for your drive group, such as storage space and data
2-34
Introduction to RAID
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
redundancy, in order of importance, and then review the suggested RAID
levels.
Table 2.16
Factors to Consider for Drive Group Configuration
Requirement
Rank
Suggested RAID Level(s)
Storage space
RAID 0, RAID 5, RAID 00
Data redundancy
RAID 5, RAID 6, RAID 10, RAID 50,
RAID 60
Drive performance and throughput
RAID 0, RAID 00, RAID 10
Hot spares (extra drives required)
RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 6, RAID 10,
RAID 50, RAID 60
Configuration Planning
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
2-35
2-36
Introduction to RAID
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Chapter 3
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
This chapter describes the WebBIOS Configuration Utility (CU) and
consists of the following sections:
3.1
•
Section 3.1, “Overview”
•
Section 3.2, “Starting the WebBIOS CU”
•
Section 3.3, “WebBIOS CU Main Screen Options”
•
Section 3.4, “Creating a Storage Configuration”
•
Section 3.5, “Viewing and Changing Device Properties”
•
Section 3.6, “Viewing System Event Information”
•
Section 3.7, “Managing Configurations”
Overview
The WebBIOS CU enables you to create and manage RAID
configurations on LSI SAS controllers. Unlike the MegaRAID Storage
Manager™ software, the WebBIOS CU resides in the SAS controller
BIOS and operates independently of the operating system.
You can use the WebBIOS CU to do the following tasks:
•
Create drive groups and virtual drives for storage configurations
•
Display controller, virtual drive, drive, and battery backup unit (BBU)
properties, and change parameters
•
Delete virtual drives
•
Migrate a storage configuration to a different RAID level
•
Detect configuration mismatches
•
Import a foreign configuration
MegaRAID SAS Software User’s Guide
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-1
•
Scan devices connected to the controller
•
Initialize virtual drives
•
Check configurations for data consistency
The WebBIOS CU provides a configuration wizard to guide you through
the configuration of virtual drives and drive groups.
3.2
Starting the WebBIOS CU
Follow these steps to start the WebBIOS CU and access the main
screen.
1. When the host computer is booting, hold down the <Ctrl> key and
press the <H> key when the following text appears on the screen:
Copyright© LSI Corporation
Press <Ctrl><H> for WebBIOS
The Controller Selection screen appears.
2. If the system has multiple SAS controllers, select a controller.
3. Click Start to continue.
The main WebBIOS CU screen appears.
3-2
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3.3
WebBIOS CU Main Screen Options
Figure 3.1 shows the screen that appears when you start the WebBIOS
CU and select a controller.
Figure 3.1
WebBIOS CU Main Screen
In the right frame, the screen shows the virtual drives configured on the
controller, and the drives that are connected to the controller. In addition,
the screen indentifies drives that are foreign or missing.
Note:
In the list of virtual drives, the drive nodes are sorted based
on the order in which you added the drives to the drive
group, rather than the physical slot order that displays in the
physical trees.
Note:
The minimum screen resolution for WebBIOS is 640x480.
To toggle between the physical view and logical view of the storage
devices connected to the controller, click Physical View or Logical View
WebBIOS CU Main Screen Options
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-3
in the menu on the left. When the physical view screen appears, it shows
the drive groups that are configured on this controller.
For drives in an enclosure, the screen shows the following drive
information:
–
Enclosure
–
Slot
–
Interface type (such as SAS or SATA)
–
Drive type (HDD or SSD)
–
Drive size
–
Drive status (such as Online or Unconfigured Good)
The toolbar at the top of the WebBIOS CU has the following buttons, as
listed in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1
Icon
WebBIOS CU Toolbar Icons
Description
Click this icon to return to the main screen from any other WebBIOS CU screen.
Click this icon to return to the previous screen that you were viewing.
Click this icon to exit the WebBIOS CU program.
Click this icon to turn off the sound on the onboard controller alarm.
Click this icon to display information about the WebBIOS CU version, browser
version, and HTML interface engine.
Here is a description of the options listed on the left of the main
WebBIOS CU screen:
3-4
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3.4
•
Controller Selection: Select this option to view the Controller
Selection screen, where you can select a different SAS controller.
You can then view information about the controller and the devices
connected to it, or create a new configuration on the controller.
•
Controller Properties: Select this option to view the properties of
the currently selected SAS controller. For more information, see
Section 3.5.1, “Viewing and Changing Controller Properties.”
•
Scan Devices: Select this option to have the WebBIOS CU re-scan
the physical and virtual drives for any changes in the drive status or
the physical configuration. The WebBIOS CU displays the results of
the scan in the physical and virtual drive descriptions.
•
Virtual Drives: Select this option to view the Virtual Drives screen,
where you can change and view virtual drive properties, delete
virtual drives, initialize drives, and perform other tasks. For more
information, see Section 3.5.2, “Viewing and Changing Virtual Drive
Properties.”
•
Drives: Select this option to view the Drives screen, where you can
view drive properties, create hot spares, and perform other tasks.
For more information, see Section 3.5.3, “Viewing Drive Properties.”
•
Configuration Wizard: Select this option to start the Configuration
Wizard and create a new storage configuration, clear a configuration,
or add a configuration. For more information, see Section 3.4,
“Creating a Storage Configuration.”
•
Physical View/Logical View: Select this option to toggle between
the Physical View and Logical View screens.
•
Events: Select this option to view system events in the Event
Information screen. For more information, see Section 3.6, “Viewing
System Event Information.”
•
Exit: Select this option to exit the WebBIOS CU and continue with
system boot.
Creating a Storage Configuration
This section explains how to use the WebBIOS CU Configuration Wizard
to configure RAID drive groups and virtual drives. The following
Creating a Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-5
subsections explain how to use the Configuration Wizard to create
storage configurations:
3.4.1
•
Section 3.4.1, “Selecting the Configuration with the Configuration
Wizard”
•
Section 3.4.2, “Using Automatic Configuration”
•
Section 3.4.3, “Using Manual Configuration”
Selecting the Configuration with the Configuration Wizard
Follow these steps to start the Configuration Wizard, and select a
configuration option and mode:
1. Click Configuration Wizard on the WebBIOS main screen.
The first Configuration Wizard screen appears, as shown in
Figure 3.2.
Figure 3.2
3-6
WebBIOS Configuration Wizard Screen
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
2. Select a configuration option.
Caution:
If you choose the first or second option, all existing data in
the configuration will be deleted. Make a backup of any
data that you want to keep before you choose an option.
–
Clear Configuration: Clears the existing configuration.
–
New Configuration: Clears the existing configuration and lets
you create a new configuration.
–
Add Configuration: Retains the existing storage configuration
and adds new drives to it (this does not cause any data loss).
3. Click Next.
A dialog box warns that you will lose data if you select Clear
Configuration or New Configuration.
The WebBIOS Configuration Method screen appears, as shown in
Figure 3.3.
Figure 3.3
WebBIOS Configuration Method Screen
Creating a Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-7
4. On this screen, select a configuration mode:
–
Manual Configuration: Allows you to control all attributes of the
new storage configuration as you create drive groups and virtual
drives, and set their parameters.
–
Automatic Configuration: Automatically creates an optimal
RAID configuration.
5. If you select Automatic Configuration, you can choose whether to
create a redundant RAID drive group or a non-redundant RAID 0
drive group. Select one of the following options in the Redundancy
field:
–
Redundancy when possible
–
No redundancy
6. Click Next to continue.
If you select the Automatic Configuration option, continue with Section
3.4.2, “Using Automatic Configuration.” If you select Manual
Configuration, continue with Section 3.4.3, “Using Manual Configuration.”
3.4.2
Using Automatic Configuration
Follow these instructions to create a configuration with automatic
configuration, either with or without redundancy:
1. When WebBIOS displays the proposed new configuration, review the
information on the screen, and click Accept to accept it. (Or click
Back to go back and change the configuration.)
3-8
–
RAID 0: If you select Automatic Configuration and No
Redundancy, WebBIOS creates a RAID 0 configuration.
–
RAID 1: If you select Automatic Configuration and
Redundancy when possible, and only two drives are available,
WebBIOS creates a RAID 1 configuration.
–
RAID 5: If you select Automatic Configuration and
Redundancy when possible, and three or more drives are
available, WebBIOS creates a RAID 5 configuration.
–
RAID 6: If you select Automatic Configuration and
Redundancy when possible, and the RAID 6 option is enabled,
and three or more drives are available, WebBIOS creates a
RAID 6 configuration.
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
2. Click Yes when you are prompted to save the configuration.
3. Click Yes when you are prompted to initialize the new virtual drive(s).
WebBIOS CU begins a background initialization of the virtual drives.
3.4.3
Using Manual Configuration
The following subsections contain the procedures for creating RAID drive
groups for RAID levels 0, 1, 5, 6, 00, 10, 50, and 60:
3.4.3.1
•
Section 3.4.3.1, “Using Manual Configuration: RAID 0”
•
Section 3.4.3.2, “Using Manual Configuration: RAID 1”
•
Section 3.4.3.3, “Using Manual Configuration: RAID 5”
•
Section 3.4.3.4, “Using Manual Configuration: RAID 6”
•
Section 3.4.3.5, “Using Manual Configuration: RAID 00”
•
Section 3.4.3.6, “Using Manual Configuration: RAID 10”
•
Section 3.4.3.7, “Using Manual Configuration: RAID 50”
•
Section 3.4.3.8, “Using Manual Configuration: RAID 60”
Using Manual Configuration: RAID 0
RAID 0 provides drive striping across all drives in the RAID drive group.
RAID 0 does not provide any data redundancy but does offer excellent
performance. RAID 0 is ideal for applications that require high bandwidth
but do not require fault tolerance. RAID 0 also denotes an independent
or single drive.
Note:
RAID level 0 is not fault-tolerant. If a drive in a RAID 0 drive
group fails, the whole virtual drive (all drives associated
with the virtual drive) fails.
When you select Manual Configuration and click Next, the drive group
Definition screen appears. You use this screen to select drives to create
drive groups.
1. Hold <Ctrl> while selecting two or more ready drives in the Drives
panel on the left until you have selected all desired drives for the
drive group.
Creating a Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-9
2. Click Add To Array to move the drives to a proposed drive group
configuration in the Disk Groups panel on the right, as shown in
Figure 3.4.
If you need to undo the changes, click the Reclaim button.
Figure 3.4
WebBIOS Disk Group Definition Screen
3. When you have finished selecting drives for the drive group, click
Accept DG.
4. Click Next.
The Virtual Drive Definition screen appears, as shown in Figure 3.5.
This screen lists the possible RAID levels for the drive group.
Use this screen to select the RAID level, stripe size, read policy, and
other attributes for the new virtual drives.
3-10
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figure 3.5
WebBIOS Virtual Drive Definition Screen
5. Change the virtual drive options from the defaults listed on the
screen as needed.
Here are brief explanations of the virtual drive options:
•
RAID Level: The drop-down menu lists the possible RAID levels for
the virtual drive. Select RAID 0.
•
Stripe Size: The stripe size specifies the length of the data
segments that the RAID controller writes across multiple drives, not
including parity drives. For example, consider a stripe that contains
64 KB of drive space and has 16 KB of data residing on each drive
in the stripe. In this case, the stripe size is 64 KB and the strip size
is 16 KB. You can set the stripe size to 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512,
and 1024 Kbytes. A larger stripe size produces higher read
performance. If your computer regularly performs random read
requests, choose a smaller stripe size. The default is 64 Kbytes.
•
Access Policy: Select the type of data access that is allowed for this
virtual drive:
◊
RW: Allow read/write access. This is the default.
Creating a Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-11
•
•
◊
Read Only: Allow read-only access.
◊
Blocked: Do not allow access.
Read Policy: Specify the read policy for this virtual drive:
◊
Normal: This disables the read ahead capability. This is the
default.
◊
Ahead: This enables read ahead capability, which allows the
controller to read sequentially ahead of requested data and
to store the additional data in cache memory, anticipating
that the data will be needed soon. This speeds up reads for
sequential data, but there is little improvement when
accessing random data.
◊
Adaptive: When Adaptive read ahead is selected, the
controller begins using read ahead if the two most recent
drive accesses occurred in sequential sectors. If the read
requests are random, the controller reverts to Normal (no
read ahead).
Write Policy: Specify the write policy for this virtual drive:
◊
WBack: In Writeback mode the controller sends a data
transfer completion signal to the host when the controller
cache has received all of the data in a transaction.
This setting is recommended in Standard mode.
◊
WThru: In Writethrough mode the controller sends a data
transfer completion signal to the host when the drive
subsystem has received all of the data in a transaction.
This is the default.
◊
Bad BBU: Select this mode if you want the controller to use
Writeback mode but the controller has no BBU or the BBU
is bad. If you do not choose this option, the controller
firmware automatically switches to Writethrough mode if it
detects a bad or missing BBU.
Caution:
3-12
LSI allows Writeback mode to be used with or without a
battery. LSI recommends that you use either a battery to
protect the controller cache, or an uninterruptible power
supply (UPS) to protect the entire system. If you do not use
a battery or a UPS, and there is a power failure, you risk
losing the data in the controller cache.
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
•
•
•
•
IO Policy: The IO Policy applies to reads on a specific virtual drive.
It does not affect the read ahead cache.
◊
Direct: In direct I/O mode, reads are not buffered in cache
memory. Data is transferred to the cache and the host
concurrently. If the same data block is read again, it comes
from cache memory. This is the default.
◊
Cached: In cached I/O mode, all reads are buffered in cache
memory.
Drive Cache: Specify the drive cache policy:
◊
Enable: Enable the drive cache.
◊
Disable: Disable the drive cache.
◊
NoChange: Leave the current drive cache policy as is.
This is the default.
Disable BGI: Specify the background initialization status:
◊
No: Leave background initialization enabled. This means that
a new configuration can be initialized in the background
while you use WebBIOS to do other configuration tasks.
This is the default.
◊
Yes: Select Yes if you do not want to allow background
initializations for configurations on this controller.
Select Size: Specify the size of the virtual drive in megabytes.
Normally, this would be the full size for RAID 0 shown in the
Configuration panel on the right. You may specify a smaller size if
you want to create other virtual drives on the same drive group.
6. Click Accept to accept the changes to the virtual drive definition, or
click Reclaim to return to the previous settings.
7. Click Next when you are finished defining virtual drives.
The Configuration Preview screen appears, as shown in Figure 3.6.
Creating a Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-13
Figure 3.6
RAID 0 Configuration Preview
8. Check the information in the configuration preview.
9. If the virtual drive configuration is acceptable, click Accept to save
the configuration. Otherwise, click Back to return to the previous
screens and change the configuration.
10. If you accept the configuration, click Yes at the prompt to save the
configuration.
The WebBIOS main menu appears.
3.4.3.2
Using Manual Configuration: RAID 1
In RAID 1, the RAID controller duplicates all data from one drive to a
second drive. RAID 1 provides complete data redundancy, but at the cost
of doubling the required data storage capacity. It is appropriate for small
databases or any other environment that requires fault tolerance but
small capacity.
3-14
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
When you select Manual Configuration and click Next, the Disk Group
Definition screen appears. You use this screen to select drives to create
drive groups.
1. Hold <Ctrl> while you select two ready drives in the Drives panel on
the left. You must select an even number of drives.
2. Click Add To Array to move the drives to a proposed drive group
configuration in the Disk Groups panel on the right, as shown in
Figure 3.7.
If you need to undo the changes, click the Reclaim button.
Note:
Figure 3.7
A RAID 1 virtual drive can contain up to 16 drive groups
and 32 drives in a single span. (Other factors, such as the
type of controller, can limit the number of drives.) You must
use two drives in each RAID 1 drive group in the span.
WebBIOS Disk Group Definition Screen
3. When you have finished selecting drives for the drive group, click
Accept DG.
4. Click Next.
Creating a Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-15
The Virtual Drive Definition screen appears, as shown in Figure 3.8.
You use this screen to select the RAID level, stripe size, read policy,
and other attributes for the new virtual drives.
Figure 3.8
WebBIOS Virtual Drive Definition Screen
5. Change the virtual drive options from the defaults listed on the
screen as needed.
Here are brief explanations of the virtual drive options:
3-16
•
RAID Level: The drop-down menu lists the possible RAID levels for
the virtual drive. Select RAID 1.
•
Stripe Size: The stripe size specifies the length of the data
segments that the RAID controller writes across multiple drives, not
including parity drives. For example, consider a stripe that contains
64 KB of drive space and has 16 KB of data residing on each drive
in the stripe. In this case, the stripe size is 64 KB and the strip size
is 16 KB. You can set the stripe size to 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512,
and 1024 Kbytes. A larger stripe size produces higher read
performance. If your computer regularly performs random read
requests, choose a smaller stripe size. The default is 64 Kbytes.
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
•
•
•
Access Policy: Select the type of data access that is allowed for this
virtual drive:
◊
RW: Allow read/write access. This is the default.
◊
Read Only: Allow read-only access.
◊
Blocked: Do not allow access.
Read Policy: Specify the read policy for this virtual drive:
◊
Normal: This disables the read ahead capability. This is the
default.
◊
Ahead: This enables read ahead capability, which allows the
controller to read sequentially ahead of requested data and
to store the additional data in cache memory, anticipating
that the data will be needed soon. This speeds up reads for
sequential data, but there is little improvement when
accessing random data.
◊
Adaptive: When Adaptive read ahead is selected, the
controller begins using read ahead if the two most recent
drive accesses occurred in sequential sectors. If the read
requests are random, the controller reverts to Normal (no
read ahead).
Write Policy: Specify the write policy for this virtual drive:
◊
WBack: In Writeback mode the controller sends a data
transfer completion signal to the host when the controller
cache has received all of the data in a transaction.
This setting is recommended in Standard mode.
◊
WThru: In Writethrough mode the controller sends a data
transfer completion signal to the host when the drive
subsystem has received all of the data in a transaction.
This is the default.
◊
Bad BBU: Select this mode if you want the controller to use
Writeback mode but the controller has no BBU or the BBU
is bad. If you do not choose this option, the controller
firmware automatically switches to Writethrough mode if it
detects a bad or missing BBU.
Caution:
LSI allows Writeback mode to be used with or without a
battery. LSI recommends that you use either a battery to
protect the controller cache, or an uninterruptible power
Creating a Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-17
supply (UPS) to protect the entire system. If you do not use
a battery or a UPS, and there is a power failure, you risk
losing the data in the controller cache.
•
IO Policy: The IO Policy applies to reads on a specific virtual drive.
It does not affect the read ahead cache.
–
•
•
◊
Direct: In Direct I/O mode, reads are not buffered in cache
memory. Data is transferred to the cache and the host
concurrently. If the same data block is read again, it comes
from cache memory. This is the default.
◊
Cached: In Cached I/O mode, all reads are buffered in cache
memory.
Drive Policy: Specify the drive cache policy:
◊
Enable: Enable the drive cache.
◊
Disable: Disable the drive cache.
◊
NoChange: Leave the current drive cache policy as is.
This drive policy is the default.
Disable BGI: Specify the background initialization status:
◊
No: Leave background initialization enabled. This means that
a new configuration can be initialized in the background
while you use WebBIOS to do other configuration tasks.
This is the default.
◊
Yes: Select Yes if you do not want to allow background
initializations for configurations on this controller.
Select Size: Specify the size of the virtual drive(s) in megabytes.
Normally, this would be the full size for RAID 1 shown in the
Configuration panel on the right. You may specify a smaller size if
you want to create other virtual drives on the same drive group.
6. Click Accept to accept the changes to the virtual drive definition, or
click Reclaim to return to the previous settings.
7. Click Next when you are finished defining virtual drives.
The Configuration Preview screen appears, as shown in Figure 3.9.
3-18
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figure 3.9
RAID 1 Configuration Preview
8. Check the information in the configuration preview.
9. If the virtual drive configuration is acceptable, click Accept to save
the configuration. Otherwise, click Back to return to the previous
screens and change the configuration.
10. If you accept the configuration, click Yes at the prompt to save the
configuration.
The WebBIOS main menu appears.
3.4.3.3
Using Manual Configuration: RAID 5
RAID 5 uses drive striping at the block level and parity. In RAID 5, the
parity information is written to all drives. It is best suited for networks that
perform a lot of small input/output (I/O) transactions simultaneously.
RAID 5 provides data redundancy, high read rates, and good
performance in most environments. It also provides redundancy with
lowest loss of capacity.
RAID 5 provides high data throughput. RAID 5 is useful for transaction
processing applications because each drive can read and write
Creating a Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-19
independently. If a drive fails, the RAID controller uses the parity drive to
recreate all missing information. You can use RAID 5 for office
automation and online customer service that require fault tolerance.
In addition, RAID 5 is good for any application that has high read request
rates but low write request rates.
When you select Manual Configuration and click Next, the Disk Group
Definition screen appears. You use this screen to select drives to create
drive groups.
1. Hold <Ctrl> while you select at least three ready drives in the
Physical Drives panel on the left.
2. Click Add To Array to move the drives to a proposed drive group
configuration in the Disk Groups panel on the right, as shown in
Figure 3.10.
If you need to undo the changes, click the Reclaim button.
Figure 3.10 WebBIOS Disk Group Definition Screen
3. When you have finished selecting drives for the drive group, click
Accept DG.
3-20
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
4. Click Next.
The Virtual Drive Definition screen appears, as shown in Figure 3.11.
You use this screen to select the RAID level, stripe size, read policy,
and other attributes for the new virtual drives.
Figure 3.11 WebBIOS Virtual Drive Definition Screen
f
5. Change the virtual drive options from the defaults listed on the
screen as needed.
Here are brief explanations of the virtual drive options:
•
RAID Level: The drop-down menu lists the possible RAID levels for
the virtual drive. Select RAID 5.
•
Stripe Size: The stripe size specifies the length of the data
segments that the RAID controller writes across multiple drives, not
including parity drives. For example, consider a stripe that contains
64 KB of drive space and has 16 KB of data residing on each drive
in the stripe. In this case, the stripe size is 64 KB and the strip size
is 16 KB. You can set the stripe size to 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512,
and 1024 Kbytes. A larger stripe size produces higher read
Creating a Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-21
performance. If your computer regularly performs random read
requests, choose a smaller stripe size. The default is 64 Kbytes.
•
•
•
3-22
Access Policy: Select the type of data access that is allowed for this
virtual drive:
◊
RW: Allow read/write access. This is the default.
◊
Read Only: Allow read-only access.
◊
Blocked: Do not allow access.
Read Policy: Specify the read policy for this virtual drive:
◊
Normal: This disables the read ahead capability. This is the
default.
◊
Ahead: This enables read ahead capability, which allows the
controller to read sequentially ahead of requested data and
to store the additional data in cache memory, anticipating
that the data will be needed soon. This speeds up reads for
sequential data, but there is little improvement when
accessing random data.
◊
Adaptive: When Adaptive read ahead is selected, the
controller begins using read ahead if the two most recent
drive accesses occurred in sequential sectors. If the read
requests are random, the controller reverts to Normal (no
read ahead).
Write Policy: Specify the write policy for this virtual drive:
◊
WBack: In Writeback mode the controller sends a data
transfer completion signal to the host when the controller
cache has received all of the data in a transaction.
This setting is recommended in Standard mode.
◊
WThru: In Writethrough mode the controller sends a data
transfer completion signal to the host when the drive
subsystem has received all of the data in a transaction.
This is the default.
◊
Bad BBU: Select this mode if you want the controller to use
Writeback mode but the controller has no BBU or the BBU
is bad. If you do not choose this option, the controller
firmware automatically switches to Writethrough mode if it
detects a bad or missing BBU.
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Caution:
•
•
•
•
LSI allows Writeback mode to be used with or without a
battery. LSI recommends that you use either a battery to
protect the controller cache, or an uninterruptible power
supply (UPS) to protect the entire system. If you do not use
a battery or a UPS, and there is a power failure, you risk
losing the data in the controller cache.
IO Policy: The IO Policy applies to reads on a specific virtual drive.
It does not affect the read ahead cache.
◊
Direct: In Direct I/O mode, reads are not buffered in cache
memory. Data is transferred to the cache and the host
concurrently. If the same data block is read again, it comes
from cache memory. This is the default.
◊
Cached: In Cached I/O mode, all reads are buffered in cache
memory.
Drive Policy: Specify the drive cache policy:
◊
Enable: Enable the drive cache.
◊
Disable: Disable the drive cache.
◊
NoChange: Leave the current drive cache policy as is.
This drive policy is the default.
Disable BGI: Specify the background initialization status:
◊
No: Leave background initialization enabled. This means that
a new configuration can be initialized in the background
while you use WebBIOS to do other configuration tasks.
This is the default.
◊
Yes: Select Yes if you do not want to allow background
initializations for configurations on this controller.
Select Size: Specify the size of the virtual drive in megabytes.
Normally, this would be the full size for RAID 5 shown in the
Configuration panel on the right. You may specify a smaller size if
you want to create other virtual drives on the same drive group.
6. Click Accept to accept the changes to the virtual drive definition, or
click Reclaim to return to the previous settings.
7. Click Next when you are finished defining virtual drives.
The Configuration Preview screen appears, as shown in Figure 3.12.
Creating a Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-23
Figure 3.12 RAID 5 Configuration Preview
8. Check the information in the configuration preview.
9. If the virtual drive configuration is acceptable, click Accept to save
the configuration. Otherwise, click Cancel to end the operation and
return to the WebBIOS main menu, or click Back to return to the
previous screens and change the configuration.
10. If you accept the configuration, click Yes at the prompt to save the
configuration.
The WebBIOS main menu appears.
3.4.3.4
Using Manual Configuration: RAID 6
RAID 6 is similar to RAID 5 (drive striping and distributed parity), except
that instead of one parity block per stripe, there are two. With two
independent parity blocks, RAID 6 can survive the loss of two drives in
a virtual drive without losing data. Use RAID 6 for data that requires a
very high level of protection from loss.
3-24
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
RAID 6 is best suited for networks that perform a lot of small input/output
(I/O) transactions simultaneously. It provides data redundancy, high read
rates, and good performance in most environments.
In the case of a failure of one drive or two drives in a virtual drive, the
RAID controller uses the parity blocks to recreate all of the missing
information. If two drives in a RAID 6 virtual drive fail, two drive rebuilds
are required, one for each drive. These rebuilds do not occur at the same
time. The controller rebuilds one failed drive, and then the other failed
drive.
When you select Manual Configuration and click Next, the drive Group
Definition screen appears. You use this screen to select drives to create
drive groups.
1. Hold <Ctrl> while selecting at least three ready drives in the Drives
panel on the left.
2. Click Add To Array to move the drives to a proposed drive group
configuration in the Disk Groups panel on the right, as shown in
Figure 3.10.
If you need to undo the changes, click the Reclaim button.
Creating a Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-25
Figure 3.13 WebBIOS Disk Group Definition Screen
3. When you have finished selecting drives for the drive group, click
Accept DG for each.
4. Click Next.
The Virtual Drive Definition screen appears, as shown in Figure 3.14.
Use this screen to select the RAID level, stripe size, read policy, and
other attributes for the new virtual drives.
3-26
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figure 3.14 WebBIOS Virtual Drive Definition Screen
5. Change the virtual drive options from the defaults listed on the
screen as needed.
Here are brief explanations of the virtual drive options:
•
RAID Level: The drop-down menu lists the possible RAID levels for
the virtual drive. Select RAID 6.
•
Stripe Size: The stripe size specifies the length of the data
segments that the RAID controller writes across multiple drives, not
including parity drives. For example, consider a stripe that contains
64 KB of drive space and has 16 KB of data residing on each drive
in the stripe. In this case, the stripe size is 64 KB and the strip size
is 16 KB. You can set the stripe size to 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512,
and 1024 Kbytes. A larger stripe size produces higher read
performance. If your computer regularly performs random read
requests, choose a smaller stripe size. The default is 64 Kbytes.
Note:
WebBIOS does not not allow you to select 8 Kbytes as the
stripe size when you create a RAID 6 drive group with three
drives.
Creating a Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-27
•
•
•
Access Policy: Select the type of data access that is allowed for this
virtual drive:
◊
RW: Allow read/write access. This is the default.
◊
Read Only: Allow read-only access.
◊
Blocked: Do not allow access.
Read Policy: Specify the read policy for this virtual drive:
◊
Normal: This disables the read ahead capability. This is the
default.
◊
Ahead: This enables read ahead capability, which allows the
controller to read sequentially ahead of requested data and
to store the additional data in cache memory, anticipating
that the data will be needed soon. This speeds up reads for
sequential data, but there is little improvement when
accessing random data.
◊
Adaptive: When Adaptive read ahead is selected, the
controller begins using read ahead if the two most recent
drive accesses occurred in sequential sectors. If the read
requests are random, the controller reverts to Normal (no
read ahead).
Write Policy: Specify the write policy for this virtual drive:
◊
WBack: In Writeback mode the controller sends a data
transfer completion signal to the host when the controller
cache has received all of the data in a transaction.
This setting is recommended in Standard mode.
◊
WThru: In Writethrough mode the controller sends a data
transfer completion signal to the host when the drive
subsystem has received all of the data in a transaction.
This is the default.
◊
Bad BBU: Select this mode if you want the controller to use
Writeback mode but the controller has no BBU or the BBU
is bad. If you do not choose this option, the controller
firmware automatically switches to Writethrough mode if it
detects a bad or missing BBU.
Caution:
3-28
LSI allows Writeback mode to be used with or without a
battery. LSI recommends that you use either a battery to
protect the controller cache, or an uninterruptible power
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
supply (UPS) to protect the entire system. If you do not use
a battery or a UPS, and there is a power failure, you risk
losing the data in the controller cache.
•
•
•
•
IO Policy: The IO Policy applies to reads on a specific virtual drive.
It does not affect the read ahead cache.
◊
Direct: In Direct I/O mode, reads are not buffered in cache
memory. Data is transferred to the cache and the host
concurrently. If the same data block is read again, it comes
from cache memory. This is the default.
◊
Cached: In Cached I/O mode, all reads are buffered in cache
memory.
Drive Policy: Specify the drive cache policy:
◊
Enable: Enable the drive cache.
◊
Disable: Disable the drive cache.
◊
NoChange: Leave the current drive cache policy as is.
This drive policy is the default.
Disable BGI: Specify the background initialization status:
◊
No: Leave background initialization enabled. This means that
a new configuration can be initialized in the background
while you use WebBIOS to do other configuration tasks.
This is the default.
◊
Yes: Select Yes if you do not want to allow background
initializations for configurations on this controller.
Select Size: Specify the size of the virtual drive in megabytes.
Normally, this would be the full size for RAID 6 shown in the
Configuration panel on the right. You may specify a smaller size if
you want to create other virtual drives on the same drive group.
6. Click Accept to accept the changes to the virtual drive definition, or
click Reclaim to return to the previous settings.
7. Click Next when you are finished defining virtual drives.
The Configuration Preview screen appears, as shown in Figure 3.12.
Creating a Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-29
Figure 3.15 RAID 6 Configuration Preview
8. Check the information in the configuration preview.
9. If the virtual drive configuration is acceptable, click Accept to save
the configuration. Otherwise, click Back to return to the previous
screens and change the configuration.
10. If you accept the configuration, click Yes at the prompt to save the
configuration.
The WebBIOS main menu appears.
3.4.3.5
Using Manual Configuration: RAID 00
A RAID 00 drive group is a spanned drive group that creates a striped
set from a series of RAID 0 drive groups. It breaks up data into smaller
blocks and then stripes the blocks of data to RAID 00 drive groups.
The size of each block is determined by the stripe size parameter, which
is 64 Kbytes.
RAID 00 does not provide any data redundancy but does offer excellent
performance. RAID 00 is ideal for applications that require high
bandwidth but do not require fault tolerance.
3-30
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
When you select Manual Configuration and click Next, the Disk Group
Definition screen appears.
You use the Disk Group Definition screen to select drives to create drive
groups.
1. Hold <Ctrl> while you select ready drives in the Drives panel on the
left.
2. Click Add To Array to move the drives to a proposed drive group
configuration in the Disk Groups panel on the right.
If you need to undo the changes, click the Reclaim button.
3. Click Accept DG to create a RAID 0 drive group.
An icon for the next drive group appears in the right panel.
4. Hold <Ctrl> while you select more ready drives in the Drives panel
to create a second RAID 0 drive group.
5. Click Add To Array to move the drives to a second drive group
configuration in the Disk Groups panel, as shown in Figure 3.20.
If you need to undo the changes, click the Reclaim button.
Note:
RAID 00 supports a maximum of eight spans, with a
maximum of 32 drives per span. (Other factors, such as the
type of controller, can limit the number of drives.)
6. Click Accept DG to create a RAID 0 drive group.
Creating a Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-31
Figure 3.16 WebBIOS Disk Group Definition Screen
7. Repeat step 4 through step 6 until you have selected all the drives
you want for the drive groups.
8. When you have finished selecting drives for the drive groups, select
each drive group and then click Accept DG for each selection.
9. Click Next.
The Span Definition screen appears, as shown in Figure 3.21.
This screen shows the drive group holes that you can select to add
to a span.
3-32
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figure 3.17 WebBIOS Span Definition Screen
10. Under the heading Array With Free Space, hold <Ctrl> while you
select a drive group, and then click Add to SPAN.
The drive group you select appears in the right frame under the
heading Span.
11. Hold <Ctrl> while you select a second drive group, and then click
Add to SPAN.
12. Repeat step 10 until you have selected all of the drive groups that
you want.
13. Click Next.
The Virtual Drive Definition screen appears, as shown in Figure 3.22.
You use this screen to select the RAID level, stripe size, read policy,
and other attributes for the new virtual drives.
14. Hold <Ctrl> while you select drive groups in the Configuration panel
on the right.
Creating a Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-33
Figure 3.18 WebBIOS Virtual Drive Definition Screen
15. Change the virtual drive options from the defaults listed on the
screen as needed.
Here are brief explanations of the virtual drive options:
•
RAID Level: The drop-down menu lists the possible RAID levels for
the virtual drive. Select RAID 0.
•
Stripe Size: The stripe size specifies the length of the data
segments that the RAID controller writes across multiple drives, not
including parity drives. For example, consider a stripe that contains
64 KB of drive space and has 16 KB of data residing on each drive
in the stripe. In this case, the stripe size is 64 KB and the strip size
is 16 KB. You can set the stripe size to 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512,
and 1024 Kbytes. A larger stripe size produces higher read
performance. If your computer regularly performs random read
requests, choose a smaller stripe size. The default is 64 Kbytes.
•
Access Policy: Select the type of data access that is allowed for this
virtual drive:
◊
3-34
RW: Allow read/write access.
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
•
•
◊
Read Only: Allow read-only access. This type of access is
the default.
◊
Blocked: Do not allow access.
Read Policy: Specify the read policy for this virtual drive:
◊
Normal: This option disables the read ahead capability.
This is the default.
◊
Ahead: This option enables read ahead capability, which
allows the controller to read sequentially ahead of requested
data and to store the additional data in cache memory,
anticipating that the data will be needed soon. This speeds
up reads for sequential data, but there is little improvement
when accessing random data.
◊
Adaptive: When Adaptive read ahead is selected, the
controller begins using read ahead if the two most recent
drive accesses occurred in sequential sectors. If the read
requests are random, the controller reverts to Normal (no
read ahead).
Write Policy: Specify the write policy for this virtual drive:
◊
WBack: In Writeback mode, the controller sends a data
transfer completion signal to the host when the controller
cache has received all of the data in a transaction.
This setting is recommended in Standard mode.
◊
WThru: In Writethrough mode, the controller sends a data
transfer completion signal to the host when the drive
subsystem has received all of the data in a transaction.
This is the default.
◊
Bad BBU: Select this mode if you want the controller to use
Writeback mode but the controller has no BBU or the BBU
is bad. If you do not choose this option, the controller
firmware automatically switches to Writethrough mode if it
detects a bad or missing BBU.
Caution:
LSI allows Writeback mode to be used with or without a
battery. To protect the entire system, LSI recommends that
you use either a battery to protect the controller cache or
an uninterruptible power supply (UPS). If you do not use a
Creating a Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-35
battery or a UPS, and there is a power failure, you risk
losing the data in the controller cache.
•
•
•
•
IO Policy: The IO Policy applies to reads on a specific virtual drive.
The policy does not affect the read ahead cache.
◊
Direct: In Direct I/O mode, reads are not buffered in cache
memory. Data is transferred to the cache and the host
concurrently. If the same data block is read again, the block
comes from cache memory. This setting is the default.
◊
Cached: In Cached I/O mode, all reads are buffered in cache
memory.
Drive Policy: Specify the drive cache policy:
◊
Enable: Enable the drive cache.
◊
Disable: Disable the drive cache.
◊
NoChange: Leave the current drive cache policy as is.
This setting is the default.
Disable BGI: Specify the background initialization status:
◊
No: Leave background initialization enabled. This means that
a new configuration can be initialized in the background
while you use WebBIOS to do other configuration tasks.
This setting is the default.
◊
Yes: Select Yes if you do not want to allow background
initializations for configurations on this controller.
Select Size: Specify the size of the virtual drive in megabytes.
Normally, this would be the full size for RAID 00 shown in the
Configuration Panel on the right. You may specify a smaller size if
you want to create other virtual drives on the same drive group.
16. Click Accept to accept the changes to the virtual drive definition, or
click Reclaim to return to the previous settings.
17. When you are finished defining virtual drives, click Next.
The Configuration Preview screen appears, as shown in Figure 3.23.
3-36
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figure 3.19 RAID 00 Configuration Preview
18. Check the information in the configuration preview.
19. If the virtual drive configuration is acceptable, click Accept to save
the configuration. Otherwise, click Cancel to end the operation and
return to the WebBIOS main menu, or click Back to return to the
previous screens and change the configuration.
20. If you accept the configuration, click Yes at the prompt to save the
configuration.
The WebBIOS main menu appears.
3.4.3.6
Using Manual Configuration: RAID 10
RAID 10, a combination of RAID 1 and RAID 0, has mirrored drives.
It breaks up data into smaller blocks, then stripes the blocks of data to
each RAID 1 drive group. Each RAID 1 drive group then duplicates its
data to its other drive. The size of each block is determined by the stripe
size parameter, which is 64 Kbytes. RAID 10 can sustain one drive failure
in each drive group while maintaining data integrity.
Creating a Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-37
RAID 10 provides both high data transfer rates and complete data
redundancy. It works best for data storage that must have 100 percent
redundancy of RAID 1 (mirrored drive groups) and that also needs the
enhanced I/O performance of RAID 0 (striped drive groups); it works well
for medium-sized databases or any environment that requires a higher
degree of fault tolerance and moderate to medium capacity.
When you select Manual Configuration and click Next, the Disk Group
Definition screen appears.
You use the Drive Group Definition screen to select drives to create drive
groups.
1. Hold <Ctrl> while selecting two ready drives in the Drives panel on
the left.
2. Click Add To Array to move the drives to a proposed two-drive drive
group configuration in the Drive Groups panel on the right.
If you need to undo the changes, click the Reclaim button.
3. Click Accept DG to create a RAID 1 drive group.
An icon for the next drive group displays in the right panel.
4. Click on the icon for the next drive group to select it.
5. Hold <Ctrl> while selecting two more ready drives in the Drives panel
to create a second RAID 1 drive group with two drives.
6. Click Add To Array to move the drives to a second two-drive drive
group configuration in the Drive Groups panel, as shown in
Figure 3.20.
If you need to undo the changes, click the Reclaim button.
Note:
3-38
RAID 10 supports a maximum of eight spans, with a
maximum of 32 drives per span. (Other factors, such as the
type of controller, can limit the number of drives.) You must
use an even number of drives in each RAID 10 drive group
in the span.
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figure 3.20 WebBIOS Drive Group Definition Screen
7. Repeat step 4 to step 6 until you have selected all the drives you
want for the drive groups.
8. When you have finished selecting drives for the drive groups, select
each drive group and click Accept DG for each.
9. Click Next.
The Span Definition screen appears, as shown in Figure 3.21.
This screen displays the drive group holes you can select to add to
a span.
Creating a Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-39
Figure 3.21 WebBIOS Span Definition Screen
10. Under the heading Array With Free Space, hold <Ctrl> while you
select a drive group with two drives, and click Add to SPAN.
The drive group you select displays in the right frame under the
heading Span.
11. Hold <Ctrl> while you select a second drive group with two drives,
and click Add to SPAN.
Both drive groups display in the right frame under Span.
12. If there are additional drive groups with two drives each, you can add
them to the virtual drive.
13. Click Next.
The Virtual Drive Definition screen appears, as shown in Figure 3.22.
You use this screen to select the RAID level, stripe size, read policy,
and other attributes for the new virtual drives.
14. Hold <Ctrl> while you select two drive groups with two drives in the
Configuration panel on the right.
3-40
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figure 3.22 WebBIOS Virtual Drive Definition Screen
Note:
The WebBIOS Configuration Utility shows the maximum
available capacity while creating the RAID 10 drive group.
In version 1.03 of the utility, the maximum size of the
RAID 10 drive group is the sum total of the two RAID 1
drive groups. In version 1.1, the maximum size is the size
of the smaller drive group multiplied by two.
15. Change the virtual drive options from the defaults listed on the
screen as needed.
Here are brief explanations of the virtual drive options:
•
RAID Level: The drop-down menu lists the possible RAID levels for
the virtual drive. Select RAID 10.
•
Stripe Size: The stripe size specifies the length of the data
segments that the RAID controller writes across multiple drives, not
including parity drives. For example, consider a stripe that contains
64 KB of drive space and has 16 KB of data residing on each drive
in the stripe. In this case, the stripe size is 64 KB and the strip size
is 16 KB. You can set the stripe size to 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512,
and 1024 Kbytes. A larger stripe size produces higher read
Creating a Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-41
performance. If your computer regularly performs random read
requests, choose a smaller stripe size. The default is 64 Kbytes.
•
•
•
3-42
Access Policy: Select the type of data access that is allowed for this
virtual drive:
◊
RW: Allow read/write access.
◊
Read Only: Allow read-only access. This is the default.
◊
Blocked: Do not allow access.
Read Policy: Specify the read policy for this virtual drive:
◊
Normal: This disables the read ahead capability. This is the
default.
◊
Ahead: This enables read ahead capability, which allows the
controller to read sequentially ahead of requested data and
to store the additional data in cache memory, anticipating
that the data will be needed soon. This speeds up reads for
sequential data, but there is little improvement when
accessing random data.
◊
Adaptive: When Adaptive read ahead is selected, the
controller begins using read ahead if the two most recent
drive accesses occurred in sequential sectors. If the read
requests are random, the controller reverts to Normal (no
read ahead).
Write Policy: Specify the write policy for this virtual drive:
◊
WBack: In Writeback mode the controller sends a data
transfer completion signal to the host when the controller
cache has received all of the data in a transaction.
This setting is recommended in Standard mode.
◊
WThru: In Writethrough mode the controller sends a data
transfer completion signal to the host when the drive
subsystem has received all of the data in a transaction.
This is the default.
◊
Bad BBU: Select this mode if you want the controller to use
Writeback mode but the controller has no BBU or the BBU
is bad. If you do not choose this option, the controller
firmware automatically switches to Writethrough mode if it
detects a bad or missing BBU.
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Caution:
•
•
•
•
LSI allows Writeback mode to be used with or without a
battery. LSI recommends that you use either a battery to
protect the controller cache, or an uninterruptible power
supply (UPS) to protect the entire system. If you do not use
a battery or a UPS, and there is a power failure, you risk
losing the data in the controller cache.
IO Policy: The IO Policy applies to reads on a specific virtual drive.
It does not affect the read ahead cache.
◊
Direct: In Direct I/O mode, reads are not buffered in cache
memory. Data is transferred to the cache and the host
concurrently. If the same data block is read again, it comes
from cache memory. This is the default.
◊
Cached: In Cached I/O mode, all reads are buffered in cache
memory.
Drive Policy: Specify the drive cache policy:
◊
Enable: Enable the drive cache.
◊
Disable: Disable the drive cache.
◊
NoChange: Leave the current drive cache policy as is.
This drive policy is the default.
Disable BGI: Specify the background initialization status:
◊
No: Leave background initialization enabled. This means that
a new configuration can be initialized in the background
while you use WebBIOS to do other configuration tasks.
This is the default.
◊
Yes: Select Yes if you do not want to allow background
initializations for configurations on this controller.
Select Size: Specify the size of the virtual drive in megabytes.
Normally, this would be the full size for RAID 10 shown in the
configuration panel on the right. You may specify a smaller size if you
want to create other virtual drives on the same drive group.
16. Click Accept to accept the changes to the virtual drive definition, or
click Reclaim to return to the previous settings.
17. When you are finished defining virtual drives, click Next .
The Configuration Preview screen appears, as shown in Figure 3.23.
Creating a Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-43
Figure 3.23 RAID 10 Configuration Preview
18. Check the information in the configuration preview.
19. If the virtual drive configuration is acceptable, click Accept to save
the configuration. Otherwise, click Cancel to end the operation and
return to the WebBIOS main menu, or click Back to return to the
previous screens and change the configuration.
20. If you accept the configuration, click Yes at the prompt to save the
configuration.
The WebBIOS main menu appears.
3.4.3.7
Using Manual Configuration: RAID 50
RAID 50 provides the features of both RAID 0 and RAID 5. RAID 50 uses
both distributed parity and drive striping across multiple drive groups.
It provides high data throughput, data redundancy, and very good
performance. It is best implemented on two RAID 5 drive groups with
data striped across both drive groups. Though multiple drive failures can
be tolerated, only one drive failure can be tolerated in each RAID 5 level
drive group.
3-44
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
RAID 50 is appropriate when used with data that requires high reliability,
high request rates, high data transfer, and medium to large capacity.
When you select Manual Configuration and click Next, the Disk Group
Definition screen appears. You use this screen to select drives to create
drive group.
1. Hold <Ctrl> while selecting at least three ready drives in the Drives
panel on the left.
2. Click Add To Array to move the drives to a proposed drive group
configuration in the Disk Groups panel on the right.
If you need to undo the changes, click the Reclaim button.
3. Click Accept DG to create a RAID 5 drive group.
An icon for a second drive group displays in the right panel.
4. Click on the icon for the second drive group to select it.
5. Hold <Ctrl> while selecting at least three more ready drives in the
Drives panel to create a second drive group.
6. Click Add To Array to move the drives to a proposed drive group
configuration in the Disk Groups panel on the right, as shown in
Figure 3.24.
If you need to undo the changes, click the Reclaim button.
Creating a Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-45
Figure 3.24 WebBIOS Disk Group Definition Screen
7. When you have finished selecting drives for the drive groups, select
each drive group and click Accept DG for each.
8. Click Next.
The Span Definition screen appears, as shown in Figure 3.25.
This screen displays the drive group holes you can select to add to
a span.
3-46
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figure 3.25 WebBIOS Span Definition Screen
9. Under the heading Array With Free Space, hold <Ctrl> while you
select a drive group of three or more drives, and click Add to SPAN.
The drive group you select displays in the right frame under the
heading Span.
10. Hold <Ctrl> while you select a second drive group of three or more
drives, and click Add to SPAN.
Both drive groups display in the right frame under Span.
11. Click Next.
The Virtual Drive Definition screen appears, as shown in Figure 3.26.
You use this screen to select the RAID level, stripe size, read policy,
and other attributes for the new virtual drive(s).
12. Hold <Ctrl> while you select two 3-drive drive groups in the
Configuration panel on the right.
Creating a Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-47
Figure 3.26 WebBIOS Virtual Drive Definition Screen
13. Change the virtual drive options from the defaults listed on the
screen as needed.
Here are brief explanations of the virtual drive options:
•
RAID Level: The drop-down menu lists the possible RAID levels for
the virtual drive. Select RAID 50.
•
Stripe Size: The stripe size specifies the length of the data
segments that the RAID controller writes across multiple drives, not
including parity drives. For example, consider a stripe that contains
64 KB of drive space and has 16 KB of data residing on each drive
in the stripe. In this case, the stripe size is 64 KB and the strip size
is 16 KB. You can set the stripe size to 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512,
and 1024 Kbytes. A larger stripe size produces higher read
performance. If your computer regularly performs random read
requests, choose a smaller stripe size. The default is 64 Kbytes.
•
Access Policy: Select the type of data access that is allowed for this
virtual drive:
◊
3-48
RW: Allow read/write access.
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
•
•
◊
Read Only: Allow read-only access. This is the default.
◊
Blocked: Do not allow access.
Read Policy: Specify the read policy for this virtual drive:
◊
Normal: This disables the read ahead capability. This is the
default.
◊
Ahead: This enables read ahead capability, which allows the
controller to read sequentially ahead of requested data and
to store the additional data in cache memory, anticipating
that the data will be needed soon. This speeds up reads for
sequential data, but there is little improvement when
accessing random data.
◊
Adaptive: When Adaptive read ahead is selected, the
controller begins using read ahead if the two most recent
drive accesses occurred in sequential sectors. If the read
requests are random, the controller reverts to Normal (no
read ahead).
Write Policy: Specify the write policy for this virtual drive:
◊
WBack: In Writeback mode the controller sends a data
transfer completion signal to the host when the controller
cache has received all of the data in a transaction.
This setting is recommended in Standard mode.
◊
WThru: In Writethrough mode the controller sends a data
transfer completion signal to the host when the drive
subsystem has received all of the data in a transaction.
This is the default.
◊
Bad BBU: Select this mode if you want the controller to use
Writeback mode but the controller has no BBU or the BBU
is bad. If you do not choose this option, the controller
firmware automatically switches to Writethrough mode if it
detects a bad or missing BBU.
Caution:
LSI allows Writeback mode to be used with or without a
battery. LSI recommends that you use either a battery to
protect the controller cache, or an uninterruptible power
supply (UPS) to protect the entire system. If you do not use
a battery or a UPS, and there is a power failure, you risk
losing the data in the controller cache.
Creating a Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-49
•
•
•
•
IO Policy: The IO Policy applies to reads on a specific virtual drive.
It does not affect the read ahead cache.
◊
Direct: In Direct I/O mode, reads are not buffered in cache
memory. Data is transferred to the cache and the host
concurrently. If the same data block is read again, it comes
from cache memory. This is the default.
◊
Cached: In Cached I/O mode, all reads are buffered in cache
memory.
Drive Policy: Specify the drive cache policy:
◊
Enable: Enable the drive cache.
◊
Disable: Disable the drive cache. This drive policy is the
default.
◊
NoChange: Leave the current drive cache policy as is.
This is the default.
Disable BGI: Specify the background initialization status:
◊
No: Leave background initialization enabled. This means that
a new configuration can be initialized in the background
while you use WebBIOS to do other configuration tasks.
This is the default.
◊
Yes: Select Yes if you do not want to allow background
initializations for configurations on this controller.
Select Size: Specify the size of the virtual drive in megabytes.
Normally, this would be the full size for RAID 50 shown in the
Configuration Panel on the right. You may specify a smaller size if
you want to create other virtual drives on the same drive group.
14. Click Accept to accept the changes to the virtual drive definition or
click Reclaim to return to the previous settings.
15. Click Next when you are finished defining virtual drives.
The Configuration Preview screen appears, as shown in Figure 3.27.
3-50
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figure 3.27 RAID 50 Configuration Preview
16. Check the information in the configuration preview.
17. If the virtual drive configuration is acceptable, click Accept to save
the configuration. Otherwise, click Back to return to the previous
screens and change the configuration.
18. If you accept the configuration, click Yes at the prompt to save the
configuration.
The WebBIOS main menu appears.
3.4.3.8
Using Manual Configuration: RAID 60
RAID 60 provides the features of both RAID 0 and RAID 6, and includes
both parity and drive striping across multiple drive groups. RAID 6
supports two independent parity blocks per stripe. A RAID 60 virtual
drive can survive the loss of two drives in each of the RAID 6 sets
without losing data. RAID 60 is best implemented on two RAID 6 drive
groups with data striped across both drive groups. Use RAID 60 for data
that requires a very high level of protection from loss.
Creating a Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-51
RAID 60 can support up to eight spans and tolerate up to 16 drive
failures, though less than total drive capacity is available. Two drive
failures can be tolerated in each RAID 6 level drive group.
RAID 60 is appropriate when used with data that requires high reliability,
high request rates, high data transfer, and medium to large capacity.
When you select Manual Configuration and click Next, the Disk Group
Definition screen appears. You use this screen to select drives to create
drive groups.
1. Hold <Ctrl> while selecting at least three ready drives in the Drives
panel on the left.
2. Click Add To Array to move the drives to a proposed drive group
configuration in the Disk Groups panel on the right.
If you need to undo the changes, click the Reclaim button.
3. Click Accept DG to create a RAID 6 drive group.
An icon for a second drive group displays in the right panel.
4. Click on the icon for the second drive group to select it.
5. Hold <Ctrl> while selecting at least three more ready drives in the
Drives panel to create a second drive group.
6. Click Add To Array to move the drives to a proposed drive group
configuration in the Disk Groups panel on the right, as shown in
Figure 3.24.
If you need to undo the changes, click the Reclaim button.
3-52
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figure 3.28 WebBIOS Disk Group Definition Screen
7. When you have finished selecting drives for the drive groups, select
each drive group and click Accept DG for each.
8. Click Next.
The Span Definition screen appears, as shown in Figure 3.29.
This screen displays the drive group holes you can select to add to
a span.
Creating a Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-53
Figure 3.29 WebBIOS Span Definition Screen
9. Under the heading Array With Free Space, hold <Ctrl> while you
select a drive group of three or more drives, and click Add to SPAN.
The drive group you select displays in the right frame under the
heading Span.
10. Hold <Ctrl> while you select a second drive group of three or more
drives, and click Add to SPAN.
Both drive groups display in the right frame under Span.
11. Click Next.
The Virtual Drive Definition screen appears, as shown in Figure 3.26.
You use this screen to select the RAID level, stripe size, read policy,
and other attributes for the new virtual drive(s).
12. Hold <Ctrl> while you select two 3-drive drive groups in the
Configuration window on the right.
3-54
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figure 3.30 WebBIOS Virtual Drive Definition Screen
13. Change the virtual drive options from the defaults listed on the
screen as needed.
Here are brief explanations of the virtual drive options:
•
RAID Level: The drop-down menu lists the possible RAID levels for
the virtual drive. Select RAID 60.
•
Stripe Size: The stripe size specifies the length of the data
segments that the RAID controller writes across multiple drives, not
including parity drives. For example, consider a stripe that contains
64 KB of drive space and has 16 KB of data residing on each drive
in the stripe. In this case, the stripe size is 64 KB and the strip size
is 16 KB. You can set the stripe size to 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512,
and 1024 Kbytes. A larger stripe size produces higher read
performance. If your computer regularly performs random read
requests, choose a smaller stripe size. The default is 64 Kbytes.
•
Access Policy: Select the type of data access that is allowed for this
virtual drive:
◊
RW: Allow read/write access.
Creating a Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-55
•
•
◊
Read Only: Allow read-only access. This is the default.
◊
Blocked: Do not allow access.
Read Policy: Specify the read policy for this virtual drive:
◊
Normal: This disables the read ahead capability. This is the
default.
◊
Ahead: This enables read ahead capability, which allows the
controller to read sequentially ahead of requested data and
to store the additional data in cache memory, anticipating
that the data will be needed soon. This speeds up reads for
sequential data, but there is little improvement when
accessing random data.
◊
Adaptive: When Adaptive read ahead is selected, the
controller begins using read ahead if the two most recent
drive accesses occurred in sequential sectors. If the read
requests are random, the controller reverts to Normal (no
read ahead).
Write Policy: Specify the write policy for this virtual drive:
◊
WBack: In Writeback mode the controller sends a data
transfer completion signal to the host when the controller
cache has received all of the data in a transaction.
This setting is recommended in Standard mode.
◊
WThru: In Writethrough mode the controller sends a data
transfer completion signal to the host when the drive
subsystem has received all of the data in a transaction.
This is the default.
◊
Bad BBU: Select this mode if you want the controller to use
Writeback mode but the controller has no BBU or the BBU
is bad. If you do not choose this option, the controller
firmware automatically switches to Writethrough mode if it
detects a bad or missing BBU.
Caution:
3-56
LSI allows Writeback mode to be used with or without a
battery. LSI recommends that you use either a battery to
protect the controller cache, or an uninterruptible power
supply (UPS) to protect the entire system. If you do not use
a battery or a UPS, and there is a power failure, you risk
losing the data in the controller cache.
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
•
•
•
•
IO Policy: The IO Policy applies to reads on a specific virtual drive.
It does not affect the read ahead cache.
◊
Direct: In Direct I/O mode, reads are not buffered in cache
memory. Data is transferred to the cache and the host
concurrently. If the same data block is read again, it comes
from cache memory. This is the default.
◊
Cached: In Cached I/O mode, all reads are buffered in cache
memory.
Drive Policy: Specify the drive cache policy:
◊
Enable: Enable the drive cache.
◊
Disable: Disable the drive cache. This drive policy is the
default.
◊
NoChange: Leave the current drive cache policy as is.
This is the default.
Disable BGI: Specify the background initialization status:
◊
No: Leave background initialization enabled. This means that
a new configuration can be initialized in the background
while you use WebBIOS to do other configuration tasks.
This is the default.
◊
Yes: Select Yes if you do not want to allow background
initializations for configurations on this controller.
Select Size: Specify the size of the virtual drive in megabytes.
Normally, this would be the full size for RAID 60 shown in the
Configuration panel on the right. You may specify a smaller size if
you want to create other virtual drives on the same drive group.
Note:
WebBIOS does not not allow you to select 8 Kbytes as the
stripe size when you create a RAID 60 drive group with six
drives.
14. Click Accept to accept the changes to the virtual drive definition, or
click Reclaim to return to the previous settings.
15. Click Next when you are finished defining virtual drives.
The Configuration Preview screen appears, as shown in Figure 3.27.
Creating a Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-57
Figure 3.31 RAID 60 Configuration Preview
16. Check the information in the configuration preview.
17. If the virtual drive configuration is acceptable, click Accept to save
the configuration. Otherwise, or click Back to return to the previous
screens and change the configuration.
18. If you accept the configuration, click Yes at the prompt to save the
configuration.
The WebBIOS main menu appears.
3.5
Viewing and Changing Device Properties
This section explains how you can use the WebBIOS CU to view and
change the properties for controllers, virtual drives, drives, and BBUs.
3.5.1
Viewing and Changing Controller Properties
WebBIOS displays information for one LSI SAS controller at a time.
If your computer system has multiple LSI SAS controllers, you can view
3-58
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
information for a different controller by clicking Controller Selection on
the main screen. When the Controller Selection screen appears, select
the controller you want from the list.
To view the properties for the currently selected controller, click
Controller Properties on the main WebBIOS screen. There are three
Controller Properties screens. Figure 3.32 shows the first screen.
Figure 3.32 First Controller Properties Screen
The information on this screen is read-only and cannot be modified
directly. Most of this information is self-explanatory. The screen lists the
number of virtual drives that are already defined on this controller, and
the number of drives connected to the controller.
If a background initialization is in progress, you can click Background
Init Progress to determine its state of completion. Click Next to view the
second Controller Properties screen, as shown in Figure 3.33.
Viewing and Changing Device Properties
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-59
Figure 3.33 Second Controller Properties Screen
Click Next to view the third Controller Properties screen, as shown in
Figure 3.33.
3-60
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figure 3.34 Third Controller Properties Screen
Table 3.2 describes the entries/options listed on the second and third
Controller Properties screen. LSI recommends that you leave these
options at their default settings to achieve the best performance, unless
you have a specific reason for changing them.
Table 3.2
Controller Properties Menu Options
Option
Description
Battery Backup
This entry indicates whether the selected controller has a BBU. If present,
you can click Present to view information about the BBU. For more
information, see Section 3.5.4, “Viewing and Changing Battery Backup Unit
Information.”
Set Factory Defaults
Use this option to load the default MegaRAID® WebBIOS CU settings.
The default is No.
Cluster Mode
Use this option to enable or disable Cluster mode. The default is Disabled.
A cluster is a grouping of independent servers that can access the same
data storage and provide services to a common set of clients. When Cluster
mode is disabled, the system operates in Standard mode.
Viewing and Changing Device Properties
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-61
Table 3.2
Controller Properties Menu Options (Cont.)
Option
Description
Rebuild Rate
Use this option to select the rebuild rate for drives connected to the selected
controller. The default is 30 percent. The rebuild rate is the percentage of
system resources dedicated to rebuilding a failed drive. The higher the
number, the more system resources devoted to a rebuild.
BGI Rate
Use this option to select the amount of system resources dedicated to
background initialization of virtual drives connected to the selected
controller. The default is 30 percent.
CC Rate
Use this option to select the amount of system resources dedicated to
consistency checks of virtual drives connected to the selected controller.
The default is 30 percent.
Reconstruction Rate
Use this option to select the amount of system resources dedicated to
reconstruction of drives connected to the selected controller. The default is
30 percent.
Controller BIOS
Use this option to enable or disable the BIOS for the selected controller.
The default is Enabled. If the boot device is on the selected controller, the
BIOS must be enabled; otherwise, the BIOS should be disabled or it might
not be possible to use a boot device elsewhere.
NCQ
Native Command Queuing (NCQ) gives an individual drive the ability to
optimize the order in which it executes the read and write commands.
The default is Enabled.
Connector 1
Identifies where the chain of enclosures is connected to the RAID controller.
Coercion Mode
Drive coercion is a tool for forcing drives of varying capacities to the same
size so they can be used in a drive group. The coercion mode options are
None, 128MB-way, and 1GB-way. The default is None.
Note: The number you choose depends on how much the drives from various vendors vary in their actual size. LSI recommends that you use
the 1GB coercion mode option.
S.M.A.R.T. Polling
Use this option to determine how frequently the controller polls for drives
reporting a Predictive Drive Failure (S.M.A.R.T.: Self-Monitoring Analysis
and Reporting Technology error). The default is 300 seconds (5 minutes).
Alarm Control
Select this option to enable, disable, or silence the onboard alarm tone
generator on the controller. The default is Disabled.
Patrol Read Rate
Use this option to select the rate for patrol reads for drives connected to the
selected controller. The default is 30 percent. The patrol read rate is the
percentage of system resources dedicated to running a patrol read.
See Section 4.5, “Patrol Read-Related Controller Properties” for additional
information about patrol read.
Cache Flush Interval
Use this option to control the interval (in seconds) at which the contents of
the onboard data cache are flushed. The default is 4 seconds.
Spinup Drive Count
Use this option to control the number of drives that spin up simultaneously.
The default is 2 drives.
3-62
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Table 3.2
Controller Properties Menu Options (Cont.)
Option
Description
Spinup Delay
Use this option to control the interval (in seconds) between spinup of drives
connected to this controller. The delay prevents a drain on the system’s
power supply that would occur if all drives spun up at the same time.
The default is 12 seconds.
StopOnError
Enable this option if you want the boot process to stop when the controller
BIOS encounters an error during boot-up. The default is Disabled.
Drive Powersave
Drive Powersave conserves energy by placing certain unused drives into
powersave mode. Use this field to choose whether to allow unconfigured
drives to enter powersave mode.
When this option is selected, unconfigured drives may be spun down.
When not selected, these drives are not spun down. The controller will
automatically spin up drives from powersave mode whenever necessary.
The powersave option is not selected by default. You have to select it to
enable the spin-down of drives.
Connector 2
Identifies where the chain of enclosures is connected to the RAID controller.
Stop CC on Error
Enable this option if you want to stop a consistency check when the
controller BIOS encounters an error. The default is No.
Maintain PD Fail History
Enable this option to maintain the history of all drive failures. The default is
Disabled.
Schedule CC
Indicates whether the option to schedule the date and time for a consistency
check is supported.
If you make changes to the options on this screen, click Submit to
register them. If you change your mind, click Reset to return the options
to their default values.
3.5.2
Viewing and Changing Virtual Drive Properties
Access the Virtual Drive screen by clicking on a virtual drive in the list of
virtual drives in the right panel on the WebBIOS CU main screen.
The Virtual Drive screen displays, as shown in Figure 3.35.
Viewing and Changing Device Properties
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-63
Figure 3.35 Virtual Drive Screen
The Properties panel of this screen displays the virtual drive’s RAID level,
state, size, and stripe size.
The Policies panel lists the virtual drive policies that were defined when
the storage configuration was created. For information about these
policies, see Section 3.4.3, “Using Manual Configuration.” To change any
of these policies, make a selection from the drop-down menu and click
Change.
The Operations panel lists operations that can be performed on the
virtual drive. To perform an operation, select it and click Go. Then choose
from the following options:
3-64
•
Select Del to delete this virtual drive. For more information, see
Section 3.7.2, “Deleting a Virtual Drive.”
•
Select Locate to make the LEDs flash on the drives used by this
virtual drive. This works only if the drives are installed in a drive
enclosure that supports SAFTE.
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
•
Select Fast Init or Slow Init to initialize this virtual drive. A fast
initialization quickly writes zeroes to the first and last 10 Mbyte
regions of the new virtual drive and then completes the initialization
in the background. A slow initialization is not complete until the entire
virtual drive has been initialized with zeroes. It is seldom necessary
to use this option, because the virtual drive was already initialized
when you created it.
Caution:
•
Before you run an initialization, back up any data on the
virtual drive that you want to save. All data on the virtual
drive is lost when you initialize it.
Select CC to run a consistency check on this virtual drive. For more
information, see Section 3.7.1, “Running a Consistency Check.” (This
option is not available for RAID 0 virtual drives.)
In the right panel of the Virtual Drive screen you can change the virtual
drive configuration by adding or removing a drive or by changing the
RAID level.
Caution:
Before you change a virtual drive configuration, back up
any data on the virtual drive that you want to save.
To remove a drive from a virtual drive, select the drive in the small panel
beneath the Remove drive option. Then select Remove drive and click
Go at the bottom of the panel.
See Section 3.7.4, “Migrating the RAID Level of a Virtual Drive” for
information about adding a drive to a virtual drive or migrating its RAID
level.
3.5.3
Viewing Drive Properties
The Physical Drive screen displays the properties of a selected drive and
enables you to perform operations on the drive. There are two ways to
access the Physical Drive screen:
•
On the main menu screen, click on a drive in the right panel under
the heading Physical Drives.
•
On the main menu screen, click on Physical Drives in the left panel
to display the Physical Drive screen. Then click on a drive in the right
panel. Click on the Properties button, and click Go. The properties
for the selected drive displays.
Viewing and Changing Device Properties
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-65
Figure 3.36 shows the Physical Drive screen.
Figure 3.36 Physical Drive Screen
The drive properties are view-only and are self-explanatory. Note that the
properties include the state of the drive.
Operations you can perform are listed at the bottom of the screen. After
you select an operation, click Go to start the operation. The operations
vary depending on the drive state. If the drive state is Online, the
following operations appear:
•
Select MakeDriveOffline if you want to force the drive offline.
Note:
•
If you force offline a good drive that is part of a redundant
drive group with a hot spare, the drive will rebuild to the hot
spare drive. The drive you forced offline will go into the
Unconfigured Bad state. Access the BIOS utility to set the
drive to the Unconfigured Good state.
Select Locate to make the LED flash on the drive. This works only
if the drive is installed in a drive enclosure.
If the drive state is Unconfigured Good, four additional operations appear
on this screen:
3-66
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
•
Select Make Global HSP to make a global hot spare, available to all
of the virtual drives.
•
Select Make Dedicated HSP to make a hot spare dedicated to a
specific virtual drive.
WebBIOS displays the global hot spare as Global and the dedicated
hot spare as Ded. The icon for the dedicated hot spare displays under
its associated virtual drive. The drive number, drive state, drive
capacity, and drive manufacturer display.
•
Select Enclosure Affinity so if there are drive failures present on a
split backplane configuration, then the hot spare will be used first on
the backplane side that it resides in.
•
Select Prepare for Removal to prepare the drive for removal from
the enclosure.
The Prepare for Removal feature is different from spinning a drive
down into powersave mode because it also involves flagging the
drive as ready to remove. Therefore, if you choose to prepare a drive
for removal, Ready to Remove displays in the device tree for that
drive, instead of Powersave.
3.5.4
Viewing and Changing Battery Backup Unit Information
If your SAS controller has a battery backup unit (BBU), you can view
information about it and change some settings. To do this, follow these
steps:
1. Click Controller Properties on the WebBIOS CU main menu
screen.
The first Controller Properties screen appears, as shown in
Figure 3.37.
Viewing and Changing Device Properties
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-67
Figure 3.37 First Controller Properties Screen
2. Click Next to view the second Controller Properties screen.
The second Controller Properties screen appears, as shown in
Figure 3.38. The Battery Backup field at the top left of the screen
indicates whether the iBBU is present.
Figure 3.38 Second Controller Properties Screen
3. Click Present in the Battery Backup field.
3-68
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
The Battery Module screen appears, as shown in Figure 3.39. This
screen contains the following information:
–
Battery information
–
Design information
–
Capacity information
–
Auto Learn properties and settings
Figure 3.39 Battery Module Screen
Most of the Battery Module properties are view-only and are selfexplanatory.
In the lower right corner of the screen are the auto learn options. A
learning cycle is a battery calibration operation performed by the
controller periodically to determine the condition of the battery. You
can change the learn delay interval (the length of time between
automatic learning cycles) and the auto learn mode.
Note:
LSI recommends leaving the the learn delay interval and
the auto learn mode at their default settings.
Viewing and Changing Device Properties
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-69
– Setting the Learn Delay Interval
The learn delay interval is the length of time between automatic
learning cycles. Perform the following steps to change the interval:
1. Open the drop-down menu in the Auto Learn Mode field.
2. Select the learn mode as Auto (the default).
This is so the controller performs the learning cycle automatically.
3. Change the number of hours in the Learn Delay Interval field.
You can delay the start of the learn cycles for up to 168 hours (7
days).
4. Click Go to set the interval.
– Setting the Auto Learn Mode
You can start battery learning cycles manually or automatically. The
Auto Learn modes are:
•
BBU Auto Learn: Firmware tracks the time since the last learning
cycle and performs a learn cycle when due.
•
BBU Auto Learn Disabled: Firmware does not monitor or initiate a
learning cycle. You can schedule learning cycles manually.
•
BBU Auto Learn Warn: Firmware warns about a pending learning
cycle. You can initiate a learning cycle manually. After the learning
cycle is complete, firmware resets the counter and warns you when
the next learning cycle time is reached.
Perform the following steps to choose an auto learn mode:
1. Open the drop-down menu in the Auto Learn Mode field.
2. Select an auto learn mode.
3. Click Go to set the auto learn mode.
Note:
3.6
When you replace the iBBU, the charge cycle counter is
reset automatically.
Viewing System Event Information
The SAS controller firmware monitors the activity and performance of all
storage configurations and devices in the system. When an event occurs
3-70
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
(such as the creation of a new virtual drive or the removal of a drive) an
event message is generated and is stored in the controller NVRAM.
You can use the WebBIOS CU to view these event messages. To do this,
click Events on the main WebBIOS CU screen. The Event Information
screen appears, as shown in Figure 3.40.
Figure 3.40 Event Information Screen
The right side of the screen is blank until you select an event to view.
The First Sequence and Last Sequence fields in the upper left of the
screen show you how many event entries are currently stored.
To view event information, follow these steps:
1. Select an Event Locale from the menu. For example, select
Enclosure to view events relating to the drive enclosure.
2. Select an Event Class: Information, Warning, Critical, Fatal, or Dead.
3. Enter a Start Sequence number, between the First Sequence and
Last Sequence numbers. The higher the number, the more recent
the event.
Viewing System Event Information
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-71
4. Enter the Number of events of this type that you want to view, and
click Go.
The first event in the sequence appears in the right panel.
5. Click Next or Prev to page forward or backward through the
sequence of events.
6. If you want, select different event criteria in the left panel, and click
Go again to view a different sequence of events.
Each event entry includes a timestamp and a description to help you
determine when the event occurred and what it was.
3.7
Managing Configurations
This section includes information about maintaining and managing
storage configurations.
3.7.1
Running a Consistency Check
You should periodically run a consistency check on fault-tolerant virtual
drives. A consistency check verifies that the redundancy data is correct
and available for RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 6, RAID 10, RAID 50, and
RAID 60 drive groups. To do this, follow these steps:
1. On the main WebBIOS CU screen, select a virtual drive.
2. Click Virtual Drives.
3. When the Virtual Drive screen appears, select CC in the lower left
panel, and click Go.
The consistency check begins.
If the WebBIOS CU finds a difference between the data and the parity
value on the redundant drive group, it assumes that the data is accurate
and automatically corrects the parity value. Be sure to back up the data
before running a consistency check if you think the consistency data may
be corrupted.
3-72
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3.7.2
Deleting a Virtual Drive
You can delete any virtual drive on the controller if you want to reuse that
space for a new virtual drive. The WebBIOS CU provides a list of
configurable drive groups where there is a space to configure. If multiple
virtual drives are defined on a single drive group, you can delete a virtual
drive without deleting the whole drive group.
To delete a virtual drive, follow these steps:
Caution:
Back up any data that you want to keep before you delete
the virtual drive.
1. On the main WebBIOS CU screen, select a virtual drive.
2. Click Virtual Drives.
3. When the Virtual Drive screen appears, select Del in the lower left
panel, and click Go.
4. When the message appears, confirm that you want to delete the
virtual drive.
3.7.3
Importing or Clearing a Foreign Configuration
A foreign configuration is a storage configuration that already exists on a
replacement set of drives that you install in a computer system.
In addition, if one or more drives are removed from a configuration, by a
cable pull or drive removal, for example, the configuration on those drives
is considered a foreign configuration by the RAID controller.
The BIOS CU allows you to import the foreign configuration to the RAID
controller, or to clear the configuration so you can create a new
configuration using these drives.
Note:
When you create a new configuration, the WebBIOS CU
shows only the unconfigured drives. Drives that have
existing configurations, including foreign configurations, will
not appear. To use drives with existing configurations, you
must first clear the configuration on those drives.
If WebBIOS CU detects a foreign configuration, the import screen
appears, as shown in Figure 3.41.
Managing Configurations
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-73
Figure 3.41 Foreign Configuration Import Screen
The GUID (Global Unique Identifier) entries on the drop-down list are
OEM names and will vary from one installation to another.
Click Preview if you want to preview the foreign configuration.
The preview screen appears, as shown in Figure 3.42.
Click Clear if you want to clear the configuration and reuse the drives for
another virtual drive.
Click Cancel to cancel the importation or preview of the configuration.
3-74
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figure 3.42 Foreign Configuration Preview Screen
The right panel shows the virtual drive properties of the foreign
configuration. In this example, there is a RAID 1 virtual drive with
1,000 Mbytes. The left panel shows the drives that comprise the foreign
configuration.
Click Import to import this foreign configuration and use it on this
controller.
Click Cancel to clear the configuration and reuse the drives for another
virtual drive.
3.7.3.1
Foreign Configurations in Cable Pull and Drive Removal Scenarios
If one or more drives are removed from a configuration, by a cable pull
or drive removal, for example, the configuration on those drives is
considered a foreign configuration by the RAID controller.
Use the Foreign Configuration Preview screen to import or clear the
foreign configuration in each case. The import procedure and clear
procedure are described in Section 3.7.3, “Importing or Clearing a
Foreign Configuration.”
The following scenarios can occur with cable pulls or drive removals.
Note:
If you want to import the foreign configuration in any of the
following scenarios, you should have all of the drives in the
enclosure before you perform the import operation.
Managing Configurations
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-75
1. Scenario #1: If all of the drives in a configuration are removed and
re-inserted, the controller considers the drives to have foreign
configurations.
Import or clear the foreign configuration. If you select Import,
automatic rebuilds will occur in redundant virtual drives.
Note:
Start a consistency check immediately after the rebuild is
complete to ensure data integrity for the virtual drives.
See Section 3.7.1, “Running a Consistency Check,” for
more information about checking data consistency.
2. Scenario #2: If some of the drives in a configuration are removed and
re-inserted, the controller considers the drives to have foreign
configurations.
Import or clear the foreign configuration. If you select Import,
automatic rebuilds will occur in redundant virtual drives.
Note:
Start a consistency check immediately after the rebuild is
complete to ensure data integrity for the virtual drives.
See Section 3.7.1, “Running a Consistency Check,” for
more information about checking data consistency.
3. Scenario #3: If all of the drives in a virtual drive are removed, but at
different times, and re-inserted, the controller considers the drives to
have foreign configurations.
Import or clear the foreign configuration. If you select Import, all
drives that were pulled before the virtual drive became offline will be
imported and then automatically rebuilt. Automatic rebuilds will occur
in redundant virtual drives.
4. If the drives in a non-redundant virtual drive are removed, the
controller considers the drives to have foreign configurations.
Import or clear the foreign configuration. No rebuilds will occur after
the import operation because there is no redundant data to rebuild
the drives with.
3.7.3.2
Importing Foreign Configurations from Integrated RAID to MegaRAID
The LSI Integrated RAID solution simplifies the configuration options and
provides firmware support in its host controllers. LSI offers two types of
Integrated RAID (IR): Integrated Mirroring (IM) and Integrated Striping
(IS).
3-76
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
You can import an IM or IS RAID configuration from an IR system into a
MegaRAID system. The MegaRAID system treats the IR configuration as
a foreign configuration. You can import or clear the IR configuration.
Note:
3.7.3.3
For more information about Integrated RAID, refer to the
Integrated RAID for SAS User’s Guide. You can find this
document on the LSI web site at:
http://www.lsi.com/cm/DownloadSearch.do.
Troubleshooting Information
An IR virtual drive can have either 64 Mbytes or 512 Mbytes available for
metadata at the end of the drive. This data is in LSI Data Format (LDF).
MegaRAID virtual drives have 512 Mbytes for metadata at the end of the
drive in the Disk Data format (DDF).
To import an IR virtual drive into MegaRAID, the IR virtual drive must
have 512 Mbytes in the metadata, which is the same amount of
megadata as in a MegaRAID virtual drive. If the IR virtual drive has only
64 Mbytes when you attempt to import it into MegaRAID, the import will
fail because the last 448 Mbytes of your data will be overwritten and the
data lost.
If your IR virtual drive has only 64 Mbytes for metadata at the end of the
drive, you cannot import the virtual drive into MegaRAID. You need to
use another upgrade method, such as backup/restore to the upgraded
virtual drive type.
In order to import an IR virtual drive into a MegaRAID system, use the
Foreign Configuration Preview screen to import or clear the foreign
configuration. The import procedure and the clear procedure are
described in Section 3.7.3, “Importing or Clearing a Foreign
Configuration.”
3.7.4
Migrating the RAID Level of a Virtual Drive
As the amount of data and the number of drives in your system increase,
you can use RAID-level migration to change a virtual drive from one
RAID level to another. You do not have to power down or reboot the
system. When you migrate a virtual drive, you can keep the same
number of drives, or you can add drives. You can use the WebBIOS CU
to migrate the RAID level of an existing virtual drive.
Managing Configurations
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-77
Note:
While you can apply RAID-level migration at any time, LSI
recommends that you do so when there are no reboots.
Many operating systems issues I/O operations serially (one
at a time) during boot. With a RAID-level migration running,
a boot can often take more than 15 minutes.
Migrations are allowed for the following RAID levels:
•
RAID 0 to RAID 1
•
RAID 0 to RAID 5
•
RAID 1 to RAID 5
•
RAID 1 to RAID 6
•
RAID 5 to RAID 6
Table 3.3 lists the number of additional drives required when you change
the RAID level of a virtual drive.
Table 3.3
Additional Drives Required for RAID-Level Migration
From RAID Level to RAID Original Number of Drives
Level
in Drive Group
Additional Drives Required
RAID 0 to RAID 1
RAID 0: 1 drive
1
RAID 0 to RAID 5
RAID 0: 1 drive
2
RAID 1 to RAID 5
RAID 1: 2 drives
1
RAID 1 to RAID 6
RAID 1: 2 drives
1
Follow these steps to migrate the RAID level:
Caution:
Back up any data that you want to keep before you change
the RAID level of the virtual drive.
1. On the main WebBIOS CU screen, select a virtual drive.
2. Click Virtual Drives.
3. When the Virtual Drive screen appears, select Migration only (and
skip to step 6) or Migration with addition in the right panel.
4. If you selected Migration with addition, select one or more drives
from the small window in the lower right of the screen.
3-78
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
5. Select a new RAID level from the drop-down menu on the right.
The available RAID levels are limited, based on the current RAID
level of the virtual drive plus the number of drives available.
6. When you have made your selections, click Go at the bottom of the
right panel.
7. When the message appears, confirm that you want to migrate the
RAID level of the virtual drive.
A reconstruction operation begins on the virtual drive. You must wait until
the reconstruction is completed before you perform any other tasks in the
WebBIOS CU.
Managing Configurations
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3-79
3-80
WebBIOS Configuration Utility
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Chapter 4
MegaRAID Command
Tool
The MegaRAID Command Tool (CT) is a command line interface (CLI)
application for SAS. You can use this utility to configure, monitor, and
maintain MegaRAID SAS RAID controllers and the devices connected to
them.
Note:
The CT supports only the MegaRAID controller. It supports
SAS and SATA II, but it does not support other types of
MegaRAID controllers, such as U320, SATA I, or IDE.
Note:
The IA-64 release for Windows is similar to the 32-bit
release, so you can follow the 32-bit instructions. 32-bit
applications that were validated on an x64 system, such as
the Intel Markette system, can use the 32-bit instructions,
also.
This chapter has the following sections:
•
Section 4.1, “Product Overview”
•
Section 4.2, “Novell NetWare, SCO, Solaris, FreeBSD, and DOS
Operating System Support”
•
Section 4.3, “Command Line Abbreviations and Conventions”
•
Section 4.4, “Controller Property-Related Options”
•
Section 4.5, “Patrol Read-Related Controller Properties”
•
Section 4.6, “BIOS-Related Properties”
•
Section 4.7, “Battery Backup Unit-Related Properties”
•
Section 4.8, “Options for Displaying Logs Kept at Firmware Level”
•
Section 4.9, “Configuration-Related Options”
•
Section 4.10, “Virtual Drive-Related Options”
•
Section 4.11, “Drive-Related Options”
MegaRAID SAS Software User’s Guide
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
4-1
4.1
•
Section 4.12, “Enclosure-Related Options”
•
Section 4.13, “Flashing the Firmware”
•
Section 4.14, “SAS Topology”
•
Section 4.15, “Diagnostic-Related Options”
•
Section 4.16, “Miscellaneous Options”
Product Overview
The MegaCLI Configuration Utility is a command line interface
application you can use to manage MegaRAID SAS RAID controllers.
You can use MegaCLI Configuration Utility to perform the following tasks:
4-2
•
Configure MegaRAID SAS RAID controllers and attached devices
•
Display information about virtual drives and drives for the controller
and other storage components
•
Display ongoing progress for operations on drives and virtual drives
•
Change properties for the virtual drives and drives for the controller
and other storage components
•
Set, retrieve, and verify controller default settings
•
Change the firmware on the controllers
•
Monitor the RAID storage systems
•
Support RAID levels 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60 (depending on the
RAID controller)
•
Create and use scripts with the scriptable CLI tool
•
Configure drive into groups and virtual drives on the controller
•
Display configuration information for the controller, drives, and virtual
drives
•
Change virtual drive properties on the controller
•
Change drive properties on the controller
•
Display controller properties
•
Load configuration to the controller from a file
•
Save the controller configuration to a file
MegaRAID Command Tool
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
•
Start or stop a rebuild, consistency check (CC), or initialization
operation
•
Enable or disable a background initialization (BGI)
•
Stop or display an ongoing background initialization
•
Start or display a reconstruction
•
Start or stop patrol read
•
Set and retrieve patol read related settings
•
Flash new firmware on the SAS RAID controller
•
Read and program NVRAM and flash memory directly into DOS
•
Display relevant messages on the console and/or in the log file
•
Display controller data using one command
•
Exit with predefined success or failure exit codes
•
Scan, preview, and import foreign configurations
•
Set predefined environment variables, such as the number of
controllers and virtual drives
•
Display firmware event logs
•
Display help for how to use the command line options:
•
Display battery unit properties
•
Display enclosure properties
•
Display and set connector mode on supported controllers
The following sections describe the command line options in the
MegaCLI Configuration Utility that you can use to perform these
functions.
Note :
The MegaCLI Configuration Utility has support for the Intel®
Itanium (64-bit) platform. MegaCLI is the only application
currently supported on IPF system.
Product Overview
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
4-3
4.2
Novell NetWare, SCO, Solaris, FreeBSD, and DOS
Operating System Support
The MegaCLI Configuration Utility functions under the Novell®
NetWare®, SCO® OpenServer™, SCO UnixWare®, Solaris, FreeBSD,
and DOS operating systems in the same way that it does under the
Windows and Linux operating systems. All of the commands supported
for the Windows and Linux operating systems are supported for the
NetWare, SCO, and Solaris operating systems as well.
For the SCO OpenServer and SCO UnixWare operating systems, LSI
provides an executable file that you can execute from any folder, and an
image of the same executable file on a floppy drive. The image filename
is MegaCLI.image. The floppy disk is provided so that you can distribute
MegaCLI and install the executable file later as needed.
For the Solaris operating system, LSI provides an executable file that you
can execute from any folder. No installation is required.
For the Novell NetWare operating system, LSI provides an executable
file, MegaCLI.nlm, that you can execute from any folder. No installation
is required. The output of all of the commands appears in the console
window.
4.3
Command Line Abbreviations and Conventions
This section explains the abbreviations and conventions used with
MegaCLI Configuration Utility commands.
4.3.1
Abbreviations Used in the Command Line
Table 4.1 lists the abbreviations for the virtual drive parameters used in
the following sections.
4-4
MegaRAID Command Tool
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Table 4.1
4.3.2
Command Line Abbreviations
Abbreviation
Description
WB
WriteBack write policy
WT
WriteThrough write policy
ADRA
Adaptive Read Ahead read policy
RA
Read Ahead read policy
NORA
Normal Read policy (No read ahead)
DIO
Direct I/O cache policy
CIO
Cached I/O cache policy
Conventions
There are some options for which you can specify multiple values.
You can enter commands for a single controller (–aN), multiple controllers
(-a0,1,2) or work on all present controllers (-aALL). This is denoted as
–aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL in this document and specifies that you can enter
commands for one controller, multiple controllers, or all controllers.
Note :
All options in the MegaRAID Command Tool are positiondependent, unless otherwise specified.
Table 4.2 describes the conventions used in the options.
Table 4.2
Conventions
Convention
Description
|
Specifies “or,” meaning you can choose between options.
-aN
N specifies the controller number for the command.
-a0,1,2
Specifies the command is for controllers 0, 1, and 2. You can select two or more
controllers in this manner.
-aALL
Specifies the command is for all controllers.
-Lx
x specifies the virtual drive number for the command.
-L0,1,2
Specifies the command is for virtual drives 0, 1, and 2. You can select two or
more virtual drives in this manner.
-Lall
Specifies the command is for all virtual drives.
Command Line Abbreviations and Conventions
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
4-5
Table 4.2
Conventions (Cont.)
Convention
Description
[E0:S0,E1,S1,…] Specifies when one or more physical devices need(s) to be specified in the
command line. Each [E:S] pair specifies one physical device where E means
device ID of the enclosure in which a drive resides, and S means the slot
number of the enclosure.
In the case of a physical device directly connected to the SAS port on the
controller, with no enclosure involved, the format of [:S] can be used where S
means the port number on the controller. For devices attached through the
backplane, the firmware provides an enclosure device ID and MegaCLI expects
the user input in the format of [E:S]. In the following sections, only the format,
[E:S], is used in the command descriptions, although both formats are valid.
[ ]
Indicates that the parameter is optional except when it is used to specify
physical devices. For example, [WT] means the write policy (WriteThrough) is
optional.
If you enter WT at the command line, the application will use WriteThrough write
policy for the virtual drive. Otherwise, it uses the default value for the parameter.
{ }
Indicates that the parameters are grouped and that they must be given at the
same time.
You can specify the -Silent command line option for all possible
functions of the MegaCLI Configuration Utility. If you enter this option at
the command line, no message displays on the screen.
4.4
Controller Property-Related Options
You can use the commands in this section to set or display properties
related to the controller(s), such as the virtual drive parameters and
factory defaults.
4.4.1
Display Controller Properties
Use the command in Table 4.3 to display parameters for the selected
controller(s).
Table 4.3
Convention
4-6
Controller Parameters
MegaCli -AdpAllinfo -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
MegaRAID Command Tool
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Table 4.3
Controller Parameters (Cont.)
Description
4.4.2
Displays information about the controller, including cluster state, BIOS, alarm,
firmware version, BIOS version, battery charge counter value, rebuild rate, bus
number/device number, present RAM, memory size, serial number of the board, and
SAS address.
Display Number of Controllers Supported
Use the command in Table 4.3 to display the number of controllers
supported on the system.
Table 4.4
Number of Controllers Supported
Convention
MegaCli -AdpCount
Description
Displays the number of controllers supported on the system and returns the number
to the operating system.
4.4.3
Enable or Disable Automatic Rebuild
Use the command in Table 4.5 to turn automatic rebuild on or off for the
selected controller(s). If you have configured hot spares and enabled
automatic rebuild, the RAID controller automatically tries to use them to
rebuild failed drives. Automatic rebuild also controls whether a rebuild will
start when a drive that was part of the drive group is reinserted.
Table 4.5
Enable or Disable Automatic Rebuild
Convention
MegaCli –AdpAutoRbld -Enbl|-Dsbl|-Dsply -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Enables or disables automatic rebuild on the selected controller(s).
The -Dsply option shows the status of the automatic rebuild state.
4.4.4
Flush Controller Cache
Use the command in Table 4.6 to flush the controller cache on the
selected controller(s). This option sends the contents of cache memory
to the virtual drive(s). If the MegaRAID system must be powered down
rapidly, you must flush the contents of the cache memory to preserve
data integrity.
Table 4.6
Convention
Cache Flush on Selected Controller
MegaCli –AdpCacheFlush -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Controller Property-Related Options
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
4-7
Table 4.6
Cache Flush on Selected Controller (Cont.)
Description
4.4.5
Flushes the controller cache on the selected controller(s).
Set Controller Properties
This command sets the properties on the selected controller(s).
For example, for {RebuildRate -val}, you can enter a percentage
between 0 percent and 100 percent as the value for the rebuild rate.
(The rebuild rate is the percentage of the compute cycles dedicated to
rebuilding failed drives.) At 0 percent, the rebuild is done only if the
system is not doing anything else. At 100 percent, the rebuild has a
higher priority than any other system activity.
Note:
LSI recommends the default rebuild rate of 30 percent, and
the default patrol read rate of 30 percent.
Use the command in Table 4.7 to display the list of properties you can
set for the controller(s).
Table 4.7
Convention
4-8
Set Controller Properties
MegaCli –AdpSetProp {CacheFlushInterval –val}|{RebuildRate -val}|
{PatrolReadRate –val}|{BgiRate –val}|{CCRate –val}| {ReconRate –val}|
{SpinupDriveCount –val}|{SpinupDelay –val}|{CoercionMode –val} |
{ClusterEnable –val}|{PredFailPollInterval –val}| {BatWarnDsbl –val}|
{EccBucketSize –val}|{EccBucketLeakRate –val}|{AbortCCOnError
–val}|AlarmEnbl | AlarmDsbl | AlarmSilence |{SMARTCpyBkEnbl –val} |
-AutoDetectBackPlaneDsbl | -CopyBackDsbl | -LoadBalanceMode | -aN|
-a0,1,2|-aALL
MegaRAID Command Tool
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Table 4.7
Set Controller Properties (Cont.)
Description
4.4.6
Sets the properties on the selected controller(s). The possible settings are:
CacheFlushInterval: Cache flush interval in seconds. Values: 0 to 255.
RebuildRate: Rebuild rate. Values: 0 to 100.
PatrolReadRate: Patrol read rate. Values: 0 to 100.
BgiRate: Background initilization rate. Values: 0 to 100.
CCRate: Consistency check rate. Values: 0 to 100.
ReconRate: Reconstruction rate. Values: 0 to 100.
SpinupDriveCount: Max number of drives to spin up at one time. Values: 0 to 255.
SpinupDelay: Number of seconds to delay among spinup groups. Values: 0 to 255.
CoercionMode: Drive capacity Coercion mode. Values: 0 - None, 1 - 128 Mbytes,
2 - 1 Gbytes.
ClusterEnable: Cluster is enabled or disabled. Values: 0 - Disabled, 1 - Enabled.
PredFailPollInterval: Number of seconds between predicted fail polls. Values:
0 to 65535.
BatWarnDsbl: Disable warnings for missing battery or missing hardware.
Values: 0 - Enabled, 1 - Disabled.
EccBucketSize: Size of ECC single-bit-error bucket. Values: 0 to 255.
EccBucketLeakRate: Leak rate (in minutes) of ECC single-bit-error bucket.
Values: 0 to 65535.
AbortCCOnError:
AlarmEnbl: Set alarm to Enabled.
AlarmDsbl: Set alarm to Disabled.
AlarmSilence: Silence an active alarm.
SMARTCpyBkEnbl: Enable copyback operation on Self-Monitoring Analysis and
Reporting Technology (SMART) errors. Copyback is initiated when the first SMART
error occurs on a drive that is part of a virtual drive.
AutoDetectBackPlaneDsbl: Detect automatically if the backplane has been
disabled.
CopyBackDsbl: Disable or enable the copyback operation.
LoadBalanceMode: Disable or enable the load balancing mode.
Display Specified Controller Properties
Use the command in Table 4.8 to display specified properties on the
selected controller(s).
Table 4.8
Display Specified Controller Properties
Convention
MegaCli –AdpGetProp CacheFlushInterval | RebuildRate | PatrolReadRate|
BgiRate | CCRate | ReconRate | SpinupDriveCount | SpinupDelay |
CoercionMode | PredFailPollInterval | ClusterEnable | BatWarnDsbl |
EccBucketSize | EccBucketLeakRate | EccBucketCount | AlarmDsply -aN|
-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays the properties on the selected controller(s).
EccBucketCount: Count of single-bit ECC errors currently in the bucket.
See Table 4.7 for explanations of the other options.
Controller Property-Related Options
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
4-9
4.4.7
Set Factory Defaults
Use the command in Table 4.9 to set the factory defaults on the selected
controller(s).
Table 4.9
Set Factory Defaults
Convention
MegaCli -AdpFacDefSet -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Sets the factory defaults on the selected controller(s).
4.4.8
Set SAS Address
Use the command in Table 4.10 to set the SAS address on the selected
controller(s).
Table 4.10
Set SAS Address on Controller
Convention
MegaCli –AdpSetSASA str[0-64] -aN
Description
Sets the controllers SAS address. This string must be a 64-digit hexadecimal
number.
4.4.9
Set Time and Date on Controller
Use the command in Table 4.11 to set the time and date on the selected
controller(s).
Table 4.11
Set Time and Date on Controller
Convention
MegaCli –AdpSetTime yyyymmdd HH:mm:ss -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Sets the time and date on the controller. This command uses a 24-hour format.
For example, 7 p.m. displays as 19:00:00. The order of date and time is reversible.
4.4.10
Display Time and Date on Controller
Use the command in Table 4.12 to display the time and date on the
selected controller(s).
Table 4.12
Display Time and Date on Controller
Convention
MegaCli –AdpGetTime -aN
Description
Displays the time and date on the controller. This command uses a 24-hour format.
For example, 7 p.m. would display as 19:00:00.
4-10
MegaRAID Command Tool
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
4.5
Patrol Read-Related Controller Properties
You can use the commands in this section to select the settings for Patrol
Read. A Patrol Read scans the system for possible drive errors that could
lead to drive failure, then takes action to correct the errors. The goal is
to protect data integrity by detecting drive failure before the failure can
damage data. The corrective actions depend on the virtual drive
configuration and the type of errors. Patrol Read affects performance; the
more iterations there are, the greater the impact.
4.5.1
Set Patrol Read Options
Use the command in Table 4.13 on the selected controller(s) to set the
Patrol Read options.
Table 4.13
Set Patrol Read Options
Convention
MegaCli –AdpPR –Dsbl|EnblAuto|EnblMan|Start|Stop|Info -aN|
-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Sets Patrol Read options on a single controller, multiple controllers, or all controllers:
-Dsbl: Disables Patrol Read for the selected controller(s).
-EnblAuto: Enables Patrol Read automatically for the selected controller(s).
This means Patrol Read will start automatically after the controller initialization is
complete.
-EnblMan: Enables Patrol Read manually for the selected controller(s). This means
that Patrol Read does not start automatically; it has to be started manually by
selecting the Start command.
-Start: Starts Patrol Read for the selected controller(s).
-Stop: Stops Patrol Read for the selected controller(s).
-Info: Displays the following Patrol Read information for the selected controller(s):
• Patrol Read operation mode
• Patrol Read execution delay value
• Patrol Read status
4.5.2
Set Patrol Read Delay Interval
Use the command in Table 4.14 on the selected controller(s) to set the
time between Patrol Read iterations.
Patrol Read-Related Controller Properties
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
4-11
Table 4.14
Set Patrol Read Delay Interval
Convention
MegaCli –AdpPRSetDelay –Val -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Sets the time between Patrol Read iterations on a single controller, multiple
controllers, or all controllers:
-Val: Sets delay time between Patrol Read iterations. The value is time of delay in
hours. A value of zero means no delay and an immediate restart.
4.6
BIOS-Related Properties
You can use the commands in this section to select the settings for
BIOS-related options.
4.6.1
Set or Display Bootable Virtual Drive ID
Use the command in Table 4.15 to set or display the ID of the bootable
virtual drive.
Note:
Table 4.15
This option does not write a boot sector to the virtual drive.
The operating system will not load if the boot sector is
incorrect.
Bootable Virtual Drive ID
Convention
MegaCli –AdpBootDrive {-Set –Lx} | -Get -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Sets or displays the bootable virtual drive ID:
-Set: Sets the virtual drive as bootable so that during the next reboot, the BIOS will
look for a boot sector in the specified virtual drive.
-Get: Displays the bootable virtual drive ID.
4.6.2
Select BIOS Status Options
Use the command in Table 4.16 to set the options for the BIOS status.
Table 4.16
Convention
4-12
Options for BIOS Status
MegaCli –AdpBIOS -Enbl|-Dsbl|-Dsply| SOE | BE
MegaRAID Command Tool
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
-aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Table 4.16
Options for BIOS Status (Cont.)
Description
4.7
Sets BIOS options. The following are the settings you can select on a single
controller, multiple controllers, or all controllers:
-Enbl, -Dsbl, -Dsply: Enables, disables or displays the BIOS status on selected
controller(s).
-SOE: Stops on BIOS errors during POST for selected controller(s). When set to
-SOE, the BIOS stops in case of a problem with the configuration. This gives you the
option to enter the configuration utility to resolve the problem. This is available only
when you enable the BIOS status.
-BE: Bypasses BIOS errors during POST. This is available only when you enable the
BIOS status.
Battery Backup Unit-Related Properties
You can use the commands in this section to select the settings for
BBU-related options.
4.7.1
Display BBU Information
Use the command in Table 4.17 to display complete information about
the BBU for the selected controller(s).
Table 4.17
Display BBU Information
Convention
MegaCli -AdpBbuCmd -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays complete information about the BBU, such as status, capacity information,
design information, and properties.
4.7.2
Display BBU Status Information
Use the command in Table 4.18 to display complete information about
the status of the BBU, such as temperature and voltage, for the selected
controller(s).
Table 4.18
Convention
Display BBU Status Information
MegaCli -AdpBbuCmd -GetBbuStatus –aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Battery Backup Unit-Related Properties
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
4-13
Table 4.18
Display BBU Status Information (Cont.)
Description
Displays complete information about the BBU status, such as the temperature and
voltage. The information displays in the following formats:
BBU Status for Adapter: xx
Battery Type: XXXXXX(string)
Voltage: xx mV
Current: xx mA
Temperature: xx C°
Firmware Status: xx
Battery state: xx
Gas Gauge Status:
Fully Discharged: Yes/No
Fully Charged: Yes/No
Discharging: Yes/No
Initialized: Yes/No
Remaining Time Alarm: Yes/No
Remaining Capacity Alarm: Yes/No
Discharge Terminated: Yes/No
Over Temperature: Yes/No
Charging Terminated: Yes/No
Over Charged: Yes/No
Additional status information displays differently for iBBU™ and BBU.
For iBBU:
Relative State of Charge: xx
Charger System State: xx
Charger System Ctrl: xx
Charging Current: xx mA
Absolute State of Charge: xx%
Max Error: xx%
For BBU:
Relative State of Charge: xx
Charger Status: xx
Remaining Capacity: xx mAh
Full Charge Capacity: mAh
isSOHGood: Yes/No
4.7.3
Display BBU Capacity
Use the command in Table 4.19 to display the BBU capacity for the
selected controller(s).
4-14
MegaRAID Command Tool
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Table 4.19
Display BBU Capacity Information
Convention
MegaCli -AdpBbuCmd -GetBbuCapacityInfo –aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays BBU capacity information. The information displays in the following format:
BBU Capacity Info for Adapter: x
Relative State of Charge: xx%
Absolute State of Charge: xx%
Remaining Capacity: xx mAh
Full Charge Capacity: xx mAh
Run Time to Empty: xxx Min
Average Time to Empty: xxx Min
Average Time to Full: xxx Min
Cycle Count: xx
Max Error: xx%
4.7.4
Display BBU Design Parameters
Use the command in Table 4.20 to display BBU design parameters for
the selected controller(s).
Table 4.20
Display BBU Design Parameters
Convention
MegaCli -AdpBbuCmd -GetBbuDesignInfo –aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays information about the BBU design parameters. The information displays in
the following formats:
BBU Design Info for Adapter: x
Date of Manufacture: mm/dd, yyyy
Design Capacity: xxx mAh
Design Voltage: mV
Serial Number: 0xhhhh
Pack Stat Configuration: 0xhhhh
Manufacture Name: XXXXXX(String)
Device Name: XXXXXX(String)
Device Chemistry: XXXXXX(String)
4.7.5
Display Current BBU Properties
Use the command in Table 4.21 to display the current BBU properties for
the selected controller(s).
Battery Backup Unit-Related Properties
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
4-15
Table 4.21
Display Current BBU Properties
Convention
MegaCli -AdpBbuCmd -GetBbuProperties –aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays current properties of the BBU. The information displays in the following
formats:
BBU Properties for Adapter: x
Auto Learn Period: xxx Sec
Next Learn Time: xxxx Sec
Learn Delay Interval: xx Hours
Auto-Learn Mode: Warn via Event/Disabled/Enabled
4.7.6
Start BBU Learning Cycle
Use the command in Table 4.22 to start the BBU learning cycle on the
selected controller(s). A learning cycle is a battery calibration operation
performed by the controller periodically (approximately every three
months) to determine the condition of the battery.
Table 4.22
Start BBU Learning Cycle
Convention
MegaCli -AdpBbuCmd -BbuLearn -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Starts the learning cycle on the BBU. No parameter is needed for this option.
4.7.7
Place Battery in Low-Power Storage Mode
Use the command in Table 4.23 to place the battery into Low-Power
Storage mode on the selected controller(s). This saves battery power
consumption.
Table 4.23
Place Battery in Low-Power Storage Mode
Convention
MegaCli -AdpBbuCmd -BbuMfgSleep -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Places the battery in Low-Power Storage mode. The battery automatically exits this
state after 5 seconds.
4.7.8
Set BBU Properties
Use the command in Table 4.24 to set the BBU properties on the
selected controller(s) after reading from the file.
4-16
MegaRAID Command Tool
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Table 4.24
Set BBU Properties
Convention
MegaCli -AdpBbuCmd -SetBbuProperties -f<fileName> -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Sets the BBU properties on the selected controller(s) after reading from the file.
The information displays in the following formats:
autoLearnPeriod = 1800Sec
nextLearnTime = 12345678Sec Seconds past 1/1/2000
learnDelayInterval = 24hours Not greater than 7 days
autoLearnMode = 0 0 – Enabled, 1 - Disabled, 2 – WarnViaEvent.
1. NOTE: You can change only two of these parameters, learnDelayInterval and
autoLearnMode.
4.8
Options for Displaying Logs Kept at Firmware Level
Use the commands in this section to select the display settings for the
event log and BBU terminal log, which are kept at the firmware level.
4.8.1
Event Log Management
Use the command in Table 4.25 to manage the event entries in the event
log for the selected controller(s).
Table 4.25
Event Log Management
Convention
MegaCli –AdpEventLog –GetEventlogInfo | –GetEvents | GetSinceShutdown|
GetSinceReboot | IncludeDeleted | {GetLatest <number>} -f <filename>
| Clear -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL | {GetCCIncon} -f <filename> -LX|L0,2,5...|-LALL -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Manages event log entries. The following are the settings you can select on a single
controller, multiple controllers, or all controllers:
-GetEventlogInfo: Displays overall event information such as total number of
events, newest sequence number, oldest sequence number, shutdown sequence
number, reboot sequence number, and clear sequence number.
-GetEvents: Gets event log entry details. The information shown consists of total
number of entries available at firmware side since the last clear and details of each
entries of the error log. Start_entry specifies the initial event log entry when
displaying the log.
-GetSinceShutdown: Displays all of the events since last controller shutdown.
-GetSinceReboot: Displays all of the events since last controller reboot.
-IncludeDeleted: Displays all events, including deleted events.
-GetLatest: Displays the latest number of events, if any exist. The event data will
be writtent to the file in reverse order.
-Clear: Clears the event log for the selected controller(s).
-GetCCIncon:
Options for Displaying Logs Kept at Firmware Level
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
4-17
4.8.2
Set BBU Terminal Logging
Use the command in Table 4.26 to set the BBU terminal logging for the
selected controller(s).
Table 4.26
Set BBU Terminal Logging
Convention
MegaCli –FwTermLog -Bbuoff |–BbuoffTemp|-Bbuon|-BbuGet|-Dsply | -Clear
-aN| -a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Sets BBU terminal logging options. The following are the settings you can select on
a single controller, multiple controllers, or all controllers:
-Bbuoff: Turns off the BBU for firmware terminal logging. To turn off the BBU for
logging, you have to shut down your system or turn off the power to the system after
you run the command.
–BbuoffTemp: Temporarily turns off the BBU for TTY (firmware terminal) logging.
The battery will be turned on at the next reboot.
-Bbuon: Turns on the BBU for TTY (firmware terminal) logging.
-BbuGet: Displays the current BBU settings for TTY logging.
-Dsply: Displays the TTY log (firmware terminal log) entries with details on the
given controllers. The information shown consists of the total number of entries
available at a firmware side.
-Clear: Clears the TTY log.
4.9
Configuration-Related Options
You can specify the drives by using the Enclosure ID:Slot ID for SAS
controllers. This assumes that all drives are connected to the controller
through an enclosure. If the drives are not connected to an enclosure, it
is assumed that they are connected to Enclosure 0. In this case there is
no slot, so you can use the pdlist command to get the slot equivalent
number. (This applies to all commands that use the Enclosure ID:Slot ID
format.) MegaCLI expects the input in [:S] format for directly attached
devices.
In the following options, [E0:S0, E1:S1] specifies the enclosure ID and
slot ID for the drive.
4.9.1
Create a RAID Drive Group from All Unconfigured Good Drives
Use the command in Table 4.28 to create one RAID drive group out of
all of the unconfigured good drives, and a hot spare, if desired. This is
for RAID levels 0, 5, 6, 10, 50, or 60. All free drives are used to create
a new drive group and, if desired, one hot spare drive. If it is not possible
4-18
MegaRAID Command Tool
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
to use all of the free drives, the command will abort with a related error
level. If there are drives of different capacities, the largest drive is used
to make the hot spare.
Table 4.27
Note:
A virtual drive cannot have both SAS drives and SATA
drives. Therefore, if the remaining free drives are SAS and
SATA, a drive group cannot be created. The command will
abort with a related error level.
Note:
Firmware supports only 32 drives per drive group, so if
there are more than 32 unconfigured good drives, MegaCLI
cannot configure any of the drives, and the command will
abort.
Create a Drive Group from All of the Unconfigured Drives
Convention
MegaCli –CfgLDAdd -R0|-R1|-R5|-R6[E0:S0,E1:S1,...] [WT | WB] [NORA |
RA | ADRA] [Direct | Cached] [CachedBadBBU|NoCachedBadBBU] [ GHSP |
DHSP] –spn x –ax | -Force
Description
Creates one RAID drive group out of all of the unconfigured good drives, and a hot
spare, if desired. This is for RAID levels 0, 5, 6, 10, 50, or 60. All free drives are
used to create a new drive group and, if desired, one hot spare drive.
-Rx[E0:S0,...]: Specifies the RAID level and the drive enclosure/slot numbers
used to construct a drive group.
-WT (Write through), WB (Write back): Selects write policy.
-NORA (No read ahead), RA (Read ahead), ADRA (Adaptive read ahead): Selects read
policy.
-Direct, -Cached: Selects cache policy.
[{CachedBadBBU|NoCachedBadBBU }]: Specifies whether to use write cache when
the BBU is bad.
GHSP, DHSP: Specifies that the hot spare is global or dedicated.
-spn: Specifies the maximum number of spans that a spanned drive group can have.
-Force: Specifies that drive coercion is used to make the capacity of the drives
compatible. Drive coercion is a tool for forcing drives of varying capacities to the
same capacity so they can be used in a drive group.
4.9.2
Add RAID 0, 1, 5, or 6 Configuration
Use the command in Table 4.28 to add a RAID level 0, 1, 5, or 6
configuration to the existing configuration on the selected controller.
For RAID levels 10, 50, or 60, see Section 4.9.3, “Add RAID 10, 50, or
60 Configuration.”
Configuration-Related Options
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
4-19
Table 4.28
Add RAID 0, 1, 5, or 6 Configuration
Convention
MegaCli –CfgLDAdd -R0|-R1|-R5|-R6[E0:S0,E1:S1,...] [WT | WB] [NORA |
RA | ADRA] [Direct | Cached] [CachedBadBBU|NoCachedBadBBU]
[-szXXXXXXXX [-szYYYYYYYY [... ]]] [-strpszM] [–Hsp[E5:S5,...]]
[–afterLdX] -aN
Description
Adds a RAID level 0, 1, 5, or 6 configuration to a specified controller. Even if no
configuration is present, you have the option to write the configuration to the
controller.
Note that RAID 1 supports up to 32 drives in a single span of 16 drive groups.
RAID 1 requires an even number of drives, as data from one drive is mirrored to the
other drive in each RAID 1 drive group.
-Rx[E0:S0,...]: Specifies the RAID level and the drive enclosure/slot numbers to
construct a drive group.
-WT (Write through), WB (Write back): Selects write policy.
-NORA (No read ahead), RA (Read ahead), ADRA (Adaptive read ahead): Selects read
policy.
-Cached, -Direct: Selects cache policy.
[{CachedBadBBU|NoCachedBadBBU }]: Specifies whether to use write cache when
the BBU is bad.
-szXXXXXXXX: Specifies the capacity for the virtual drive, where XXXX is a decimal
number of Mbytes. However, the actual capacity of the virtual drive can be smaller,
because the driver requires the number of blocks from the drives in each virtual drive
to be aligned to the stripe size. If multiple size options are specified, CT configures
the virtual drives in the order of the options entered in the command line.
The configuration of a particular virtual drive will fail if the remaining capacity of the
drive group is too small to configure the virtual drive with the specified capacity.
This option can also be used to create a configuration on the free space available
in the drive group.
-strpszM: Specifies the stripe size, where the stripe size values are 8, 16, 32, 64,
128, 256, 512, or 1024 KBytes.
Hsp[E5:S5,...]: Creates hot spares when you create the configuration. The new
hot spares will be dedicated to the virtual drive used in creating the configuration.
This option does not allow you to create global hot spares. To create global hot
spares, you must use the -PdHsp command with proper subcommands.
You can also use this option to create a configuration on the free space available in
the virtual drive. You can specify which free slot should be used by specifying the
-AfterLdX: This command is optional. By default, the application uses the first free
slot available in the virtual drive. This option is valid only if the virtual drive is already
used for configuration.
4-20
MegaRAID Command Tool
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
4.9.3
Add RAID 10, 50, or 60 Configuration
Use the command in Table 4.29 to add a RAID 10, RAID 50, or RAID 60
configuration to the existing configuration on the selected controller.
For RAID levels 0, 1, 5, or 6, see Section 4.9.2, “Add RAID 0, 1, 5, or 6
Configuration.”
Table 4.29
Add RAID 10, 50, or 60 Configuration
Convention
MegaCli –CfgSpanAdd -R10|-R50|R60 –Array0[E0:S0,E1:S1,...]
–Array1[E0:S0,E1:S1,...] [...]
[WT | WB] [NORA | RA | ADRA] [Direct
| Cached] [CachedBadBBU|NoCachedBadBBU] [-szXXXXXXXX [-szYYYYYYYY [...
]]] [-strpszM] [–afterLdX] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Creates a RAID level 10, 50, or 60 (spanned) configuration from the specified drive
groups. Even if no configuration is present, you must use this option to write the
configuration to the controller.
Note that RAID 10 supports up to eight spans with a maximum of 32 drives in each
span. (There are factors, such as the type of controller, that limit the number of drives
you can use.) RAID 10 requires an even number of drives, as data from one drive is
mirrored to the other drive in each RAID 1 drive group. You can have an even or odd
number of spans.
Multiple drive groups are specified using the –ArrayX[E0:S0,...] option. (Note that
X starts from 0, not 1.) All of the drive groups must have the same number of drives.
At least two drive groups must be provided. The order of options {WT |WB} {NORA
| RA | ADRA} {Direct | Cached} is flexible.
The size option, -szXXXXXXXX, can be accepted to allow slicing in the spanned drive
groups if the controller supports this feature. The [–afterLdX] option is accepted if
the size option is accepted. CT exits and does not create a configuration if the size
or the afterLd option is specified but the controller does not support slicing in the
spanned drive groups.
4.9.4
Clear the Existing Configuration
Use the command in Table 4.30 to clear the existing configuration on the
selected controller(s).
Table 4.30
Clear Existing Configuration
Convention
MegaCli –CfgClr -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Clears the existing configuration.
Configuration-Related Options
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
4-21
4.9.5
Save the Configuration on the Controller
Use the command in Table 4.31 to save the configuration for the selected
controller(s) to the given filename.
Table 4.31
Save Configuration on the Controller
Convention
MegaCli –CfgSave
Description
Saves the configuration for the selected controller(s) to the given filename.
4.9.6
–f FileName
-aN
Restore the Configuration Data from File
Use the command in Table 4.32 to read the configuration from the file
and load it on the selected controller(s). You can restore the read/write
properties and RAID configuration using hot spares.
Table 4.32
Restore Configuration Data from File
Convention
MegaCli –CfgRestore
Description
Reads the configuration from the file and loads it on the controller. MegaCLI can
store or restore all read and write controller properties, all read and write properties
for virtual drives, and the RAID configuration including hot spares. Note the following:
• MegaCLI does not validate the setup when restoring the RAID configuration.
• The -CfgSave option stores the configuration data and controller properties in the
file. Configuration data has only the device ID and sequence number information
of the drives used in the configuration. The CfgRestore option will fail if the same
device IDs of the drives are not present.
4.9.7
–f FileName
-aN
Manage Foreign Configuration Information
Use the command in Table 4.33 to manage configurations from other
controllers, called foreign configurations, for the selected controller(s).
You can scan, preview, import, and clear foreign configurations.
Note:
4-22
The actual status of virtual drives and drives can differ from
the information displayed in the –Scan option. LSI suggests
that you run –Preview before you import a foreign
configuration.
MegaRAID Command Tool
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Table 4.33
Manage Foreign Configuration Information
Convention
MegaCli –CfgForeign –Scan | {-Preview | –Dsply| -Import | -Clear
[FID]} -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Manages foreign configurations. The options for this command are:
-Scan: Scans and displays available foreign configurations.
-Preview: Provides a preview of the imported foreign configuration. The foreign
configuration ID (FID) is optional.
-Dsply: Displays the foreign configuration.
-Import: Imports the foreign configuration. The FID is optional.
-Clear [FID]: Clears the foreign configuration. The FID is optional.
4.9.8
Delete Specified Virtual Drive(s)
Use the command in Table 4.34 to delete one, multiple, or all virtual
drives on the selected controller(s).
Table 4.34
Delete Specified Virtual Drives
Convention
MegaCli –CfgLDDel –Lx|-L0,1,2|-Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Deletes the specified virtual drive(s) on the selected controller(s). You can delete one
virtual drive, multiple virtual drives, or all of the selected virtual drives on selected
controller(s).
4.9.9
Display the Free Space
Use the command in Table 4.35 to display the free space that is available
to use for configuration on the selected controller(s).
Table 4.35
Display Free Space
Convention
MegaCli –CfgFreeSpaceInfo -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays all of the free space available for configuration on the selected controller(s).
The information displayed includes the number of drive groups, the number of spans
in each drive group, the number of free space slots in each drive group, the start
block, and the size (in both blocks and megabytes) of each free space slot.
Configuration-Related Options
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
4-23
4.10 Virtual Drive-Related Options
You can use the commands in this section to select settings for the virtual
drives and perform actions on them.
4.10.1
Display Virtual Drive Information
Use the command in Table 4.36 to display virtual drive information for the
selected controller(s).
Table 4.36
Display Virtual Drive Information
Convention
MegaCli –LDInfo –Lx|-L0,1,2|-Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays information about the virtual drive(s) on the selected controller(s).
This information includes the name, RAID level, RAID level qualifier, capacity in
megabytes, state, stripe size, number of drives, span depth, cache policy, access
policy, and ongoing activity progress, if any, including initialization, background
initialization, consistency check, and reconstruction.
4.10.2
Change the Virtual Drive Cache and Access Parameters
Use the command in Table 4.37 to change the cache policy and access
policy for the virtual drive(s) on the selected controller(s).
Table 4.37
Change Virtual Drive Cache and Access Parameters
Convention
MegaCli –LDSetProp WT | WB|NORA |RA | ADRA|-Cached|Direct|
CachedBadBBU|NoCachedBadBBU} | -RW|RO|Blocked | {-Name nameString} |
-EnDskCache|DisDskCache –Lx| -L0,1,2|-Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Allows you to change the following virtual drive parameters:
-WT (Write through), WB (Write back): Selects write policy.
-NORA (No read ahead), RA (Read ahead), ADRA (Adaptive read ahead): Selects read
policy.
-Cached, -Direct: Selects cache policy.
-CachedBadBBU|NoCachedBadBBU : Specifies whether to use write cache when the
BBU is bad.
-RW, -RO, Blocked: Selects access policy.
-EnDskCache: Enables drive cache.
-DisDskCache: Disables drive cache.
4-24
MegaRAID Command Tool
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
4.10.3
Display the Virtual Drive Cache and Access Parameters
Use the command in Table 4.38 to display cache and access parameters
for the virtual drive(s) on the selected controller(s).
Table 4.38
Display Virtual Drive Cache and Access Parameters
Convention
MegaCli –LDGetProp -Cache | -Access | -Name | -DskCache -Lx|-L0,1,2|
-Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays the cache and access policies of the virtual drive(s):
-Cache: -Cached, Direct: Displays cache policy.
-WT (Write through), WB (Write back): Selects write policy.
-NORA (No read ahead), RA (Read ahead), ADRA (Adaptive read ahead): Selects read
policy.
-Access: -RW, -RO, Blocked: Displays access policy.
-DskCache: Displays drive cache policy.
4.10.4
Manage Virtual Drives Initialization
Use the command in Table 4.39 to manage initialization of the virtual
drive(s) on the selected controller(s).
Table 4.39
Manage Virtual Drive Initialization
Convention
MegaCli –LDInit {–Start [Fast | Full]} |-Abort|–ShowProg|-ProgDsply
-Lx|-L0,1,2|-Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Allows you to select the following actions for virtual drive initialization:
-Start: Starts the initialization (writing 0s) on the virtual drive(s) and displays the
progress (this is optional). The fast initialization option initializes the first and last
8 Mbyte areas on the virtual drive. The full option allows you to initialize the entire
virtual drive.
-Abort: Aborts the ongoing initialization on the virtual drive(s).
-ShowProg: Displays the snapshot of the ongoing initialization, if any.
-ProgDsply: Displays the progress of the ongoing initialization. The routine
continues to display the progress until at least one initialization is completed or a key
is pressed.
Virtual Drive-Related Options
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
4-25
4.10.5
Manage a Consistency Check
Use the command in Table 4.40 to manage a data consistency check
(CC) on the virtual drives for the selected controller(s).
Table 4.40
Manage Consistency Check
Convention
MegaCli –LDCC –Start|-Abort|–ShowProg|-ProgDsply –Lx|-L0,1,2|-Lall
-aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Allows you to select the following actions for a data CC:
-Start: Starts a CC on the virtual drive(s), then displays the progress (optional) and
time remaining.
-Abort: Aborts an ongoing CC on the virtual drive(s).
-ShowProg: Displays a snapshot of an ongoing CC.
-ProgDsply: Displays ongoing CC progress. The progress displays until at least
one CC is completed or a key is pressed.
4.10.6
Manage a Background Initialization
Use the command in Table 4.41 to enable, disable, or suspend
background initialization (BGI), as well as display initialization progress
on the selected controller(s).
Table 4.41
Manage Background Initialization
Convention
MegaCli –LDBI -Enbl|-Dsbl|GetSetting|-ShowProg|-ProgDsply –Lx|L0,1,2|-Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Manages background initialization options. The following are the background
initialization settings you can select on a single controller, multiple controllers, or all
controllers:
-Enbl, -Dsbl: Enables or disables the background initialization on the selected
controller(s).
-ProgDsply: Displays an ongoing background initialization in a loop. This function
completes only when all background initialization processes complete or you press a
key to exit.
-ShowProg: Displays the current progress value.
- GetSetting: Displays current background initialization setting (Enabled or
Disabled).
4-26
MegaRAID Command Tool
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
4.10.7
Perform a Virtual Drive Reconstruction
Use the command in Table 4.42 to perform a reconstruction of the virtual
drive(s) on the selected controller(s).
Table 4.42
Virtual Drive Reconstruction
Convention
MegaCli –LDRecon {–Start –Rx [Add | Rmv PhysDrv[E0:S0,E1:S1,...] ] }
|–ShowProg|-ProgDsply –Lx –aN
Description
Controls and manages virtual drive reconstruction. The following are the virtual drive
reconstruction settings you can select on a single controller:
-Start: Starts a reconstruction of the selected virtual drive to a new RAID level.
-Rx: Changes the RAID level of the virtual drive when you start reconstruction.
You might need to add or remove a drive to make this possible.
-Start –Add PhysDrv[E0:S0,E1:S1....]: Adds listed drives to the virtual
drive and starts reconstruction on the selected virtual drive.
-Start –Rmv PhysDrv[E0:S0,E1:S1....]: Removes one drive from the
existing virtual drives and starts a reconstruction.
-ShowProg: Displays a snapshot of the ongoing reconstruction process.
-ProgDsply: Allows you to view the ongoing reconstruction. The routine continues
to display progress until at least one reconstruction is completed or a key is pressed.
4.10.8
Display Information about Virtual Drives and Drives
Use the command in Table 4.43 to display information about the virtual
drives and drives for the selected controller(s), such as the number of
virtual drives, RAID level, and drive capacity.
Table 4.43
Display Virtual Drive and Drive Information
Convention
MegaCli –LDPDInfo -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays information about the present virtual drive(s) and drive(s) on the selected
controller(s). Displays information including the number of virtual drives, the RAID
level of the virtual drives, and drive capacity information, which includes raw capacity,
coerced capacity, uncoerced capacity, and the SAS address.
4.10.9
Display the Number of Virtual Drives
Use the command in Table 4.44 to display the number of virtual drives
attached to the controller.
Table 4.44
Convention
Display Number of Virtual Drives
MegaCli –LDGetNum –aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Virtual Drive-Related Options
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
4-27
Table 4.44
Display Number of Virtual Drives (Cont.)
Description
Displays the number of virtual drives attached to the controller. The return value is
the number of virtual drives.
4.11 Drive-Related Options
You can use the commands in this section to select settings for the drives
and perform actions on them.
4.11.1
Display Drive Information
Use the command in Table 4.45 to display information about the drives
on the selected controller(s).
Table 4.45
Display Drive Information
Convention
MegaCli –PDInfo -PhysDrv[E0:S0,E1:S1....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Provides information about the drives connected to the enclosure and controller slot.
This includes information such as the enclosure number, slot number, device ID,
sequence number, drive type, capacity (if a drive), foreign state, firmware state, and
inquiry data.
For SAS devices, this includes additional information such as the SAS address of the
drive. For SAS expanders, this includes additional information such as the number of
devices connected to the expander.
4.11.2
Set the Drive State to Online
Use the command in Table 4.46 to set the state of a drive to Online.
In an online state, the drive is working normally and is a part of a
configured virtual drive.
Table 4.46
Set Drive State to Online
Convention
MegaCli –PDOnline -PhysDrv[E0:S0,E1:S1....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Changes the drive state to Online.
4.11.3
Set the Drive State to Offline
Use the command in Table 4.47 to set the state of a drive to Offline.
In the offline state, the virtual drive is not available to the RAID controller.
4-28
MegaRAID Command Tool
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Table 4.47
Set Drive State to Offline
Convention
MegaCli –PDOffline -PhysDrv[E0:S0,E1:S1....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Changes the drive state to Offline.
4.11.4
Change the Drive State to Unconfigured Good
Use the command in Table 4.48 to change the state of a drive from
Unconfigured-Bad to Unconfigured-Good.
Table 4.48
Change Drive State to Unconfigured Good
Convention
MegaCli –PDMakeGood -PhysDrv[E0:S0,E1:S1....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Changes the drive state to Offline.
4.11.5
Change Drive State
Use the command in Table 4.49 to change the drive state, as it relates
to hot spares, and to associate the drive to an enclosure and virtual drive
for the selected controller(s).
Table 4.49
Change Drive State
Convention
MegaCli –PDHSP {–Set [{-Dedicated -ArrayN |-Array0,1...}] [EnclAffinity] [-nonRevertible] } | -Rmv -PhysDrv[E0:S0,E1:S1,...]
-aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Changes the drive state (as it relates to hot spares) and associates the drive to an
enclosure and virtual drive on a single controller, multiple controllers, or all
controllers:
-Set: Changes the drive state to dedicated hot spare for the enclosure.
-Rmv: Changes the drive state to ready (removes the hot spare).
-EnclAffinity: Associates the hot spare to a selected enclosure.
-Array0: Dedicates the hot spare to a specific virtual drive.
Drive-Related Options
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
4-29
4.11.6
Manage a Drive Initialization
Use the command in Table 4.50 to manage a drive initialization on the
selected controller(s).
Table 4.50
Drive Initialization
Convention
MegaCli –PDClear -Start |-Stop|-ShowProg |-ProgDsply PhysDrv[E0:S0,E1:S1....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Manages initialization or displays initialization progress on a single controller, multiple
controllers, or all controllers:
-Start: Starts initialization on the selected drive(s).
-Stop: Stops an ongoing initialization on the selected drive(s).
-ShowProg: Displays the current progress percentage and time remaining for the
initialization. This option is useful for running the application through scripts.
-ProgDsply: Displays the ongoing clear progress. The routine continues to display
the initialization progress until at least one initialization is completed or a key is
pressed.
4.11.7
Rebuild a Drive
Use the command in Table 4.51 to start or stop a rebuild on a drive and
display the rebuild progress. When a drive in a RAID drive group fails,
you can rebuild the drive by recreating the data that was stored on the
drive before it failed.
Table 4.51
Rebuild a Drive
Convention
MegaCli –PDRbld –Start |-Stop|-ShowProg |-ProgDsply –PhysDrv
[E0:S0,E1:S1....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Manages a drive rebuild or displays the rebuild progress on a single controller,
multiple controllers, or all controllers. Note that the drive must meet the capacity
requirements before it can be rebuilt, and it must be part of a drive group:
-Start: Starts a rebuild on the selected drive(s) and displays the rebuild progress
(optional).
-Stop: Stops an ongoing rebuild on the selected drive(s).
-ShowProg: Displays the current progress percentage and time remaining for the
rebuild. This option is useful for running the application through scripts.
-ProgDsply: Displays the ongoing rebuild progress. This routine displays the
rebuild progress until at least one initialization is completed or a key is pressed.
4-30
MegaRAID Command Tool
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
4.11.8
Locate the Drive(s) and Activate LED
Use the command in Table 4.52 to locate the drive(s) for the selected
controller(s) and activate the drive activity LED.
Table 4.52
Locate Drive and Activate LED
Convention
MegaCli –PDLocate –PhysDrv[E0:S0,E1:S1....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Locates the drive(s) for the selected controller(s) and activates the drive activity LED.
4.11.9
Mark the Configured Drive as Missing
Use the command in Table 4.53 to mark the configured drive as missing
for the selected controller(s).
Table 4.53
Mark Configured Drive as Missing
Convention
MegaCli –PDMarkMissing –PhysDrv[E0:S0,E1:S1....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Marks the configured drive as missing for the selected controller(s).
4.11.10 Display the Drives in Missing Status
Use the command in Table 4.53 to mark the configured drive as missing
for the selected controller(s)
.
Table 4.54
Display Drives in Missing Status
Convention
MegaCli –PDGetMissing -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays the drive(s) in missing status. The format is:
No
Row
Column SizeExpected(MB)
0
x
y
zzzzzzzzz
…
Where x is the index to the drive groups, y is the index to the drive in that drive group,
and zzzzzz is the minimum capacity of the drive that can be used as a replacement.
4.11.11 Replace the Configured Drives and Start an Automatic Rebuild
Use the command in Table 4.55 to replace configured drive(s) and start
an automatic rebuild of the drive for the selected controller(s).
Table 4.55
Convention
Replace Configured Drive(s) and Start Automatic Rebuild
MegaCli –PDReplaceMissing –PhysDrv[E0:S0,E1:S1....] -ArrayX -RowY -aN
Drive-Related Options
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
4-31
Table 4.55
Description
Replace Configured Drive(s) and Start Automatic Rebuild (Cont.)
Replaces the configured drives that are identified as missing and then starts an
automatic rebuild.
4.11.12 Prepare the Unconfigured Drive for Removal
Use the command in Table 4.56 to prepare the unconfigured drive(s) for
removal from the selected controller(s).
Table 4.56
Prepare Unconfigured Drive(s) for Removal
Convention
MegaCli –PDPrpRmv [-Undo] – PhysDrv[E0:S0,E1:S1....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Prepares unconfigured drive(s) for removal. The firmware will spin down this drive.
The drive state is set to unaffiliated, which marks it as offline even though it is not a
part of configuration.
The -Undo option undoes this operation. If you select undo, the firmware marks this
drive as unconfigured good.
4.11.13 Display Total Number of Drives
Use the command in Table 4.57 to display the total number of drives
attached to an controller. Drives can be attached directly or through
enclosures.
Table 4.57
Display Number of Drives Attached to an Controller
Convention
MegaCli –PDGetNum –aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays the total number of drives attached to an controller. Drives can be attached
directly or through enclosures. The return value is the number of drives.
4.11.14 Display List of Physical Devices
Use the command in Table 4.58 to display a list of the physical devices
connected to the selected controller(s).
Table 4.58
Display List of Physical Devices Attached to Controller(s)
Convention
MegaCli –PDList –aN|-a0,1..|-aAll
Description
Displays information about all drives and other devices connected to the selected
controller(s). This includes information such as the drive type, capacity (if a drive),
serial number, and firmware version of the device. For SAS devices, this includes
additional information such as the SAS address of the device. For SAS expanders,
this includes additional information such as the number of drives connected to the
expander.
4-32
MegaRAID Command Tool
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
4.11.15 Download Firmware to the Physical Devices
Use the command in Table 4.58 to download firmware to the physical
devices connected to the selected controller(s).
Table 4.59
Download Firmware to the Physical Devices
Convention
MegaCli –PdFwDownload – -PhysDrv[E0:S0,E1:S1....] –-f <filename> –aN|
-a0,1,2|-aAll
Description
Flashes the firmware with the file specified at the command line. Firmware files used
to flash the physical drive can be of any format. The CLI utility assumes that you
provide a valid firmware image and flashes the same. The physical device has to do
error checking. Firmware files in .dlp format can be flashed with the DOS version of
the command tool only.
4.12 Enclosure-Related Options
The commands in this section are used for enclosures.
Use the command in Table 4.60 to display enclosure information for
selected controller(s).
Table 4.60
Display Enclosure Information
Convention
MegaCli –EncInfo -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays information about the enclosure for the selected controller(s).
4.13 Flashing the Firmware
The options in this section describe the functionality of the existing flash
application. The firmware flash options do not require input from the user.
4.13.1
Flash the Firmware with the ROM File
Use the command in Table 4.61 to flash the firmware with the ROM file
specified at the command line for the selected controller(s).
Table 4.61
Convention
Flash Firmware with ROM File
MegaCli –AdpFwFlash –f filename [-NoSigChk] [-NoVerChk]-aN|
-a0,1,2|-aALL
Enclosure-Related Options
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
4-33
Table 4.61
Flash Firmware with ROM File (Cont.)
Description
4.13.2
Flashes the firmware with the ROM file specified at the command line.
The –NoSigChk option forces the application to flash the firmware even if the check
word on the file does not match the required check word for the controller. This option
flashes the firmware only if the existing firmware version on the controller is lower
than the version on the ROM image.
If you specify –NoVerChk, also, the application flashes the controller firmware
without checking the version of the firmware image. The version check applies only
to the firmware (APP.ROM) version.
This command also supports the “Mode 0” flash functionality. For Mode 0 flash, the
controller number is not valid. There are two possible methods:
• Select which controller to flash after the controllers are detected.
• Flash the firmware on all present controllers.
XML output data is generated by this option.
Flash the Firmware in Mode 0 with the ROM File
Use the command in Table 4.62 to flash the firmware in Mode 0 with the
ROM file specified at the command line for the selected controller(s).
This option is for DOS only.
Table 4.62
Convention
Description
Flash Firmware in Mode 0 with ROM File
MegaCli –AdpM0Flash –f filename
Flashes the firmware in Mode 0 with the ROM file listed on the command line.
This option supports the Mode 0 flash functionality. For Mode 0 flash, the controller
number is not valid. The method to handle this is to flash the firmware on all present
controllers which are compatible with the image.
4.14 SAS Topology
The commands in this section are used to display SAS topology.
Use the command in Table 4.63 to display the PHY connection
information for physical PHY M on the selected controller(s). Each PHY
can form one side of the physical link in a connection with a PHY on a
different device. The physical link contains four wires that form two
differential signal pairs. One differential pair transmits signals, and the
other differential pair receives signals. Both differential pairs operate
simultaneously and allow concurrent data transmission in both the
receive and the transmit directions. PHYs are contained within ports.
4-34
MegaRAID Command Tool
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
A port can contain a single PHY or can contain multiple PHYs. A narrow
port contains a single PHY, and a wide port contains multiple PHYs.
Table 4.63
Display PHY Connection Information
Convention
MegaCli –PHYInfo -phyM –aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Displays PHY connection information for physical PHY M on the controller(s).
4.15 Diagnostic-Related Options
The commands in this section are used to run diagnostic tests.
4.15.1
Start Controller Diagnostics
Use the command in Table 4.64 to start the controller diagnostic for a set
amount of time.
Table 4.64
Start Diagnostics Setting
Convention
MegaCli –AdpDiag [val] –aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Sets the amount of time for the controller diagnostic to run.
4.15.2
Start Battery Test
Use the command in Table 4.65 to start the battery test. This command
requires a system reboot.
Table 4.65
Start Battery Test
Convention
MegaCli –AdpBatTest –aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL
Description
Starts the battery test. This command requires that you turn off the power to the
system, and then turn on the power and reboot the system.
4.15.3
Start NVRAM Diagnostic
Use the command in Table 4.66 to start the controller NVRAM diagnostic
for a set amount of time. This option is for DOS only.
Diagnostic-Related Options
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
4-35
Table 4.66
Start NVRAM Diagnostic
Convention
MegaCli –AdpNVRAM {-Read|-Write -ffilename}|–Clear
[-StartOffset 0xXXXX] [-EndOffset 0xXXXX] aN
Description
Starts the NVRAM diagnostic.
-Read: Reads the content in NVRAM and writes the data to file filename.
-Write: Reads data from file filename and writes to NVRAM.
-Clear: Writes 0 to NVRAM at the specified range from start offset to end offset.
-StartOffset/-EndOffset: Specifies the start offset and/or end offset in NVRAM.
If you do not use the -StartOffset and -EndOffset options, the default
StartOffset is 0 and the default EndOffset is the end of actual NVRAM size.
4.16 Miscellaneous Options
The commands in this section are used to display various information.
4.16.1
Display the MegaCLI Version
Use the command in Table 4.67 to display the version number of the
MegaCLI utility.
Table 4.67
Display MegaCLI Version
Convention
MegaCli –v
Description
Displays the version number of the MegaCLI utility.
4.16.2
Display Help for MegaCLI
Use the command in Table 4.68 to display help information for the
MegaCLI utility.
Table 4.68
Display Help for MegaCLI
Convention
MegaCli –h|–Help|?
Description
Displays help for the MegaCLI utility.
4-36
MegaRAID Command Tool
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Chapter 5
MegaRAID Storage Manager
Overview and Installation
This chapter provides a brief overview of the MegaRAID Storage
Manager (MSM) software and explains how to install it on the supported
operating systems. This chapter has the following sections:
5.1
•
Section 5.1, “Overview”
•
Section 5.2, “Hardware and Software Requirements”
•
Section 5.3, “Installation”
•
Section 5.4, “MegaRAID Storage Manager Support and Installation
on VMWare”
•
Section 5.5, “Installing and Configuring a CIM Provider”
•
Section 5.6, “Installing and Configuring an SNMP Agent”
•
Section 5.7, “MegaRAID Storage Manager Support and Installation
on Solaris 10U5 and U6 (Both x86 and x64)”
Overview
MegaRAID Storage Manager software enables you to configure, monitor,
and maintain storage configurations on LSI® SAS controllers. The
MegaRAID Storage Manager graphical user interface (GUI) makes it
easy for you to create and manage storage configurations.
5.1.1
Creating Storage Configurations
MegaRAID Storage Manager software enables you to easily configure
the controllers, drives, and virtual drives on your workstation or server.
The Configuration Wizard greatly simplifies the process of creating drive
groups and virtual drives.
MegaRAID SAS Software User’s Guide
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
5-1
You can use the Configuration Wizard Auto Configuration mode to
automatically create the best possible configuration with the available
hardware. You can use the Guided Configuration mode, which asks you
a few brief questions about the configuration, and then creates it for you.
Or you can use the Manual Configuration mode, which gives you
complete control over all aspects of the storage configuration.
The Reconstruction Wizard enables you to increase the capacity of a
virtual drive and to change the RAID level of a drive group.
5.1.2
Monitoring Storage Devices
MegaRAID Storage Manager software displays the status of controllers,
virtual drives, and drives on the workstation or server that you are
monitoring. System errors and events are recorded in an event log file
and are displayed on the screen. Special device icons appear on the
screen to notify you of drive failures and other events that require
immediate attention.
5.1.3
Maintaining Storage Configurations
You can use MegaRAID Storage Manager software to perform system
maintenance tasks such as running patrol read operations, updating
firmware, and running consistency checks on drive groups that support
redundancy.
5.2
Hardware and Software Requirements
The hardware requirements for MegaRAID Storage Manager software
are as follows:
•
PC-compatible computer with an IA-32 (32-bit) Intel Architecture
processor or an EM64T (64-bit) processor and at least 128 Mbytes
of system memory (256 Mbytes recommended)
•
Drive with at least 50 Mbytes available free space
The supported operating systems for the MegaRAID Storage Manager
software are as follows:
•
5-2
Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Microsoft Windows Server 2008,
Microsoft Windows XP, and Microsoft Windows Vista
MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
•
Red Hat Linux 3.0, 4.0, and 5.0
•
Solaris 10 x86
•
SUSE Linux/SLES 9 and 10, with latest updates and service packs
•
VMWare ESX 3i
Refer to your server documentation and to the operating system
documentation for more information on hardware and operating system
requirements.
5.3
Installation
This section explains how to install (or reinstall) MegaRAID Storage
Manager software on your workstation or server for the supported
operating systems: Microsoft Windows, Red Hat Linux, and SUSE Linux.
5.3.1
Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager Software on Microsoft
Windows
Follow these steps if you need to install MegaRAID Storage Manager
software on a system running Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Microsoft
Windows XP, or Microsoft Windows Vista:
1. Insert the MegaRAID Storage Manager software installation CD in
the CD-ROM drive.
If necessary, find and double-click the setup.exe file to start the
installation program.
2. When the Welcome screen appears, click Next.
If MegaRAID Storage Manager software is already installed on this
system, then an upgraded installation occurs.
3. Read the screen text and select Modify, Repair, or Remove.
4. When the next screen appears, read and accept the user license,
and click Next.
The Customer Information screen appears, as shown in Figure 5.1.
Installation
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
5-3
Figure 5.1
Customer Information Screen
5. Enter your user name and organization name. In the bottom part of
the screen, select an installation option:
–
If you select All users, any user with administrative privileges
can use this version of MegaRAID Storage Manager software to
view or change storage configurations.
–
If you select Only for current user, the MegaRAID Storage
Manager shortcuts and associated icons will be available only to
the user with this user name.
6. Click Next to continue.
7. On the next screen, accept the default Destination Folder, or click
Change to select a different destination folder. Click Next to
continue.
The Setup Type screen appears, as shown in Figure 5.2.
5-4
MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figure 5.2
Setup Type Screen
8. Select one of the Setup options. The options are fully explained in
the screen text.
–
Normally, you would select Complete if you are installing
MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a server.
–
Select Custom Installation if you want to select individual
program components.
9. Click Next to continue.
If you selected Custom Installation as your setup option, the
second Setup Type screen appears, as shown in Figure 5.3.
If you select Complete as your setup option, the Installation Wizard
is ready to install MSM. To begin installation, click on Install on the
next screen that appears.
Installation
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
5-5
Figure 5.3
Setup Type Screen
10. Select one of the custom setup options. The options are fully
explained in the screen text.
–
Select Client if you are installing MegaRAID Storage Manager
software on a PC that will be used to view and configure servers
over a network. To begin installation, click on Install on the next
screen that appears.
In the Client mode of installation, MSM installs only client-related
components, such as MSM GUI, and monitor configurator.
Use this mode when you want to manage and monitor servers
remotely. When you install MSM in Client mode on a laptop or a
desktop, you can log in to a specific server by providing the IP
address.
5-6
–
Select Server to install only those components required for
remote server management. To begin installation, click on Install
on the next screen that appears.
–
Select StandAlone if you will use MegaRAID Storage Manager
software to create and manage storage configurations on a
standalone workstation. To begin installation, click on Install on
the next screen that appears.
–
Select Custom if you want to specify individual program features
to install.
MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
If you select Custom, a window listing the installation features
appears, as shown in Figure 5.4. Select the features you want on
this screen.
Figure 5.4
Custom Setup Screen
11. Click Next to proceed.
12. Click Install to install the program.
13. When the final Configuration Wizard screen appears, click Finish.
If you select Client installation for a PC used to monitor servers, and if
there are no available servers with a registered framework on the local
subnet (that is, servers with a complete installation of MegaRAID Storage
Manager software), the server screen will appear, as shown in
Figure 5.5. The server screen will not list any servers. You can use this
screen to manage systems remotely.
Installation
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
5-7
Figure 5.5
5.3.2
Server Screen
Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager Software for Linux
Follow these steps if you need to install MegaRAID Storage Manager
software on a system running Red Hat Linux or SUSE Linux:
1. Copy the MSM_linux_installer...tar.gz file to a temporary
folder.
2. Untar the MSM_linux_installer...tar.gz file using the
following command:
tar -zxvf MSM_linux_installer...tar.gz
A new disk directory is created.
3. Go to the new disk directory.
4. In the disk directory, find and read the readme.txt file.
5. To start the installation, enter the following command:
csh install.sh -a
If you select Client installation for a PC used to monitor servers, and if
there are no available servers with a registered framework on the local
subnet (that is, servers with a complete installation of MegaRAID Storage
Manager software), the server screen appears. The server screen does
5-8
MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
not list any servers. You can use this screen to manage systems
remotely.
5.3.3
Linux Error Messages
The following messages may appear while you are installing MegaRAID
Storage Manager software on a Linux system:
•
More than one copy of MegaRAID Storage Manager software has
been installed.
This message indicates that the user has installed more than one
copy of MegaRAID Storage Manager software. (This can be done by
using the rpm-force command to install the rpm file directly, which
is not recommended, instead of using the install.sh file.) In such
cases, the user must uninstall all of the rpm files manually before
installing MegaRAID Storage Manager software with the procedure
listed previously.
•
The version is already installed.
This message indicates that the version of MegaRAID Storage
Manager software you are trying to install is already installed on the
system.
•
The installed version is newer.
This message indicates that a version of MegaRAID Storage
Manager software is already installed on the system, and it is a
newer version than the version you are trying to install.
•
Exiting installation.
This is the message that appears when the installation is complete.
•
RPM installation failed.
This message indicates that the installation failed for some reason.
Additional message text explains the cause of the failure.
Installation
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
5-9
5.4
MegaRAID Storage Manager Support and Installation on
VMWare
This section documents the installation of MegaRAID Storage Manager
on VMWare Classic (with console operating system) and on the VMWare
ESX 3i operating system.
5.4.1
Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager for VMWare Classic
VMWare does not support any graphics components. In order to install
the server component of MSM (MSM without popup and client), run the
script file ServerInstall.sh and choose setup type “4”. For the noninteractive (silent) mode, run ./ServerInstall.sh -x.
In order to manage MSM on a VMWare system, install MSM Client from
a remote system.
5.4.2
Uninstalling MegaRAID Storage Manager for VMWare
To uninstall the Server Component of MSM on VMWare, use the
Uninstall command in the Program menu or run the script
/usr/local/MegaRAID Storage Manager/uninstaller.sh.
Note the following points:
1. A MSM upgrade is supported in this release. This release can be
upgraded by future releases.
2. To shut down the MSM Framework service, run the following
command:
/etc/init.d/vivaldiframeworkd stop
It is recommended that you stop the Monitor service before you stop
the MSM Framework service. To stop the Monitor service run the
following command:
/etc/init.d/mrmonitor stop
5-10
MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
5.4.3
MegaRAID Storage Manager Support on the VMWare ESX
Operating System
This section outlines the product requirements needed to support the
VMWare ESX operating system. Classic VMWare includes a Service
Console that is derived from the Linux 2.4 kernel, but with reduced
functionality.
VMWare ESX 3i does not include a Service Console. Management is
possible only through a Common Information Model (CIM) provider. It is
not possible to install anything on the VMWare ESX3i system, so
management is performed through MSM installed on a remote machine
(Linux/Windows). See Section 5.4.3.4, “VMWare ESX 3i Management
through CIM and CMPI” for more information.
The Linux installer of MSM works under console with minimal changes.
Hardware RAID is currently supported in ESX 3.x.
Note:
5.4.3.1
There is a known limitation that virtual drives that are
created or deleted will not be reflected to the kernel.
The workaround is to reboot the server or to run
esxcfg-rescan <vmhba#> from COS shell.
Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager on a VMWare ESX 3.x Server
Perform the following steps to install MegaRAID Storage Manager on a
VMWare ESX 3.x Server:
1. Use Windows Client to download 2.90-01_Linux_MSM.zip to a flash
drive (USB key).
2. Remove the USB key and insert it in an ESX Server.
3. From the ESX server, at root console, type the following command
to identify the USB device:
fdisk –l
4. Type the following command:
mount /dev/{name of your USB device} /mnt
5. Type the following command:
cd /mnt
MegaRAID Storage Manager Support and Installation on VMWare
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
5-11
6. Type the following command to copy Linux.MSM.zip to the opt
folder:
cp 2.90-01_Linux_MSM.zip /opt
7. At /opt, uncompress 2.90-01_Linux_MSM.zip to subdir
/opt/MSM/disks by using the following steps:
a. Type the following command to access the /opt directory:
cd /opt
b.
Type the following command:
unzip 2.90-01_Linux_MSM.zip
c.
Type the following command:
gunzip /MSM/MSM_linux_installer-2.90-01.tar.gz
d. Type the following command:
cd /MSM.
e. Type the following command:
tar –vxf MSM_linux_installer-2.90-01.tar
f.
Type the following command:
cd /disk
g. Type the following command:
./ServerInstall –x
x represents the option install server only.
h. Type the following command to flush the cache:
sync; sync
i.
Type the following command to reboot the ESX server for the
changes to take effect:
init 6
5.4.3.2
Setting Permissions for User Login
Before you use the Windows operating system on the remote ESX
server, you need to set permissions for user login. Perform the following
steps to set permissions.
1. At the ESX root console, type the following command:
5-12
MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
chkconfig firewall off
2. Type the following command to stop the firewall service:
service firewall stop
3. Type the following command to open the configuration file:
vi /etc/ssh/sshd_config
4. Search for the line PermitRootLogin and change the setting from no
to yes.
5. Save the file sshd_config and type the following command to exit:
wq!
6. Type the following command to restart the sshd service for the
change in the configuration file to take effect:
service sshd restart
7. Type the following command to restart the portmap service (to
provide an IP port):
service portmap restart
5.4.3.3
Logging into the ESX Server
Perform the following steps to use MSM from Windows to log in to the
ESX server.
1. At the Window XP Client, open MSM.
The MSM access screen appears.
2. Select or enter the ESX server IP address.
The login dialog box appears.
3. Enter your username.
4. Enter your password.
5. Select Full access in the Login Mode field.
6. Click Login and then click Connect.
5.4.3.4
VMWare ESX 3i Management through CIM and CMPI
Management of VMWare ESX 3i is possible only through a Common
Information Model (CIM) provider. It is not possible to install anything on
MegaRAID Storage Manager Support and Installation on VMWare
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
5-13
the VMWare ESX3i system, so management is performed through MSM
installed on a remote machine (Linux/Windows).
VMWare ESX 3i comes with the Small Footprint CIM Broker (CFCB) CIM
Object Manager (or CIMOM). A CIMOM manages communication
between providers, which interact with the hardware, and a CIM client,
where the administrator manages the system.
SFCB supports Common Manageablity Programming Interface (CMPI)style providers. CMPI defines a common standard used to interface
Manageability Instrumentation (providers, instrumentation) to
Management Brokers (CIM Object Manager). CMPI standardizes
Manageability Instrumentation, which allows you to write and build
instrumentation once and run it in different CIM environments (on one
platform).
5.4.3.5
Differences in MSM for VMware ESXi
The following are some of the differences in the MSM utility when you
manage a VMWare server.
1. The following limitations apply to the system information exposed
through the application:
–
Only the IP address and the Host name display.
–
The operating system type and the operating system architecture
do not be display.
–
There is no support for the controller health information.
The following are the MSM screens affected:
–
Initial MSM framework (hosts) discovery screen: No health
information or operating system type display.
–
Server property page: Only the IP address and the Host name
display; the operating system type and operating system
architecture do not display.
2. Authentication support:
5-14
–
MSM allows CIMOM server authentication with the user ID and
the password for VMware.
–
Access control is not supported. There is no support for full view
or view only access modes. It is always full view access, and
MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
multiple clients can have full view access at the same time on
the same server.
3. Event Logging:
Full functionality support is available for the VMware ESXi operating
system, but it works differently than the normal MSM framework
mode. The event logging feature for MSM Client connected to a
VMware ESXi system behaves as follows:
–
There is no support for retrieving initial logs (the events that
occurred before a client logs in). Only those events that occur
after a client logs in appear in the event logger dialog.
–
System log do not display.
–
The “Save log” feature is not supported; however, the “Save Log
as Text” is still supported.
–
The “View Log” option allows you to view the logs saved in a text
file on the event logger dialog.
–
The event descriptions might not be identical to a normal MSM
Client because the descriptions come from the firmware through
the provider.
–
There is no filtering of events, unlike Monitor Service.
–
Refreshing of the MSM GUI after any updates on the firmware
is slower for a client connected to VMWare ESXi hosts,
compared to one connected to Windows/Linux/Solaris hosts.
4. Remote discovery and heartbeat mechanism:
–
For networks that do not have DNS configured, the “hosts” file in
the machine on which MSM is installed must be edited as
follows:
–
Add an entry to map the VMWare host’s IP address with
the hostname. This is for the discovery to happen
correctly. In the absence of this entry, the VMWare host
would be discovered as 0.0.0.0.
–
Add an entry to map its own IP address (not the loop
back address) with the Hostname. This is to ensure that
the Alert Event Notifications (AENs) are delivered
correctly.
MegaRAID Storage Manager Support and Installation on VMWare
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
5-15
–
For networks that has DNS configured, the “hosts” file in the
machine on which MSM is installed must be edited as follows:
–
When you do the initial configurations for the VMWare
host, provide the correct DNS server IP address.
–
In the hosts file of the machine on which MSM is
installed, add an entry to map its own IP address (not
the loop back address) with the Hostname. This is to
ensure that the Asynchronous Event Notifications
(AENs) are delivered correctly.
5. The VMWare hosts are discovered only when the Framework service
starts on the host where MSM is installed.
6. It takes a while to discover the CIMOM servers. If you start the MSM
client immediately after you install MSM (or restart Framework
service), you will not be able to discover any hosts in the network.
7. The VMWare ESX3i does not support the heartbeat mechanism to
let MSM know whether VMWare ESX3i is still connected. When the
connection to the remote VMWare ESX3i is lost, MSM does not
indicate this. The only option is to rediscover by restarting the MSM
framework.
8. This is supported only on a full installation of MSM; standalone,
client-only, and server-only modes do not support VMWare ESX3i
management.
9. Supported on following guest operating systems:
–
Windows Server 2003 and Windows Server 2008
–
Linux RHEL 4 and 5
10. The following describes the status of components related to VMWare
ESX3i:
5-16
–
MSM client GUI is supported.
–
There is no support for Monitor Configurator; you cannot
configure the severity of the AENs.
–
There is no pop-up service support.
–
There is no email and system log support.
–
Monitor service support is not available.
MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
11. For Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5, you must create the following
symbolic links:
Note:
This step is not required for MSM version 2.90-02 or later.
–
cd /usr/lib on RHEL 5
–
Search for libcrypto, libssl and libsysfs libraries as follows:
ls -lrt libcrypto*, ls -lrt libssl*, ls -lrt libsysfs*
–
If the files libcrypto.so.4, libssl.so.4, and libsysfs.so.1
are missing, manually create sym links as follows:
ln -s libcrypto.so libcrypto.so.4
ln -s libssl.so libssl.so.4
ln -s libsysfs.so libsysfs.so.1
Note:
If the ‘.so’ files are not present in the /usr/lib directory,
create a link with the existing version of the library.
For example, if libcrypto.so.6 is present and
libcrypto.so is not, create the link as follows:
ln -s libcrypto.so.6 libcrypto.so.4
Note:
5.4.3.6
On a 64-bit operating system, the system libraries will be
present in /usr/lib64 directory by default. However, for
supporting CIM Plugin, make sure that the libraries are also
present in /usr/lib by installing the appropriate RPMs.
Running MSM on VMWare ESX 3.5i U2
If you are using VMWare ESX 3.5i U2, perform the following steps to
make MSM work.
1. Open the maintenance console/shell in ESX3.
a. Press ALT+F1.
A shell without any prompt appears.
b.
Type unsupported (all lowercase) and press ENTER.
Typed text is not prompted back.
c.
Enter your password when prompted.
MegaRAID Storage Manager Support and Installation on VMWare
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
5-17
There is no password by default for the shell. If you have set any
password from the “yellow” screen (DCUI), then use that
password.
You are prompted (#) next.
2. Enable ssh for remote copy.
a. Type the following command.
vi /etc/inetd.conf
b.
Search for ssh in the file.
By default, the line that contains ssh has comments.
c.
Remove the comment by deleting the symbol # in front of the
line.
d. Save the file and exit.
3. Restart the inetd daemon for the changes to take effect.
a. Type the following command to get the pid for inetd:
ps | grep inetd
b.
Type the following command to kill the inetd process:
Kill -9 <inetd pid>
c.
Type the following command to restart the inetd daemon:
#inetd
4. Type the following command to use scp to copy storelib from a
remote machine to the following path.
/lib dir scp <[email protected]:path to
storelib>/libstorelib.so.2.53 /lib/libstorelib.so
5. Restart SFCB and check its status.
a. Type the following command to restart SFCB.
/etc/init.d/sfcbd restart
b.
Type the following command to check the status of SFCB.
/etc/init.d/sfcbd status
Note:
5-18
The updated Storelib library in the /lib directory does not
persist across reboots. Each time you restart the VMWare
MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
host, you have to follow this procedure to replace the
Storelib library.
5.5
Installing and Configuring a CIM Provider
This section describes the installation and configuration of the LSI
MegaRAID Common Information Model (CIM) provider. The Common
Information Model offers common definitions of management information
for networks, applications, and services, and allows you to exchange
management information across systems throughout a network.
On a VMWare ESX3i system, management is possible only through a
CIM provider and it is performed through MSM installed on a remote
machine running a Linux or Windows operating system.
VMWare ESX3i comes with the Small Footprint CIM Broker (SFCB) CIM
Object Manager (or CIMOM). A CIMOM manages communication
between providers, which interact with the hardware, and a CIM client,
where the administrator manages the system.
SFCB supports Common Manageablity Programming Interface (CMPI)style providers. CMPI defines a common standard used to interface
Manageability Instrumentation (providers, instrumentation) to
Management Brokers (CIM Object Manager). CMPI standardizes
Manageability Instrumentation, which allows you to write and build
instrumentation once and run it in different CIM environments (on one
platform).
5.5.1
Installing a CIM SAS Storage Provider on Linux
The following procedure documents how to install and un-install the LSI
CIM SAS Storage Provider on a system running on the Linux operating
system.
Note:
Uninstall all the previous versions of LsiSASProvider before
you install this version. You can check all of the installed
versions of LsiSASProvider by using the command
rpm -qa | grep LsiSASProvider.
Perform the following step to install a CIM SAS Storage Provider on a
Linux system.
Installing and Configuring a CIM Provider
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
5-19
1. Install the SAS Provider using the Red Hat Package Manager (RPM)
by entering the following command:
rpm -ivh
The RPM installs all of the neccessary files and the Managed Object
Format (MOF), and it registers the libraries. The Provider is now
ready to use.
Note:
After you install LSI CIM SAS Provider, the MOF file
LSI_SASRaid.mof is available under the
/etc/lsi_cimprov/sas/pegasus/common directory.
Perform the following step to un- install a CIM SAS Storage Provider on
a Linux system.
1. Remove LSI CIM SAS Provider by entering the command:
rpm –ivh LsiSASProvider-<version>.<arch>.rpm"
This removes all of the necessary files, uninstalls the MOF, and
unregisters the libraries. The SAS Provider is no longer on the
system.
Note:
tog-pegasus binaries, such as cimmof, cimprovider, and
wbemexec, should be in PATH variable of /etc/profile,
and hence, should be defined in all environments of the
system.
For Pegasus version 2.5.x, perform the following steps:
1. After you install the LSI SAS Pegasus provider, verify that
libLsiSASProvider.so and libLsiSASProvider.so.1 are in
/usr/lib/Pegasus/providers directory.
If these files are not present, copy libLsiSASProvider.so.1 from
/opt/tog-pegasus/providers/lib to
/usr/lib/Pegasus/providers and create a symbolic link
libLsiSASProvider.so to
/usr/lib/Pegasus/providers/libLsiSASProvider.so.1 at
/usr/bin/Pegasus/providers.
2. Restart Pegasus CIM Server and LsiServer by performing the
following steps:
5-20
MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
a. To start the tog-pegasus server, execute the following command:
# /etc/init.d/tog-pegasus restart
b.
To start LsiSASSever, execute the following command:
# /etc/init.d/LsiSASd restart
5.5.2
Installing a CIM SAS Storage Provider on Windows
The following procedure describes how to install and un-install the LSI
CIM SAS Storage Provider on a system running on a Windows operating
system.
Perform the following steps to install a CIM SAS Storage Provider on a
Windows system.
1. Go To DISK1.
2. Run setup.exe.
The installer installs all of the necessary files and the MOF, and
registers the COM dll. The Provider is now ready to use.
Perform the following steps to uninstall a CIM SAS Storage Provider on
a Windows system.
1. Go to Control Panel > Add/Remove Program.
2. Remove the LSI WMI SAS Provider Package.
This step removes all of the necessary files, uninstalls the MOF, and
unregisters the COM dll. The SAS Provider is no longer on the
system.
5.6
Installing and Configuring an SNMP Agent
A Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)-based management
application can monitor and manage devices through SNMP extension
agents. The MegaRAID SNMP subagent reports the information about
the RAID controller, virtual drives, physical devices, enclosures, and
other items per SNMP request. The SNMP application monitors these
devices for issues that might require administrative attention.
Installing and Configuring an SNMP Agent
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
5-21
This section describes the installation and configuration of the LSI
MegaRAID SNMP agent on Linux, Solaris, and Windows operating
systems.
5.6.1
Installing and Configuring an SNMP Agent on Linux
This section explains how to install and configure SAS SNMP Agent for
the SUSE Linux and Red Hat Linux operating systems.
To do this, perform the following steps.
Note:
This procedure requires that you have Net-SNMP agent
installed on the Linux machine.
Note:
The RPM has not been created to support -U version.
The RPM -U will probably fail with this RPM.
1. Install LSI SAS SNMP Agent using rpm -ivh <sas rpm>
Note:
After installation, find the SAS MIB file LSIAdapterSAS.mib under the /etc/lsi_mrdsnmp/sas
directory.
RPM makes the necessary modification needed in the snmpd.conf
file to run the agent.
Note:
Before installation, check whether there is any pass
command that starts with 1.3.6.1.4.1.3582 OID in
snmpd.conf. If so, delete all of the old pass commands that
start with 1.3.6.1.4.1.3582 OID. (This situation could occur
if an earlier version of LSI SNMP Agent was installed in the
system.)
The snmpd.conf file structure should be the same as
lsi_mrdsnmpd.conf. For reference, a sample conf file
(lsi_mrdsnmpd.conf) is in the /etc/lsi_mrdsnmp directory.
2. To run an SNMP query from a remote machine, add the IP address
of that machine in the snmpd.conf file, as in this example:
com2sec
snmpclient
172.28.136.112
public
Here, the IP address of the remote machine is 172.28.136.112.
3. To receive an SNMP trap to a particular machine, add the IP address
of that machine in the com2sec section of the snmpd.conf file.
5-22
MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
For example, to get a trap in 10.0.0.144, add the following to
snmpd.conf.
#
sec.name
com2sec snmpclient
source
community
10.0.0.144
public
4. To run/stop the snmpd daemon, enter the following command:
/etc/init.d/snmpd start/stop
5. To start/stop the SAS SNMP Agent daemon before issuing a SNMP
query, enter the following command:
/etc/init.d/lsi_mrdsnmpd start/stop
You can check the status of the SAS SNMP Agent daemon by
checked by issuing the following command:
/etc/init.d/lsi_mrdsnmpd status
6. Issue an SNMP query in this format:
snmpwalk -v1 -c public localhost .1.3.6.1.4.1.3582
7. You can get the SNMP trap from local machine by issuing the
following command:
snmptrapd -P -F "%02.2h:%02.2j TRAP%w.%q from %A %v\n"
Note:
To receive a trap in a local machine with Net-SNMP version
5.3, you must modify the snmptrapd.conf file (generally
located at /var/net-snmp/snmptrapd.conf). Add
"disableAuthorization yes" in snmptrapd.conf and
then execute "sudo snmptrapd -P -F "%02.2h:%02.2j
TRAP%w.%q from %A %v\n".
Note:
It is assumed that snmpd.conf is located at /etc/snmp for
Red Hat and /etc for SLES. You can change the file
location from /etc/init.d/lsi_mrdsnmpd file.
You can install SNMP without the trap functionality. To do so, set the
"TRAPIND" environment variable to "N" before running RPM.
Before you install a new version, you must uninstall all previous versions.
For SLES 10, perform the following steps to run SNMP:
1. Copy /etc/snmp/snmpd.conf to /etc/snmpd.conf.
Installing and Configuring an SNMP Agent
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
5-23
2. Modify the /etc/init.d/snmpd file and change
SNMPDCONF=/etc/snmp/snmpd.conf entry to
SNMPDCONF=/etc/snmpd.conf.
3. Run LSI SNMP rpm.
5.6.2
Installing and Configuring an SNMP Agent on Solaris
This section explains how to install and configure SAS SNMP Agent for
the Solaris operating system. To install and configure SNMP for Solaris,
perform the procedures described in the following sections:
5.6.2.1
–
Section 5.6.2.1, “Prerequisites”
–
Section 5.6.2.2, “Installation SNMP on Solaris”
–
Section 5.6.2.3, “LSI SAS SNMP MIB Location”
–
Section 5.6.2.4, “Starting, Stopping, and Checking the Status of
the LSI SAS SNMP Agent”
–
Section 5.6.2.5, “Configuring snmpd.conf”
–
Section 5.6.2.6, “Configuring SNMP Traps”
–
Section 5.6.2.7, “Uninstallin the SNMP Package”
Prerequisites
This package requires that you have Solaris System Management Agent
installed on the Solaris machine.
5.6.2.2
Installation SNMP on Solaris
To install SNMP for Solaris, perform the following procedure:
Step 1.
Unzip the LSI SAS SNMP Agent package.
Step 2.
Run the install script by executing the following command:
# ./install.sh
Note:
5-24
The installation will exit if there are any existing versions of
storelib and sassnmp installed on the Solaris machine.
MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Uninstall the existing version by using the following
commands:
# pkgrm storelib (to uninstall storelib library)
# pkgrm sassnmp (to uninstall LSI SAS SNMP Agent)
5.6.2.3
LSI SAS SNMP MIB Location
After you install the LSI SAS SNMP Agent package, the MIB file
LSI-AdapterSAS.mib is installed under /etc/lsi_mrdsnmp/sas
directory.
5.6.2.4
Starting, Stopping, and Checking the Status of the LSI SAS SNMP Agent
The following commands are used to start, stop, restart, and check the
status of the Solaris System Managment Agent (net snmpd) daemon:
–
Start: # svcadm enable
svc:/application/management/sma:default
–
Stop: # svcadm disable
svc:/application/management/sma:default
–
Restart: # svcadm restart
svc:/application/management/sma:default
–
Status: # svcs svc:/application/management/sma:default
Note:
Online indicates that the SMA is started. Disabled
indicates that the SMA is stopped.
The following commands are used to start, stop, restart, and check the
status of the SAS SNMP Agent daemon:
–
Start: #/etc/init.d/lsi_mrdsnmpd start
–
Stop: #/etc/init.d/lsi_mrdsnmpd stop
–
Restart: #/etc/init.d/lsi_mrdsnmpd restart
–
Status: #/etc/init.d/lsi_mrdsnmpd status
Installing and Configuring an SNMP Agent
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
5-25
5.6.2.5
Configuring snmpd.conf
By default, SNMP queries (walk, get) can be executed from any remote
machine without any changes to the snmpd.conf file. To quickly add a
new community and client access, perform the following steps:
1. Stop the SMA service by executing the following command:
# svcadm disable svc:/application/management/sma:default
2. Add read-only and read-write community names.
a. Add a read-only community name and client/hostname/ipaddress
under "SECTION: Access Control Setup" in the
/etc/sma/snmp/snmpd.conf file, as shown in the following
excerpt:
5-26
–
#################################################
–
# SECTION: Access Control Setup
–
#This section defines who is allowed to talk to your
# running SNMP Agent.
–
# rocommunity: a SNMPv1/SNMPv2c read-only access
–
# community name
–
# arguments:
–
# [default|hostname|network/bits] [oid]
–
# rocommunity snmpclient 172.28.157.149
–
#################################################
b.
Add a readwrite community name and client/hostname/ipaddress
under "SECTION: Access Control Setup" in
/etc/sma/snmp/snmpd.conf file, as shown in the following
excerpt:
–
#################################################
–
# SECTION: Access Control Setup
–
# This section defines who is allowed to talk to your
# running
–
# snmp agent.
–
# rocommunity: a SNMPv1/SNMPv2c read-only access
–
# community name
community
MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
–
# arguments:
community
–
# [default|hostname|network/bits] [oid]
–
# rwcommunity snmpclient 172.28.157.149
–
#################################################
3. Start the SMA service by using the following command:
# svcadm enable svc:/application/management/sma:default
Note:
5.6.2.6
Refer to the command man snmpd.conf for more
information about configuring the snmpd.conf file.
Configuring SNMP Traps
To receive SNMP traps, perform the following steps:
1. Stop the LSI SAS SNMP Agent by using the following command:
#/etc/init.d/lsi_mrdsnmpd stop
2. Edit the /etc/lsi_mrdsnmp/sas/sas_TrapDestination.conf file
and add the ipaddress as shown in the following excerpt:
–
#################################################
–
# Agent Service needs the IP addresses to sent trap
–
# The trap destination may be specified in this file
# or using snmpd.conf file. Following indicators can
# be set on "TrapDestInd" to instruct the agent to
–
# pick the IPs as the destination.
–
# 1 - IPs only from snmpd.conf
–
# 2 - IPs from this file only
–
# 3 - IPs from both the files
–
#################################################
–
TrapDestInd 2
–
#############Trap Destination IP##################
–
127.0.0.1
–
172.28.157.149 public
–
#################################################
public
Installing and Configuring an SNMP Agent
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
5-27
3. Start the LSI SAS SNMP Agent by entering the following command:
#/etc/init.d/lsi_mrdsnmpd start
5.6.2.7
Uninstallin the SNMP Package
The uninstall.sh script is located under the /etc/lsi_mrdsnmp/sas
directory. Use the following command to uninstall the package:
# cd /etc/lsi_mrdsnmp/sas
# ./uninstall.sh
5.6.3
Installing an SNMP Agent on Windows
This section explains how to install and configure SAS SNMP Agent for
the Windows operating system.
5.6.3.1
Installing SNMP Agent
Perform the following steps to install SNMP Agent:
1. Run setup.exe from DISK1.
2. Use SNMP Manager to retrieve the SAS data (it is assumed that you
have compiled LSI-AdapterSAS.mib file already).
The LSI-AdapterSAS.mib file is available under
%ProgramFiles%\LSI Corporation\SNMPAgent\SAS directory.
3. Use a trap utility to get the traps.
Note:
5.6.3.2
Before you install the Agent, make sure that SNMP Service
is already installed in the system.
Installing SNMP Service for Windows
If you do not have SNMP Service installed on your system, perform the
following steps to install SNMP Service for a Windows system:
1. Select Add/Remove Programs from Control Panel.
2. Select Add/Remove Windows Components in the left side of the
Add/Remove Programs window.
3. Select Management and Monitoring Tools.
5-28
MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
4. Click Next and follow any prompts to complete the installation
procedure.
5.6.3.3
Configuring SNMP Service on the Server Side
Perform the following steps to configure SNMP Service on the server
side.
1. Select Administrative Tools from Control Panel.
2. Select Services from the Administrative Tools window.
3. Select SNMP Service in the Services window.
4. Open SNMP Service.
5. Click the Security tab and make sure that Accept SNMP Packets
from any host is selected.
6. Click the Traps tab and select the list of host IPs to which you want
the traps to be sent with the community name.
5.7
MegaRAID Storage Manager Support and Installation on
Solaris 10U5 and U6 (Both x86 and x64)
This section documents the installation of MegaRAID Storage Manager
on the Solaris 10 operating system.
5.7.1
Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager Software for Solaris 10
Follow these steps to install MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a
system running Solaris 10, update 5:
1. Copy the MSM_linux_installer...tar.gz file to a temporary folder.
2. Untar the MSM_linux_installer...tar.gz file using the following
command:
tar -zxvf MSM_linux_installer...tar.gz
This step creates a new disk directory.
3. Go to the new disk directory, and find and read the readme.txt file.
4. Enter the Bash shell.
5. Execute the command ./install.sh present in the disk directory.
(Both x86 and x64)
MegaRAID Storage Manager Support and Installation on Solaris 10U5 and U6
5-29
6. When prompted by the installation scripts, select Y to complete the
installation.
5.7.2
Uninstalling MegaRAID Storage Manager Software for Solaris 10
Follow these steps to uninstall MegaRAID Storage Manager software on
a system running Solaris 10, update 5:
5-30
Step 1.
Execute the Uninstaller.sh file located in
/opt/MegaRaidStorageManager directory.
Step 2.
When prompted by the uninstallation scripts, select Y to
complete the installation.
Note:
To shut down MSM Framework service, run svcadm
disable -t MSMFramework. It is advisable to stop Monitor
service before stopping MSM Framework service. To stop
Monitor service, run svcadm disable -t MSMMonitor.
Note:
To start the Framework service, run svcadm enable
MSMFramework. To start the monitor service run svcadm
enable MSMMonitor.
Note:
To check the status of MSM services execute the command
svcs -a | grep -i msm.
MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Chapter 6
MegaRAID Storage Manager
Window and Menus
This chapter explains how to start MegaRAID Storage Manager software
and describes the MegaRAID Storage Manager window and menus.
This chapter has the following sections:
6.1
•
Section 6.1, “Starting MegaRAID Storage Manager Software”
•
Section 6.2, “MegaRAID Storage Manager Window”
Starting MegaRAID Storage Manager Software
Follow these steps to start MegaRAID Storage Manager software and
view the main window:
1. Start the program using the method required for your operating
system environment:
–
To start MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a Microsoft
Windows system, select Start->Programs->MegaRAID Storage
Manager->StartupUI, or double-click the MegaRAID Storage
Manager shortcut on the desktop.
Note:
If a warning appears stating that Windows Firewall has
blocked some features of the program, click Unblock to
allow MegaRAID Storage Manager software to start.
(The Windows Firewall sometimes blocks the operation of
programs that use Java.)
–
To start MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a Red Hat
Linux system, select Applications->System Tools->MegaRAID
Storage Manager StartupUI.
–
To start MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a SUSE
Linux/SLES system, select Start->System->More Programs
->MegaRAID Storage Manager.
MegaRAID SAS Software User’s Guide
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
6-1
2. When the program starts, the Select Server window appears, as
shown in Figure 6.1.
Figure 6.1
Select Server Window
If the circle in the server icon is yellow instead of green, it means
that the server is running in a degraded state—for example, because
a drive used in a virtual drive has failed. If the circle is red, the
storage configuration in the server has failed.
6-2
Note:
To access servers on a different subnet, type in the box at
the bottom of the screen the IP address of a server in the
desired subnet where the MegaRAID Storage Manager
software is running, and click Update. If you check the
Connect to remote server at: IP address box, you can
also access a standalone (remote) installation of
MegaRAID Storage Manager software, if it has a network
connection.
Note:
For the VMWare CIMOM, the server button does not
denote the health of the server. The button is always green
regardless of the health of the system.
Note:
The VMWare server does not show the system health and
the operating system labels. It shows only the Hostname
and the IP address of the server.
MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Note:
When connecting to a VMWare server on a different
subnet, one or more Frameworks have to be running in the
subnet in order to connect to the CIMOM.
3. Double-click the icon of the server that you want to access.
The Server Login window appears, as shown in Figure 6.2.
Figure 6.2
Server Login Window
4. Select an access mode from the drop-down menu.
–
Select Full Access if you need to both view the current
configuration and change the configuration.
–
Select View Only if you need to only view and monitor the
configuration.
Note:
When connected to VMWare system, the Server Login
screen shows only one label for access. "Full Access".
Multiple users can have full access to the VMWare server.
5. Enter your user name and password, and click Login.
Note:
If the computer is networked, this is the login to the
computer itself, not the network login.
You must enter the root/administrator user name and password to
use Full Access mode. If your user name and password are correct
for the Login mode you have chosen, the main MegaRAID Storage
Manager window appears.
Starting MegaRAID Storage Manager Software
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
6-3
6.2
MegaRAID Storage Manager Window
This section describes the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, which
is shown in Figure 6.3.
Figure 6.3
Main MegaRAID Storage Manager Window
The following topics describe the panels and menu options that appear
on this screen.
6-4
MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
6.2.1
Physical/Logical View Panel
The left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window displays either
the Physical view or the Logical view of the system and the devices in it,
depending on which tab is selected.
•
The Physical view shows the hierarchy of physical devices in the
system. At the top of the hierarchy is the system itself. One or more
controllers are installed in the system. The controller label identifies
the MegaRAID controller, such as the MegaRAID SAS 8708ELP
controller, so that you can easily differentiate between multiple
controllers. Each controller has one or more ports. Drives and other
devices are attached to the ports.
•
The Logical view shows the hierarchy of controllers, virtual drives,
and drive groups that are defined on the system. (Drives also appear
in the Logical view, so you can see which drives are used by each
virtual drive.)
The following icons in the left panel represent the controllers, drives, and
other devices:
•
System
•
Controller
•
Backplane
•
Enclosure
•
Port
•
Drive group
•
Virtual drive
•
Slot
•
Dedicated hot spare
•
Global hot spare
MegaRAID Storage Manager Window
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
6-5
•
Battery backup unit (BBU)
•
Tape drive
•
CD-ROM
Note:
MegaRAID Storage Manager shows the icons for tape drive
devices; however, no tape-related operations are supported
by the utility. If these operations are required, use a
separate backup application.
A red circle to the right of an icon indicates that the device has failed.
For example, this icon indicates that a drive has failed:
.
A yellow circle to the right of an icon indicates that a device is running
in a degraded state. For example, this icon indicates that a virtual drive
is running in a degraded state because a drive has failed:
6.2.2
.
Properties/Operations/Graphical View Panel
The right panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window has either
two tabs or three tabs, depending on which kind of device you select in
the left panel.
6-6
•
The Properties tab displays information about the selected device.
For example, if you select a controller icon in the left panel, the
Properties tab lists information about the controller, such as the
controller name, NVRAM size, and device port count. For more
information, see Section 8.3, “Monitoring Controllers,” Section 8.4,
“Monitoring Drives,” and Section 8.6, “Monitoring Virtual Drives.”
•
The Operations tab lists the operations that can be performed on the
device that you select in the left panel. For example, Figure 6.4
shows the options that are available when you select a controller.
These include enabling or silencing the alarm and running a Patrol
Read. Some types of devices, such as drive groups and ports, do
not have operations associated with them. For more information, see
Chapter 9, “Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations.”
MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figure 6.4
Operations Tab
•
The Graphical View tab can be selected in the right panel if a you
select a drive, virtual drive, or drive enclosure in the left panel.
In graphical view, the device’s storage capacity is color coded
according to the legend shown on the screen. For example, on a
drive configured space is blue, available space is white, and reserved
space is red, as shown in Figure 6.5. For more information, see
Section 8.4, “Monitoring Drives,” and Section 8.6, “Monitoring Virtual
Drives.”
MegaRAID Storage Manager Window
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
6-7
Figure 6.5
6.2.3
Graphical View Tab
Event Log Panel
The lower part of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window displays the
system event log entries, as shown in Figure 6.3. New event log entries
appear during the session. Each entry has an ID, an error level indicating
the severity of the event, the timestamp and date, and a brief description
of the event.
For more information about the event log, see Section 8.1, “Monitoring
System Events.” For more information about the event log entries, see
Appendix A, “Events and Messages.”
6-8
MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
6.2.4
Menu Bar
Here are brief descriptions of the main selections on the MegaRAID
Storage Manager menu bar. Specific menu options are described in
more detail in Chapters 7, 8, and 9 of this manual.
6.2.4.1
File Menu
The File menu has an Exit option for exiting from the MegaRAID Storage
Manager software. It also has a Rescan option for updating the display
in the MegaRAID Storage Manager window. (Rescan is seldom required;
the display normally updates automatically.)
6.2.4.2
Operations Menu
The Operations menu is available when a controller, drive, virtual drive,
or battery backup unit is selected in the MegaRAID Storage Manager
window. The Operations menu options vary depending on the type of
device selected in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager
window. For example, the Scan for Foreign Config option is available only
when a controller is selected. The options also vary depending on the
current state of the selected device. For example, if you select an offline
drive, the Make Drive Online option appears in the Operations menu.
You can view the Operations selections on the main window on the
Operations tab in the right panel. If an operation requires user inputs
before it can be executed, it appears in the Operations tab but not in the
Operations menu. A device-specific Operations menu pops up if you
right-click a device icon in the left panel.
Configuration options are also available. This is where you access the
Configuration Wizard and other configuration-related commands.
To access the other configuration commands, select the controller in the
left panel, and then select Operations-> Configuration.
6.2.4.3
Group Operations Menu
The Group Operations menu options include Check Consistency, Show
Progress, and Initialize.
MegaRAID Storage Manager Window
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
6-9
6.2.4.4
Tools Menu
On the Tools menu you can select Tools->Configure->Configure Alerts
to access the Event Configuration Notification screen, which you can use
to set the alert delivery rules, event severity levels, exceptions, and email
settings. For more information, see Section 8.2, “Configuring Alert
Notifications.”
6.2.4.5
Log Menu
The Log menu includes options for saving and clearing the message log.
For more information, see Appendix A, “Events and Messages.”
6.2.4.6
Help Menu
On the Help menu you can select Help->Help to view the MegaRAID
Storage Manager online help file. You can select Help->About to view
version information for the MegaRAID Storage Manager software.
6-10
Note:
When you use the MegaRAID Storage Manager online
help, you may see a warning message that Internet
Explorer has restricted the file from showing active content.
If this warning appears, click on the active content warning
bar and enable the active content.
Note:
If you are using the Linux operating system, you must
install Firefox® or Mozilla® for the MegaRAID Storage
Manager online help to display.
Note:
When connected to the VMWare server, only the IP
address and the hostname information display. The other
information, such as the operating system name, version,
and architecture do not display.
MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Chapter 7
Configuration
You use MegaRAID Storage Manager software to create and modify
storage configurations on LSI SAS controllers. These controllers support
RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 6, RAID 10, RAID 50, and RAID 60
storage configurations. To learn more about RAID and RAID levels, see
Chapter 2, “Introduction to RAID.”
The Reconstruction Wizard allows you to easily change RAID levels or
to expand or reduce the capacity of existing virtual drives.
Note:
You cannot create or modify a storage configuration unless
you are logged on to a server with administrator privileges.
This chapter explains how to use MegaRAID Storage Manager software
to perform the following configuration tasks:
•
Section 7.1, “Creating a New Storage Configuration”
•
Section 7.2, “Adding Hot Spare Drives”
•
Section 7.3, “Changing Adjustable Task Rates”
•
Section 7.4, “Changing Power Settings”
•
Section 7.5, “Changing Virtual Drive Properties”
•
Section 7.6, “Changing a Virtual Drive Configuration”
•
Section 7.7, “Deleting a Virtual Drive”
•
Section 7.8, “Saving a Storage Configuration to Drive”
•
Section 7.9, “Clearing a Storage Configuration from a Controller”
•
Section 7.10, “Adding a Saved Storage Configuration”
MegaRAID SAS Software User’s Guide
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
7-1
7.1
Creating a New Storage Configuration
You can use the MegaRAID Storage Manager Configuration Wizard to
create new storage configurations on systems with LSI SAS controllers.
To open the MegaRAID Storage Manager Configuration Wizard, select a
controller in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window
and then select Operations->Configuration->Configuration Wizard.
Figure 7.1 shows the first Configuration Wizard screen.
Figure 7.1
First Configuration Wizard Screen
The menu lists three configuration modes:
7-2
•
Auto Configuration automatically creates an optimal configuration
from the available drives.
•
Manual Configuration gives you the greatest level of control in
creating a new virtual drive.
Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
•
Guided Configuration asks you a few simple questions about what
kind of configuration you want and then automatically creates it from
the available drives.
Note:
To create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, or RAID 6
configuration, you can use Auto, Guided, or Manual mode.
To create a RAID 10, RAID 50, or RAID 60 configuration,
you must use the Manual Configuration mode.
The following subsections explain how to use the Configuration Wizard
to create storage configurations:
7.1.1
•
Section 7.1.1, “Understanding Virtual Drive Parameters”
•
Section 7.1.2, “Using Auto Configuration”
•
Section 7.1.3, “Using Guided Configuration”
•
Section 7.1.4, “Using Manual Configuration: RAID 0”
•
Section 7.1.5, “Using Manual Configuration: RAID 1”
•
Section 7.1.6, “Using Manual Configuration: RAID 5”
•
Section 7.1.7, “Using Manual Configuration: RAID 6”
•
Section 7.1.8, “Using Manual Configuration: RAID 10”
•
Section 7.1.9, “Using Manual Configuration: RAID 50”
•
Section 7.1.10, “Using Manual Configuration: RAID 60”
Understanding Virtual Drive Parameters
This section describes the Virtual Drive Parameters that you can set
when you use the Guided Configuration or Manual Configuration modes
of the Configuration Wizard. You should change these parameters only
if you have a specific reason for doing so. It is usually best to leave them
at their default settings.
•
Stripe Size: Stripe sizes of 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, and 1024
Kbytes are supported. For more information, see the striping
Glossary entry. The default is 64 Kbytes.
•
Read Policy: Specify the read policy for this virtual drive:
◊
Always read ahead: Read ahead capability allows the
controller to read sequentially ahead of requested data and
to store the additional data in cache memory, anticipating
Creating a New Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
7-3
that the data will be needed soon. This speeds up reads for
sequential data, but there is little improvement when
accessing random data.
•
◊
No read ahead: Disables the read ahead capability. This is
the default.
◊
Adaptive read ahead: When selected, the controller begins
using read ahead if the two most recent drive accesses
occurred in sequential sectors. If the read requests are
random, the controller reverts to No read ahead.
Write Policy: Specify the write policy for this virtual drive:
◊
Write back: In this mode the controller sends a data transfer
completion signal to the host when the controller cache has
received all of the data in a transaction. This is the default.
◊
Write through: In this mode the controller sends a data
transfer completion signal to the host when the drive
subsystem has received all of the data in a transaction.
Note:
•
The Write Policy depends on the status of the battery
backup unit (BBU). If the BBU is not present or is bad, then
the Write Policy will be Write through.
IO Policy: The IO policy applies to reads on a specific virtual drive.
It does not affect the read ahead cache.
◊
Cached IO: In this mode, all reads are buffered in cache
memory. This is the default.
◊
Direct IO: In this mode, reads are not buffered in cache
memory. Data is transferred to the cache and the host
concurrently. If the same data block is read again, it comes
from cache memory.
Cached IO provides faster processing, and Direct IO ensures
that the cache and the host contain the same data.
•
7-4
Access Policy: Select the type of data access that is allowed for this
virtual drive.
◊
Read/Write: Allow read/write access. This is the default.
◊
Read Only: Allow read-only access.
◊
Blocked: Do not allow access.
Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
•
•
7.1.2
Disk Cache Policy: Select a cache setting for this drive:
◊
Enable: Enable the disk cache.
◊
Disable: Disable the disk cache.
◊
Unchanged: Leave the current disk cache policy unchanged.
This is the default.
Init State: Specify the background initialization status:
◊
No Initialization: The new configuration is not initialized and
the existing data on the drives is not overwritten. This is the
default.
◊
Fast Initialization: The firmware quickly writes zeroes to the
first and last 8-Mbyte regions of the new virtual drive and
then completes the initialization in the background.
This allows you to start writing data to the virtual drive
immediately.
◊
Full Initialization: A complete initialization is done on the new
configuration. You cannot write data to the new virtual drive
until the initialization is complete. This may take a long time
if the drives are large.
Using Auto Configuration
Auto Configuration is the quickest and simplest way to create a new
storage configuration. When you select Auto Configuration mode on the
first Configuration Wizard screen, the Configuration Wizard creates the
best configuration possible using the available drives.
Figure 7.2 shows the Auto Configuration screen.
Creating a New Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
7-5
Figure 7.2
Auto Configuration Screen
Follow these steps to create a new storage configuration in Auto
Configuration mode:
1. Select an initialization option from the drop-down menu at the bottom
of the window:
–
No Initialization: The new configuration is not initialized, and the
existing data on the drives is not overwritten.
–
Fast Initialization: MegaRAID Storage Manager software
quickly writes zeroes to the first and last 10 Mbyte regions of the
new virtual drive and then completes the initialization in the
background. This allows you to start writing data to the virtual
drive immediately.
–
Full Initialization: A complete initialization is done on the new
configuration. You cannot write data to the new virtual drive until
the initialization is complete. This may take a long time if the
drives are large.
2. Select a redundancy option from the drop-down menu at the bottom
of the Auto Configuration window:
7-6
Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
–
No Redundancy: The new configuration will have no data
redundancy (RAID 0). If a drive in the configuration fails, all data
will be lost.
–
With Redundancy: The new configuration will have data
redundancy, either through parity data (RAID 5 and RAID 6) or
mirrored data (RAID 1). If a drive fails, the data is still protected.
3. (Optional) Click Modify if you want to change to Manual
Configuration mode so that you can modify the suggested Auto
Configuration.
When you click Modify, the Virtual Drive Creation screen appears.
a. Select the new virtual drive, and click Reclaim.
A message warns that you are about to delete the virtual drive.
b.
Click next to a drive group in the list to select the new drive group
from the Arrays list, and then change the virtual drive parameters
as needed.
4. Click Finish to accept and complete the configuration.
The new storage configuration will be created and initialized (unless
you selected No Initialization).
Note:
7.1.3
If you create a large configuration using drives that are in
powersave mode, it could take several minutes to spin up
the drives. A progress bar appears as the drives spin up.
If any of the selected unconfigured drives fail to spin up, a
box appears to identify the drive or drives.
Using Guided Configuration
Guided Configuration provides an easy way to create a new storage
configuration. Based on the information that is provided, the
Configuration Wizard uses the available drives to create an optimal
storage configuration.
Figure 7.3 shows the first screen that appears when you select Guided
Configuration.
Creating a New Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
7-7
Figure 7.3
First Guided Configuration Screen
Follow these steps to create a new storage configuration in Guided
Configuration mode:
1. Select a redundancy option at the top of the Guided Configuration
window:
–
Redundancy Only: Create a configuration only if redundancy
(RAID 1, RAID 5, or RAID 6) is possible.
–
Redundancy when possible: Create a redundant configuration
if possible. Otherwise, create a non-redundant configuration.
–
No Redundancy: Create a non-redundant configuration.
2. Choose whether you want to use existing drive groups in the new
virtual drive. The options are:
–
Use Existing Arrays Only
–
Do not Use Existing Arrays
–
Use Existing and New Arrays
The first and third options are disabled if there are no available
existing drive groups.
7-8
Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
3. Select a maximum number of virtual drives to be created. The
Configuration Wizard might not be able to create as many virtual
drives as you want, depending on the current configuration and the
number of virtual drives that have already been created.
4. Click Next to continue to the next window, as shown in Figure 7.4.
Figure 7.4
Second Guided Configuration Screen
5. Change the default virtual drive parameters in this window, if needed.
In the top section of the window you can specify the number of virtual
drives to create. You can also choose to use less than the full
capacity of this drive group for the virtual drive(s). (You could do this
to leave capacity available for other virtual drives that you create
later.) To learn about the Stripe Size and other virtual drive
parameters, see Section 7.1.1, “Understanding Virtual Drive
Parameters,” page 7-3.
6. Click Next to continue to the next window.
The VD Summary screen appears.
7. Check the configuration that you have just defined.
Creating a New Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
7-9
8. Click Finish to accept and complete the configuration.
If you want to change something, click Back to return to the previous
windows.
Note:
7.1.4
If you create a large configuration using drives that are in
powersave mode, it could take several minutes to spin up
the drives. A progress bar displays as the drives spin up.
If any of the selected unconfigured drives fail to spin up, a
box appears to identify the drive(s).
Using Manual Configuration: RAID 0
Follow these steps to create a RAID 0 storage configuration using the
Manual Configuration mode of the Configuration Wizard.
Figure 7.5 shows the first screen that appears when you select Manual
Configuration.
Figure 7.5
7-10
First Manual Configuration Screen
Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
1. In the first Manual Configuration window, select two or more available
drives in the left panel and move them to the right panel.
To select non-consecutive drives in the list, click on a drive, and then
click the Add (right arrow) button to move the selected drive to the
right panel. Do this for each drive you want to add to the drive group.
To select two or more consecutive drives in the list, hold down the
SHIFT key and click on a drive. Then click on another drive in the
list. This selects the two drives and any drives between those two
drives. Click the Add (right arrow) button to move the selected drives
to the right panel.
Note:
MegaRAID Storage Manager software does not allow you
to select the drive on which the operating system is
installed or any other drives that are already part of a
configuration.
2. Click Accept to accept these drives for the new RAID 0 drive group.
Note:
To remove a single drive from a proposed new drive group,
select the drive icon in the right panel and click the
Remove (left arrow) button.
3. Click Next.
The Configuration Wizard window used to define virtual drives
appears, as shown in Figure 7.6.
Creating a New Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
7-11
Figure 7.6
Manual Configuration – Defining a Virtual Drive
The Arrays menu lists the new drive group that you just defined, plus
any existing drive groups with holes (free space) that could be used
for a new configuration.
4. From the Arrays menu, select the drive group to use for the new
virtual drive.
5. In the right panel, select RAID 0 as the RAID level.
6. (Optional) Set Size in MB to a lower number if you do not want to
use the entire available capacity for the new virtual drive.
7. (Optional) Change the other settings under Virtual Drive Properties,
if necessary. For more information, see Section 7.1.1,
“Understanding Virtual Drive Parameters.”
8. Click Accept to accept the configuration of the new virtual drive.
Note:
Click the Reclaim button if you want to undo a virtual drive
that you just defined. (For more information, see the reclaim
virtual drive entry in the Glossary.)
9. Click Next to continue with the configuration procedure.
7-12
Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
The Virtual Drive Summary window appears. It displays information
about the newly created virtual drive.
10. Review the configuration.
11. (Optional) If you want to make changes to the virtual drive, click
Back to return to the previous page, select the virtual drive, and click
Reclaim.
This step deletes the virtual drive and lets you create and define a
new virtual drive.
12. Click Finish to accept the configuration and start the initialization
process (unless you selected No Initialization earlier).
Note:
7.1.5
If you create a large configuration using drives that are in
powersave mode, it could take several minutes to spin up
the drives. A progress bar appears as the drives spin up.
If any of the selected unconfigured drives fail to spin up, a
box appears to identify the drive or drives.
Using Manual Configuration: RAID 1
Follow these steps to create a RAID 1 storage configuration using the
Manual Configuration mode of the Configuration Wizard:
1. In the first Manual Configuration window, shown in Figure 7.5, select
two available drives in the left panel.
To select non-consecutive drives in the list, click on a drive. Then
click the Add (right arrow) button to move the selected drive to the
right panel. Do this for each drive you want to add to the drive group.
To select two or more consecutive drives in the list, hold the SHIFT
key down and click on the drives. Then click the Add (right arrow)
button to move the selected drives to the right panel.
Note:
MegaRAID Storage Manager software does not allow you
to select the drive on which the operating system is
installed or any other drives that are already part of a
configuration.
2. Click Accept to accept these drives for the new RAID 1 drive group.
3. If you want additional drives in the RAID 1 virtual drive, select two
more drives for another RAID 1 drive group, click the Add button,
and click Accept.
Creating a New Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
7-13
Note:
A RAID 1 virtual drive can contain up to 16 drive groups
and up to 32 drives in a single span. (Other factors, such
as the type of controller, can limit the number of drives.)
You must use two drives in each RAID 1 drive group in the
span, and an even number of drives in the span.
4. Repeat step 3 until you have made all of the drive groups that you
want.
5. Click Next.
The Configuration Wizard window used to define virtual drives
appears, as shown in Figure 7.6.
The Arrays menu lists the new drive group(s) that you just defined,
plus any existing drive groups with holes (free space) that could be
used for a new configuration.
6. Select the drive group(s) to use for the new virtual drive.
7. In the right panel, select RAID 1 as the RAID level.
8. (Optional) Set Size in MB to a lower number if you do not want to
use the entire available capacity for the new virtual drive.
9. (Optional) Change the other Virtual Drive Properties, if necessary.
For more information, see Section 7.1.1, “Understanding Virtual
Drive Parameters.”
10. Click Accept to accept the configuration of the new virtual drive.
Note:
Click the Reclaim button if you want to undo a virtual drive
that you just defined. (For more information, see the reclaim
virtual drive entry in the Glossary.)
11. Click Next to continue with the configuration procedure.
The Virtual Drive Summary window appears. The window shows
information about the newly created virtual drive.
12. Review the configuration.
13. (Optional) If you want to make changes to the virtual drive, click
Back to return to the previous page, select the virtual drive, and click
Reclaim.
This step deletes the virtual drive and lets you create and define a
new virtual drive.
7-14
Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
14. Click Finish to accept the configuration and start the initialization
process (unless you selected No Initialization earlier).
7.1.6
Using Manual Configuration: RAID 5
Follow these steps to create a RAID 5 configuration using the Manual
Configuration mode of the Configuration Wizard:
1. In the first Manual Configuration window, shown in Figure 7.5, select
three or more available drives in the left panel.
To select non-consecutive drives in the list, click on a drive. Then
click the Add (right arrow) button to move the selected drive to the
right panel. Do this for each drive you want to add to the drive group.
To select three or more consecutive drives in the list, hold the SHIFT
key down and click on the drives. Then click the Add (right arrow)
button to move the selected drives to the right panel.
Note:
MegaRAID Storage Manager software does not allow you
to select the drive on which the operating system is
installed or any other drives that are already part of a
configuration.
2. Click Accept to accept these drives for the new RAID 5 drive group.
3. Click Next.
The Configuration Wizard window used to define virtual drives
appears, as shown in Figure 7.6.
The Arrays menu lists the new drive group(s) that you just defined,
plus any existing drive groups with holes (free space) that could be
used for a new configuration.
4. Select the drive group to use for the new virtual drive.
5. In the right panel, select RAID 5 as the RAID level.
6. (Optional) Set Size in MB to a lower number if you do not want to
use the entire available capacity for the new virtual drive.
7. (Optional) Change the other Virtual Drive Properties, if necessary.
For more information, see Section 7.1.1, “Understanding Virtual
Drive Parameters.”
8. Click Accept to accept the configuration of the new virtual drive.
Creating a New Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
7-15
Note:
Click the Reclaim button if you want to undo a virtual drive
that you just defined. (For more information, see the reclaim
virtual drive in the Glossary.)
9. Click Next to continue with the configuration procedure.
The Virtual Drive Summary window appears. This window displays
information about the newly created virtual drive.
10. Review the configuration.
11. (Optional) If you want to make changes to the virtual drive, click
Back to return to the previous page, select the virtual drive, and click
Reclaim.
This step deletes the virtual drive and lets you create and define a
new virtual drive.
12. Click Finish to accept the configuration and start the initialization
process (unless you selected No Initialization earlier).
Note:
7.1.7
If you create a large configuration using drives that are in
powersave mode, it could take several minutes to spin up
the drives. A progress bar displays as the drives spin up.
If any of the selected unconfigured drives fail to spin up, a
box appears to identify the drive or drives.
Using Manual Configuration: RAID 6
Follow these steps to create a RAID 6 configuration using the Manual
Configuration mode of the Configuration Wizard:
1. In the first Manual Configuration window, shown in Figure 7.5, select
three or more available drives in the left panel.
To select non-consecutive drives in the list, click on a drive. Then
click the Add (right arrow) button to move the selected drive to the
right panel. Do this for each drive you want to add to the drive group.
To select three or more consecutive drives in the list, hold the SHIFT
key down and click on the drives. Then click the Add (right arrow)
button to move the selected drives to the right panel.
Note:
7-16
MegaRAID Storage Manager software does not allow you
to select the drive on which the operating system is
installed or any other drives that are already part of a
configuration.
Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
2. Click Accept to accept these drives for the new RAID 6 drive group.
3. Click Next.
The Configuration Wizard window used to define virtual drives
appears, as shown in Figure 7.6.
The Arrays menu lists the new drive group(s) that you just defined,
plus any existing drive groups with holes (free space) that could be
used for a new configuration.
4. Select the drive group to use for the new virtual drive.
5. In the right panel, select RAID 6 as the RAID level.
6. (Optional) Set Size in MB to a lower number if you do not want to
use the entire available capacity for the new virtual drive.
7. (Optional) Change the other Virtual Drive Properties, if necessary.
For more information, see Section 7.1.1, “Understanding Virtual
Drive Parameters.”
8. Click Accept to accept the configuration of the new virtual drive.
Note:
Click the Reclaim button if you want to undo a virtual drive
that you just defined. (For more information, see the reclaim
virtual drive entry in the Glossary.)
9. Click Next to continue with the configuration procedure.
The Virtual Drive Summary window appears. This window shows
information about the newly created virtual drive.
10. Review the configuration.
11. (Optional) If you want to make changes to the virtual drive, click
Back to return to the previous page, select the virtual drive, and click
Reclaim.
This step deletes the virtual drive and lets you create and define a
new virtual drive.
12. Click Finish to accept the configuration and start the initialization
process (unless you selected No Initialization earlier).
Note:
If you create a large configuration using drives that are in
powersave mode, it could take several minutes to spin up
the drives. A progress bar displays as the drives spin up.
If any of the selected unconfigured drives fail to spin up, a
box appears to identify the drive or drives.
Creating a New Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
7-17
7.1.8
Using Manual Configuration: RAID 10
Follow these steps to create a RAID 10 storage configuration using the
Manual Configuration mode of the Configuration Wizard:
1. In the first Manual Configuration window, shown in Figure 7.5, select
two available drives in the left panel.
To select unconfigured, non-consecutive drives in the list, click on a
drive. Then click the Add (right arrow) button to move the selected
drive to the right panel. Do this for each drive you want to add to the
drive group.
To select two or more consecutive drives in the list, hold the SHIFT
key down and click on the drives. Then click the Add (right arrow)
button to move the selected drives to the right panel.
2. Click Accept to accept the drives for a new RAID 1 drive group.
3. Select two more drives for a second RAID 1 drive group, and click
Accept.
4. If you want additional drives in the RAID 10 virtual drive, select two
more drives for another RAID 1 drive group, click the Add button,
and click Accept.
Note:
RAID 10 supports a maximum of eight spans, with up to
32 drives per span. (Other factors, such as the type of
controller, can limit the number of drives.) You must use an
even number of drives in each RAID 1 drive group in the
span. You can have an even or odd number of spans.
5. Repeat step 3 until you have made all of the drive groups that you
want.
6. Click Next.
The Configuration Wizard window used to define virtual drives
appears, as shown in Figure 7.6.
The Arrays menu lists the new drive groups that you just defined,
plus any existing drive groups with holes (free space) that you can
use for a new configuration.
7. In the left panel, click the boxes next to two drive groups under the
Arrays menu to select two RAID 1 drive groups.
8. In the right panel, select RAID 10 as the RAID level.
7-18
Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
9. (Optional) Set Size in MB to a lower number if you do not want to
use the entire available capacity for the new virtual drive.
10. (Optional) Change the other settings under Virtual Drive Properties,
if necessary. For more information, see Section 7.1.1,
“Understanding Virtual Drive Parameters.”
11. Click Accept to accept the configuration of the new virtual drive.
Note:
Click the Reclaim button if you want to undo a virtual drive
that you just defined. (For more information, see the reclaim
virtual drive entry in the Glossary.)
12. Click Next to continue with the configuration procedure.
The Virtual Drive Summary window appears. It displays information
about the newly created virtual drive.
13. Review the configuration.
14. (Optional) If you want to make changes to the virtual drive, click
Back to return to the previous page, select the virtual drive, and click
Reclaim.
This step deletes the virtual drive and lets you create and define a
new virtual drive.
15. Click Finish to accept the configuration and start the initialization
process (unless you selected No Initialization earlier).
Note:
7.1.9
If you create a large configuration using drives that are in
powersave mode, it could take several minutes to spin up
the drives. A progress bar appears as the drives spin up.
If any of the selected unconfigured drives fail to spin up, a
box appears to identify the drive or drives.
Using Manual Configuration: RAID 50
Follow these steps to create a RAID 50 storage configuration using the
Manual Configuration mode of the Configuration Wizard:
1. In the first Manual Configuration window, shown in Figure 7.5, select
three or more available drives in the left panel. Click the Right Arrow
button to move the selected drives to the right panel.
2. Click Accept to accept these drives for a new RAID 5 drive group.
Creating a New Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
7-19
3. Select more drives for a second RAID 5 drive group, and click
Accept.
4. Click Next.
The next Configuration Wizard window appears, as shown in
Figure 7.6.
The Arrays menu lists the new drive groups that you just defined,
plus any existing drive groups with holes (free space) that could be
used for a new configuration.
5. In the left panel, select the two RAID 5 drive groups from the menu.
6. In the right panel, select RAID 50 as the RAID level.
7. (Optional) Set Size (in MB) to a lower number if you do not want to
use the entire available capacity for the new virtual drive.
8. (Optional) Change the other Virtual Drive Properties, if necessary.
For more information, see Section 7.1.1, “Understanding Virtual
Drive Parameters.”
9. Click Accept to accept the configuration of the new virtual drive.
Note:
Click the Reclaim button if you want to undo a virtual drive
that you just defined. (For more information, see the reclaim
virtual drive entry in the Glossary.)
10. Click Next to continue with the configuration procedure.
The Virtual Drive Summary window appears. This window displays
information about the newly created virtual drive.
11. Review the configuration.
12. (Optional) If you want to make changes to the virtual drive, click
Back to return to the previous page, select the virtual drive, and click
Reclaim.
This step deletes the virtual drive and lets you create and define a
new virtual drive.
13. Click Finish to accept the configuration and start the initialization
process (unless you selected No Initialization earlier).
Note:
7-20
If you create a large configuration using drives that are in
powersave mode, it could take several minutes to spin up
the drives. A progress bar displays as the drives spin up.
Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
If any of the selected unconfigured drives fail to spin up, a
box appears to identify the drive or drives.
7.1.10 Using Manual Configuration: RAID 60
Follow these steps to create a RAID 60 storage configuration using the
Manual Configuration mode of the Configuration Wizard:
1. In the first Manual Configuration window, shown in Figure 7.5, select
three or more available drives in the left panel. Click the Right Arrow
button to move the selected drives to the right panel.
2. Click Accept to accept these drives for a new RAID 6 drive group.
3. Select more drives for a second RAID 6 drive group, and click
Accept.
4. Click Next.
The next Configuration Wizard window appears, as shown in
Figure 7.6.
The Arrays menu lists the new drive groups that you just defined,
plus any existing drive groups with holes (free space) that could be
used for a new configuration.
5. In the left panel, select the two RAID 6 drive groups from the menu.
6. In the right panel, select RAID 60 as the RAID level.
7. (Optional) Set Size (in MB) to a lower number if you do not want to
use the entire available capacity for the new virtual drive.
8. (Optional) Change the other Virtual Drive Properties, if necessary.
For more information, see Section 7.1.1, “Understanding Virtual
Drive Parameters.”
9. Click Accept to accept the configuration of the new virtual drive.
Note:
Click the Reclaim button if you want to undo a virtual drive
that you just defined. (For more information, see the reclaim
virtual drive entry in the Glossary.)
10. Click Next to continue with the configuration procedure.
The Virtual Drive Summary window appears. This window displays
information about the newly created virtual drive.
11. Review the configuration.
Creating a New Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
7-21
12. (Optional) If you want to make changes to the virtual drive, click
Back to return to the previous page, select the virtual drive, and click
Reclaim.
This step deletes the virtual drive and lets you create and define a
new virtual drive.
13. Click Finish to accept the configuration and start the initialization
process (unless you selected No Initialization earlier).
Note:
7.2
If you create a large configuration using drives that are in
powersave mode, it could take several minutes to spin up
the drives. A progress bar displays as the drives spin up.
If any of the selected unconfigured drives fail to spin up, a
box appears to identify the drive or drives.
Adding Hot Spare Drives
Hot spares are drives that are available to automatically replace failed
drives in a RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 6, RAID 10, RAID 50, or RAID 60
virtual drive. Dedicated hot spares can be used to replace failed drives
in a selected drive group only. Global hot spares are available to any
virtual drive on a specific controller.
To add a dedicated or global hot spare drive, follow these steps:
1. Select the Physical View tab in the left panel of the MegaRAID
Storage Manager window, and select the icon of an unused drive.
For each drive, the screen displays the port number, enclosure
number, slot number, drive state, drive capacity, and drive
manufacturer.
2. In the right panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, select
the Operations tab.
3. Select Make Dedicated Hotspare or Make Global Hotspare, as
shown in Figure 7.7.
7-22
Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figure 7.7
Creating a Global Hot Spare
4. If you selected Make Dedicated Hotspare, select a drive group from
the list that appears in the right frame. The hot spare will be
dedicated to the drive group that you select.
If you selected Make Global Hotspare, skip this step and go to
step 5. The hot spare will be available to any virtual drive on a
specific controller.
5. Click Go to create the hot spare.
The drive state for the drive changes to hot spare.
Note:
The size of the drive to be assigned as a dedicated hot
spare should be equal to or greater than the other drives in
the drive group.
Adding Hot Spare Drives
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
7-23
7.3
Changing Adjustable Task Rates
Follow these steps if you need to change the adjustable rates for
rebuilds, and other system tasks that run in the background:
Note:
LSI recommends that you leave the adjustable task rates at
their default settings to achieve the best system
performance. If you raise the task rates above the defaults,
foreground tasks will run more slowly and it may seem that
the system is not responding. If you lower the task rates
below the defaults, rebuilds and other background tasks
may run very slowly and may not complete within a
reasonable time. If you decide to change the values, record
the original default value here so you can restore them
later, if necessary:
Rebuild Rate: ____________
Background Initialization (BGI) Rate: ____________
Check Consistency Rate: ____________
1. Select the Physical View tab in the left panel of the MegaRAID
Storage Manager window, and select a controller icon.
2. In the right panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, select
the Operations tab, and select Set Adjustable Task Rates.
The default task rates appear in the right panel, as shown in
Figure 7.8.
7-24
Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figure 7.8
Set Adjustable Task Rates
3. Enter changes, as needed, to the task rates for Rebuild Rate,
Background Initialization (BGI) Rate (for fast initialization), and Check
Consistency Rate (for consistency checks). Each task rate can be
set from 0 to 100. The higher the number, the faster the activity will
run in the background, possibly impacting other system tasks.
4. Click Go to accept the new task rates.
5. When the warning message appears, click OK to confirm that you
want to change the task rates.
Changing Adjustable Task Rates
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
7-25
7.4
Changing Power Settings
The RAID controller includes Dimmer Switch™ technology that
conserves energy by placing certain unused drives into powersave
mode. You can use the Power Settings field to choose whether to allow
unconfigured drives to enter powersave mode.
When this option is selected, unconfigured drives may be spun down.
When not selected, these drives are not spun down. The controller will
automatically spin up drives from powersave mode whenever necessary.
The powersave option is not selected by default. You have to select it to
enable spin-down of drives.
Note:
If your controller does not support this option, the Power
Settings field does not display.
Follow these steps if you need to change the powersave setting.
1. Select the Physical View tab in the left panel of the MegaRAID
Storage Manager window, and select a controller icon.
2. In the right panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, select
the Operations tab, and select Power Settings.
Figure 7.8 displays the Operations menu and the Power Settings
field.
3. Click Go to allow unconfigured drives to enter powersave mode.
Your power settings are saved and the screen is refreshed so that
the Operations tab is selected, but no operations are selected.
On the device menu in the left panel of the physical view screen, the
nodes for the unconfigured good drives that are spun down appear
- Powersave after their status.
If you go back to the Power Settings operation, the checkbox
displays the saved setting.
7-26
Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
7.5
Changing Virtual Drive Properties
You can change a virtual drive’s Read Policy, Write Policy, and other
properties at any time after the virtual drive is created. To do this, follow
these steps:
1. Click the Logical view tab in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage
Manager window.
2. Select a virtual drive icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage
Manager window.
3. In the right panel, select the Operations tab, and then select Set
Virtual Drive Properties.
A list of Virtual Drive Properties appears in the right panel, as shown
in Figure 7.9.
Figure 7.9
Set Virtual Drive Properties
Changing Virtual Drive Properties
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
7-27
4. Change the virtual drive properties as needed in the right panel.
For information on these properties, see Section 7.1.1,
“Understanding Virtual Drive Parameters,” page 7-3.
5. Click Go to accept the changes.
7.6
Changing a Virtual Drive Configuration
You can use the MegaRAID Storage Manager Reconstruction Wizard to
change the configuration of a virtual drive.
Caution:
Be sure to back up the data on the virtual drive before you
change its configuration.
The Reconstruction Wizard allows you to change a virtual drive
configuration by adding drives to the virtual drive, removing drives from
it, or changing its RAID level.
Note:
You cannot change the configuration of a RAID 10, or
RAID 50, or RAID 60 virtual drive. You cannot change a
RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, or RAID 6 configuration if two or
more virtual drives are defined on a single drive group.
(The Logical view tab shows which drive groups and drives
are used by each virtual drive.)
Perform the following steps to access the Reconstruction Wizard options:
1. To start the Reconstruction Wizard, click on Logical view, and select
a virtual drive icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage
Manager window.
2. Select Operations->Advanced Operations->Reconstruction
Wizard from the menu. Another option is to right-click on the virtual
drive icon to access the Reconstruction Wizard.
A warning to back up your data appears.
3. Select Confirm at the warning and click Yes.
The Reconstruction Wizard menu appears, as shown in Figure 7.10
7-28
Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figure 7.10 Reconstruction Wizard
This section has the following subsections explaining the Reconstruction
Wizard options:
7.6.1
•
Section 7.6.1, “Adding a Drive to a Configuration”
•
Section 7.6.2, “Removing a Drive from a Configuration”
•
Section 7.6.3, “Changing the RAID Level of a Configuration.”
Adding a Drive to a Configuration
Caution:
Be sure to back up the data on the virtual drive before you
add a drive to it.
Follow these steps to add a drive to a configuration with the
Reconstruction Wizard:
1. Click Add Drive on the Reconstruction Wizard screen.
2. When the next screen appears, select an available drive in the top
panel, and click the Add (down arrow) button to move it to the
Selected Drive list.
3. Click Next to continue.
The next screen appears.
Changing a Virtual Drive Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
7-29
4. (Optional) Select a different RAID level for the configuration from the
drop-down menu in the lower right of the window.
5. Review the configuration information.
6. Click Finish to accept and complete the configuration.
A warning states that this operation cannot be aborted and asks
whether you want to continue.
Note:
If you add a drive to a RAID 1 configuration, the RAID level
automatically changes to RAID 5.
A reconstruction operation begins on the virtual drive. You can monitor
the progress of the reconstruction in the Group Show Progress window.
To do this, select Group Operations->Show Progress.
7.6.2
Removing a Drive from a Configuration
Caution:
Be sure to back up the data on the virtual drive before you
remove a drive from it.
Follow these steps to remove a drive from a RAID 1, RAID 5, or RAID 6
configuration with the Reconstruction Wizard:
1. Click Remove Drive on the Configuration Wizard screen.
This option is not available for RAID 0 configurations.
2. When the next screen appears, select a drive in the top panel, and
click the Down Arrow button to remove it from the configuration.
3. Click Next to continue.
The next screen appears.
4. (Optional) Select a different RAID level from the drop-down menu in
the lower right of the window.
5. Review the configuration information.
6. Click Finish to accept and complete the configuration.
A warning states that this operation cannot be aborted and asks
whether you want to continue.
Note:
7-30
If you remove a drive from a RAID 5 configuration, the
RAID level automatically changes to RAID 0.
Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
A reconstruction operation begins on the virtual drive. You can monitor
the progress of the reconstruction in the Group Show Progress window.
To do this, select Group Operations->Show Progress.
7.6.3
Changing the RAID Level of a Configuration
Caution:
Be sure to back up the data on the virtual drive before you
change its RAID level.
Follow these steps to change the RAID level of a RAID 1 or RAID 5
configuration with the Configuration Wizard:
1. Click Change RAID Level on the Configuration Wizard screen.
This option is not available for RAID 0 configurations.
2. When the next screen appears, select a RAID level from the dropdown menu in the lower right corner.
3. Review the configuration information.
4. Click Finish to accept and complete the configuration.
A warning states that this operation cannot be aborted and asks
whether you want to continue.
A reconstruction operation begins on the virtual drive. You can
monitor the progress of the reconstruction in the Group Show
Progress window. To do this, select Group Operations->Show
Progress.
7.7
Deleting a Virtual Drive
Caution:
Be sure to back up the data on the virtual drive before you
delete it. Be sure that the operating system is not installed
on this virtual drive.
You can delete virtual drives to rearrange the storage space. To delete a
virtual drive, follow these steps:
1. Back up all user data on the virtual drive you intend to delete.
2. In the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, select
the Logical tab, and click the icon of the virtual drive you want to
delete.
Deleting a Virtual Drive
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
7-31
3. In the right panel, select the Operations tab, and select Delete
Virtual Drive.
4. When the warning messages appear, click Yes to confirm that you
want to delete the virtual drive.
7.8
Saving a Storage Configuration to Drive
You can save an existing controller configuration to a file so you can
apply it to another controller. To save a configuration file, follow these
steps:
1. Select a controller icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage
Manager window.
2. On the menu bar, select Operations->Configuration->Save
Configuration to file.
The Save dialog box appears.
3. In the Save dialog box, type a name for the configuration file, or
accept the default name (hostname.cfg).
4. Click Save to save the configuration file.
7.9
Clearing a Storage Configuration from a Controller
You must clear a storage configuration from a controller before you can
create a new configuration on the controller or load a previously saved
configuration file.
Caution:
Before you clear a configuration, be sure to save any data
that you want to keep. Clearing a configuration deletes all
data from the drives of the existing configuration. Be sure
that the operating system is not installed on this
configuration.
To clear a configuration from a controller, follow these steps:
1. Select a controller icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage
Manager window.
7-32
Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
2. On the menu bar, select Operations->Configuration->Clear
Configuration.
A warning message appears that states that clearing the
configuration will destroy the virtual drives and result in data loss on
the selected controller.
3. Click Yes to clear the configuration or No to cancel the operation.
7.10 Adding a Saved Storage Configuration
When you replace a controller, or when you want to duplicate an existing
storage configuration on a new controller, you can add a saved
configuration to the controller.
Caution:
When you add a saved configuration to a replacement
controller, be sure that the number and capacity of the
drives connected to the controller are exactly the same as
when the configuration was saved.
To add a saved configuration, follow these steps:
1. Select a controller icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage
Manager window.
2. On the menu bar, select Operations->Configuration->Add
Configuration from file.
A warning message appears that states that this operation may
cause an unstable condition because of differences in the two
configurations.
3. Click Yes.
4. When the Open dialog box appears, select the configuration file, and
click Open.
5. View the configuration detail, then select Apply.
6. Confirm the new configuration when prompted.
Adding a Saved Storage Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
7-33
7-34
Configuration
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Chapter 8
Monitoring System Events and
Storage Devices
The MegaRAID Storage Manager software enables you to monitor the
status of drives, virtual drives, and other storage devices. This chapter
explains how to use MegaRAID Storage Manager software to perform
the following monitoring tasks:
8.1
•
Section 8.1, “Monitoring System Events”
•
Section 8.2, “Configuring Alert Notifications”
•
Section 8.3, “Monitoring Controllers”
•
Section 8.4, “Monitoring Drives”
•
Section 8.5, “Running a Patrol Read”
•
Section 8.6, “Monitoring Virtual Drives”
•
Section 8.7, “Monitoring Enclosures”
•
Section 8.8, “Monitoring Battery Backup Units”
•
Section 8.9, “Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes”
Monitoring System Events
MegaRAID Storage Manager software monitors the activity and
performance of all controllers in the system and the storage devices
connected to them. When an event occurs (such as the creation of a new
virtual drive or the removal of a drive) an event message appears in the
log displayed at the bottom of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window,
as shown in Figure 8.1.
You can use MegaRAID Storage Manager to alert you about events.
There are settings are for the delivery of alerts, the severity level of
events, exceptions, and email settings.
MegaRAID SAS Software User’s Guide
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
8-1
Figure 8.1
Event Information Window
Each message that appears in the event log has a severity level that
indicates the importance of the event, as shown in Table 8.1, a date and
timestamp, and a brief description. You can click an event to display the
same information in a window. (For a list of all events, see
Section Appendix A, “Events and Messages.”)
Table 8.1
Event Severity Levels
Severity Level Meaning
8-2
Information
Informational message. No user action is necessary.
Warning
Some component might be close to a failure point.
Critical
A component has failed, but the system has not lost data.
Fatal
A component has failed, and data loss has occurred or will
occur.
Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
The Log menu has four options:
8.2
•
Save Log: Saves the current log to a .log file.
•
Save Log Text: Saves the current log in .txt format.
•
View Saved Log: Clears the current log information. You have the
option of saving the log first.
•
Clear Log: Enables you to load a local .log file.
Configuring Alert Notifications
The Alert Notification Configuration feature allows you to control and
configure the alerts that MegaRAID Storage Manager software sends
when various system events occur.
To access this screen, select Tools->Configure->Configure Alerts on
the main menu screen, as shown in Figure 8.2.
Figure 8.2
Alert Notification Configuration Menu
Configuring Alert Notifications
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
8-3
The Alerts Notification Configuration screen appears, as shown in
Figure 8.3. The screen contains three tabs: Alert Settings, Mail Server,
and Email. You can use each tab to perform tasks for that topic.
Figure 8.3
Alerts Notification Configuration Screen
You can select the Alert Settings tab to perform the following actions:
•
Select the methods for the delivery of alerts.
•
Change the severity level of events.
•
Save an .xml backup file of the entire alert configuration.
•
Load all of the values from a previously saved backup into the dialog
to edit or send to the monitor.
Note:
When you load a saved backup file, all unsaved changes
made in the current session will be lost.
You can select the Mail Server tab to perform the following actions:
8-4
•
Enter or edit the sender e-mail address.
•
Enter the SMTP server.
•
Require authentification of the email server.
•
Save an .xml backup file of the entire alert configuration.
Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
•
Load all of the values from a previously saved backup into the dialog
to edit or send to the monitor.
Note:
When you load a saved backup file, all unsaved changes
made in the current session will be lost.
You can select the Email tab to perform the following actions:
•
Add new email addresses for recipients of alert notifications.
•
Send test messages to the recipient email addresses.
•
Remove email addresses of recipients of alert notifications.
•
Save an .xml backup file of the entire alert configuration.
•
Load all of the values from a previously saved backup into the dialog
to edit or send to the monitor.
Note:
8.2.1
When you load a saved backup file, all unsaved changes
made in the current session will be lost.
Setting Alert Delivery Methods
You can select the methods used to send alert deliveries, such as by
popup, email, system log, or MSM log. You can select the alert delivery
methods for each event severity level (Information, Warning, Critical and
Fatal).
Perform the following steps to select the alert delivery methods:
1. On the Alerts Notification Configuration screen, click the Alerts
Setting tab.
2. Under the Alerts Delivery Methods heading, select one of the
severity levels.
3. Click Edit.
The Alert Notification Delivery Methods dialog box appears, as
shown in Figure 8.4.
Configuring Alert Notifications
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
8-5
Figure 8.4
Alert Notification Delivery Methods Dialog Box
4. Select the desired alert delivery methods for alert notifications at the
event severity level.
5. Click OK to set the delivery methods used for the severity level that
you selected.
8.2.2
Changing Alert Delivery Methods for Individual Events
You can change the alert delivery options for an event without changing
the severity level.
1. On the Alerts Notification Configuration screen, click the Alerts
Setting tab.
The the Alerts Setting portion of the screen appears, as shown in
Figure 8.3.
2. Click Change Individual Events.
The Change Individual Events dialog box appears, as shown in
Figure 8.5. The dialog box shows the events by their ID number,
description, and severity level.
8-6
Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figure 8.5
Change Individual Events Dialog Box
3. Click an event in the list to select it.
The current alert delivery methods appear for the selected event
under the Alert Delivery Methods heading.
4. Select the desired alert delivery methods for the event.
5. Press ESC to return to the Alerts Notification Configuration
screen.
6. Click OK.
This saves all of the changes made to the event.
8.2.3
Changing the Severity Level for Individual Events
To change the event severity level for a specific event, perform the
following steps:
Note:
See Table 8.1 for details about the severity levels.
Configuring Alert Notifications
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
8-7
1. On the Alerts Notification Configuration screen, click the Alerts
Setting tab.
The Alerts Setting portion of the screen appears.
2. Click Change Individual Events.
The Change Individual Events dialog box appears, as shown in
Figure 8.5. The dialog box shows the events by their ID number,
description, and severity level.
3. Click an event in the list to select it.
The current alert delivery methods appear for the selected event.
4. Click the Severity cell for the event.
The Event Severity drop-down menu appears for that event, as
shown in Figure 8.6.
Figure 8.6
8-8
Change Individual Events Severity Level Menu
Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
5. Select a different severity level for the event from the menu.
6. Press ESC to return to the Alerts Notification Configuration
screen.
7. Click OK.
This saves all of the changes made to the events.
8.2.4
Entering or Editing the Sender Email Address and SMTP Server
You can use the Alerts Notification Configuration screen to enter or
edit the sender e-mail address and the SMTP server.
1. On the Alerts Notification Configuration screen, click the Mail Server
tab.
The Mail Server options appear, as shown in Figure 8.7.
Figure 8.7
Mail Server Options
2. Enter a new sender email address in the Sender email address field
or edit the existing sender email address.
3. Click OK.
Configuring Alert Notifications
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
8-9
8.2.5
Authenticating a Server
You can use the Alerts Notification Configuration screen to authenticate
the SMTP server, providing an extra level of security. The authentication
check box enables the User name and Password fields when selected
by default. Clearing the check box disables these fields.
Perform the following steps to enter or edit the address:
1. On the Alerts Notification Configuration screen, click the Mail Server
tab.
The Mail Server options appears, as shown in Figure 8.7.
The authentication check box is selected by default.
2. Enter a user name in the User name field.
3. Enter the password in the Password field.
4. Click OK.
8.2.6
Saving Backup Configurations
You can save an .xml backup file of the entire alert configuration.
This includes all the settings on the three tabs.
1. On the Alerts Notification Configuration screen, click the Alert
Setting tab, Mail Server tab, or Email tab.
2. Click Save Backup.
The drive directory appears.
3. Enter a filename with an .xml extension for the backup configuration
(in the format filename.xml).
4. Click Save.
The drive directory disappears.
5. Click OK.
The backup configuration is saved and the Alert Notification
Configuration screen closes.
8.2.7
Loading Backup Configurations
You can load all of the values from a previously saved backup into the
dialog (all tabs) to edit or send to the monitor.
8-10
Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Note:
If you choose to load a backup configuration and the
Configure Alerts dialog currently contains changes that
have not yet been sent to the monitor, the changes will be
lost. You are prompted to confirm your choice.
1. On the Alerts Notification Configuration screen, click the Alert
Setting tab, Mail Server tab, or Email tab.
2. Click Load Backup.
You are prompted to confirm your choice. Then the drive directory
appears from which you can select a backup configuration to load.
3. Select the backup configuration file (it should be in .xml format).
4. Click Open.
The drive directory disappears.
5. Click OK.
The backup configuration is saved and the Alerts Notification
Configuration screen closes.
8.2.8
Adding Email Addresses of Recipients of Alert Notifications
The Email tab portion of the Alerts Notification Configuration screen
shows the email addresses of recipients of the alert notifications.
MegaRAID Storage Manager sends alert notifications to those email
addresses. Use the screen to add or remove email addresses of
recipients, and to send test messages to recipients that you add.
To add email addresses of recipients of the alert notifications, perform
the following steps:
1. Click the E-mail tab on the Event Notification Configuration screen.
The E-mail section of the screen appears, as shown in Figure 8.8.
Configuring Alert Notifications
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
8-11
Figure 8.8
Email Settings
2. Enter the email address you want to add in the New recipient email
address field.
3. Click Add.
The new email address appears in the Recipient email addresses
field.
8.2.9
Testing Email Addresses of Recipients of Alert Notifications
Use the Email tab portion of the Alerts Notification Configuration screen
to send test messages to the email addresses that you added for the
recipients of alert notifications.
1. Click the E-mail tab on the Event Notification Configuration screen.
The E-mail section of the screen appears, as shown in Figure 8.8.
2. Click an email address in the Recipient email addresses field.
3. Click Test.
4. Confirm whether the test message was sent to the email address.
8-12
Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
If MegaRAID Storage Manager cannot send an email message to the
email address, an error message appears.
8.2.10 Removing Email Addresses of Recipients of Alert Notifications
Use the Email tab portion of the Alerts Notification Configuration screen
to remove email addresses of the recipients of alert notifications.
1. Click the E-mail tab on the Event Notification Configuration screen.
The E-mail section of the screen appears, as shown in Figure 8.8.
2. Click an email address in the Recipient email addresses field.
The Remove button, which was grayed out, is now active.
3. Click Remove.
The email address is deleted from the list.
8.3
Monitoring Controllers
When MegaRAID Storage Manager software is running, you can see the
status of all controllers in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage
Manager window. If the controller is operating normally, the controller
icon looks like this:
. If the controller has failed, a small red circle
appears to the right of the icon. (See Section 6.2.1, “Physical/Logical
View Panel” for a complete list of device icons.)
To display complete controller information, click a controller icon in the
left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, and click the
Properties tab in the right panel.
Figure 8.9 shows the Controller Information window.
Monitoring Controllers
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
8-13
Figure 8.9
Controller Information
Most of the information on this screen is self-explanatory. Note:
8-14
•
The Rebuild Rate, Patrol Read Rate, Reconstruction Rate,
Consistency Check Rate, and BGI Rate (background initialization)
are all user selectable. For more information, see Section 7.3,
“Changing Adjustable Task Rates,” page 7-24.
•
The BBU Present field indicates whether a battery backup unit is
installed.
•
The Alarm Present and Alarm Enabled fields indicate whether the
controller has an alarm to alert the user with an audible tone when
there is an error or problem on the controller. There are options on
the controller Properties tab for silencing or disabling the alarm.
All controller properties are defined in the Section Appendix B,
“Glossary.”
Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
8.4
Monitoring Drives
When MegaRAID Storage Manager software is running, you can see the
status of all drives in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager
window. If the drive is operating normally, its icon looks like this:
.
If the drive has failed, a small red circle appears to the right of the icon,
like this:
. (See Section 6.2.1, “Physical/Logical View Panel” for a
complete list of device icons.)
To display complete drive information, click a drive icon in the left panel
of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, and click the Properties tab
in the right panel.
Figure 8.10 shows the Properties panel for a drive.
Figure 8.10 Drive Information
Monitoring Drives
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
8-15
The information on this panel is self-explanatory. There are no userselectable properties for physical devices. Icons for other storage devices
such as CD-ROM drives and DAT drives can also appear in the left
panel.
The Power Status property shows On when a drive is spun up and
Powersave when a drive is spun down. Note that SSD drives and other
drives that never spin down still show On.
If the drives are in a drive enclosure, you can identify which drive is
represented by a drive icon on the left. To do this, follow these steps:
1. Click the drive icon in the left panel.
2. Click the Operations tab in the right panel.
3. Select Locate Physical Drive, and click Go.
The LED on the drive in the enclosure starts blinking to show its
location.
Note:
LEDs on drives that are global hot spares do not blink.
4. To stop the drive light from blinking, select Stop Locating Physical
Drive, and click Go.
All of the drive properties are defined in the Glossary.
To display a graphical view of a drive, click a drive icon in the left panel
of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, and click the Graphical
View tab. In Graphical View, the drive’s storage capacity is color coded
according to the legend shown on the screen: configured space is blue,
available space is white, and reserved space is red. When you select a
virtual drive from the drop-down menu, the drive space used by that
virtual drive is displayed in green.
8.5
Running a Patrol Read
A patrol read periodically verifies all sectors of drives connected to a
controller, including the system reserved area in the RAID configured
drives. A patrol read can be used for all RAID levels and for all hot spare
drives. A patrol read is initiated only when the controller is idle for a
defined time period and has no other background activities. To start a
patrol read, follow these steps:
8-16
Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
1. Click a controller icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage
Manager window.
2. Select Operations->Start Patrol Read.
To change the patrol read settings, follow these steps:
3. Click the Logical tab.
4. Click a controller icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage
Manager window.
5. Select the Operations tab in the right panel, and select Set Patrol
Read Properties, as shown in Figure 8.11.
Figure 8.11 Patrol Read Configuration
6. Select an Operation Mode for a patrol read. The options are:
Running a Patrol Read
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
8-17
–
Auto: Patrol read runs automatically at the time interval you
specify on this screen.
–
Manual: Patrol read runs only when you manually start it by
selecting Start Patrol Read from the controller Options panel.
–
Disabled: Patrol read does not run.
7. (Optional) Specify a maximum count of drives to include in the patrol
read. The count must be between 0 and 255.
8. (Optional) Select virtual drives on this controller to exclude from the
patrol read. The existing virtual drives are listed in the gray box.
To exclude a virtual drive, check the box next to it.
9. (Optional) Change the frequency at which the patrol read will run.
The default frequency is 7 days (168 hours), which is suitable for
most configurations. (You can select second, minute, or hour as the
unit of measurement.)
Note:
LSI recommends that you leave the patrol read frequency
and other patrol read settings at the default values to
achieve the best system performance. If you decide to
change the values, record the original default value here so
you can restore them later, if necessary:
Patrol Read Frequency: ___________________
Continuous Patrolling: Enabled/Disabled
Patrol Read Task Rate: ___________________
10. (Optional) Select Continuous Patrolling if you want patrol read to
run continuously in the background instead of running at periodic
intervals. If you select Continuous Patrolling, the time interval field is
grayed out.
11. Click Go to enable these patrol read options.
Note:
Patrol read does not report on its progress while it is
running. The patrol read status is reported in the event log
only.
You can also (optionally) change the patrol read task rate. The task rate
determines the amount of system resources that are dedicated to a
patrol read when it is running. LSI recommends, however, that you leave
the patrol read task rate at its default setting. If you raise the task rate
above the default, foreground tasks will run more slowly and it may seem
that the system is not responding. If you lower the task rate below the
8-18
Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
default, rebuilds and other background tasks might run very slowly and
might not complete within a reasonable time. For more information, about
the patrol read task rate, see Section 7.3, “Changing Adjustable Task
Rates.”
8.6
Monitoring Virtual Drives
When MegaRAID Storage Manager software is running, you can see the
status of all virtual drives. If a virtual drive is operating normally, the icon
looks like this:
. If the virtual drive is running in Degraded mode (for
example, if a drive has failed), a small yellow circle appears to the right
of the icon:
. A red circle indicates that the Virtual Drive has failed
and data has been lost.
When the Logical tab is selected, the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage
Manager window shows which drives are used by each virtual drive.
The same drive can be used by multiple virtual drives.
To display complete virtual drive information, click the Logical tab in the
left panel, click a virtual drive icon in the left panel, and click the
Properties tab in the right panel. All virtual drive properties are defined
in the Glossary. Figure 8.12 shows the Properties panel for a virtual
drive.
Monitoring Virtual Drives
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
8-19
Figure 8.12 Virtual Drive Properties
The RAID level, stripe size, and access policy of the virtual drive are set
when it is configured.
Note:
You can change the read policy, write policy, and other
virtual drive properties by selecting Operations->Set
Virtual Drive Properties.
If the drives in the virtual drive are in an enclosure, you can identify them
by making their LEDs blink. To do this, follow these steps:
1. Click the virtual drive icon in the left panel.
2. Click the Operations tab in the right panel.
3. Select Locate Virtual Drive and click Go.
8-20
Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
The LEDs on the drives in the virtual drive start blinking (except for
hot spare drives).
4. To stop the LEDs from blinking, select Stop Locating Virtual Drive,
and click Go.
To show a graphical view of a virtual drive, click a virtual drive icon in the
left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, and click the
Graphical View tab. In Graphical View, the drive group used for this
virtual drive is shaded blue to show how much of the drive group capacity
is used by this virtual drive. If part of the drive group is shaded white,
this indicates that some of the capacity is used by another virtual drive.
In a RAID 10, RAID 50, or RAID 60 configuration, two drive groups are
used by one virtual drive.
8.7
Monitoring Enclosures
When MegaRAID Storage Manager software is running, you can see the
status of all enclosures connected to the server by selecting the
Physical tab in the left panel. If an enclosure is operating normally, the
icon looks like this:
. If the enclosure is not functioning normally—for
example, if a fan has failed—a small yellow or red circle appears to the
right of the icon.
Information about the enclosure appears in the right panel when you
select the Properties tab. Figure 8.13 shows the more complete
enclosure information that is displayed when you select the Graphical
View tab.
Monitoring Enclosures
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
8-21
Figure 8.13 Enclosure Information – Graphical View
The display in the center of the screen shows how many slots of the
enclosure are actually populated by drives, and the lights on the drives
show the drive status. The information on the right shows you the status
of the temperature sensors, fans, and power supplies in the enclosure.
8.8
Monitoring Battery Backup Units
When MegaRAID Storage Manager software is running, you can monitor
the status of all of the BBUs connected to controllers in the server. If a
BBU is operating normally, the icon looks like this:
. If it has failed, a
red dot appears next to the icon.
To show the properties for a BBU, perform the following steps:
8-22
Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
1. Click the Physical tab on the main menu to open the physical view.
2. Select the BBU icon in the left panel.
3. Click the Properties tab.
The BBU properties, such as the battery type, temperature, and voltage,
appear, as shown in Figure 8.14.
Figure 8.14 Battery Backup Unit Information
The BBU properties include the following:
•
The number of times the BBU has been recharged (Cycle Count)
•
The full capacity of the BBU, plus the percentage of its current state
of charge, and the estimated time until it will be depleted
Monitoring Battery Backup Units
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
8-23
8.8.1
•
The current BBU temperature, voltage, current, and remaining
capacity
•
If the battery is charging, the estimated time until it is fully charged
Battery Learn Cycle
Learn Cycle is a battery calibration operation performed by the controller
periodically to determine the condition of the battery. You can start
battery learn cycles manually or automatically. To choose automatic
battery learn cycles, enable automatic learn cycles. To choose manual
battery learn cycles, disable automatic learn cycles.
If you enable automatic learn cyles, you can delay the start of the learn
cycles for up to 168 hours (7 days). If you disable automatic learn cycles,
you can start the learn cycles manually, and you can choose to receive
a reminder to start a manual learn cycle.
8.8.1.1
Setting Learn Cycle Properties
To set the learn cycle properties, perform the following steps:
1. Click the Physical tab to open the physical view.
2. Select the BBU icon in the left panel.
3. Click the Operations tab.
The BBU operations appear, as shown in Figure 8.15.
8-24
Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Figure 8.15 Battery Backup Unit Operations
4. Select Set Learn Cycle Properties.
The options appear in the right frame.
5. To enable automatic learn cycles, click Enable automatic learn
cycles and click Go.
You can delay the start of the next learn cycle by up to 7 days
(168 hours) using the Delay next learn cycle field.
6. To disable automatic learn cycles, click Disable automatic learn
cycles and click Go.
You can start the learn cycles manually. In addition, you can check
the box next to the field Remind me when to start a learn cycle to
receive a reminder to start a manual learn cycle.
Monitoring Battery Backup Units
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
8-25
8.8.1.2
Starting a Learn Cycle Manually
To start the learn cycle properties manually, perform the following steps:
1. Click the Physical tab to open the physical view.
2. Select the BBU icon in the left panel.
3. Click the Operations tab.
The BBU operations appear, as shown in Figure 8.15.
4. Click Start Learn Cycle and click Go.
Another method to use the BBU operations is to right-click the BBU icon
to open the operations menu and select Start Learn Cycle.
8.9
Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes
MegaRAID Storage Manager software allows you to monitor the progress
of rebuilds and other lengthy processes in the Group Show Progress
window. Open this window, shown in Figure 8.16, by selecting Group
Operations->Show Progress on the menu bar.
Figure 8.16 Group Show Progress Window
8-26
Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Operations on virtual drives appear in the left panel of the Group Show
Progress window, and operations on drives appear in the right panel.
The following operations appear in this window:
•
Background or foreground initialization of a virtual drive
•
Rebuild (see Section 9.4, “Rebuilding a Drive”)
•
Reconstruction (see Section 7.6.1, “Adding a Drive to a
Configuration”)
•
Consistency check (see Section 9.2, “Running a Consistency
Check”)
A reconstruction process cannot be aborted. To abort any other ongoing
process, click the Abort button next to the status indicator. Click Abort
All to abort all ongoing processes. Click Close to close the window.
Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
8-27
8-28
Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Chapter 9
Maintaining and Managing
Storage Configurations
This section explains how to use MegaRAID Storage Manager software
to maintain and manage storage configurations. This chapter explains
how to perform the following tasks:
9.1
•
Section 9.1, “Initializing a Virtual Drive”
•
Section 9.2, “Running a Consistency Check”
•
Section 9.3, “Scanning for New Drives”
•
Section 9.4, “Rebuilding a Drive”
•
Section 9.5, “Making a Drive Offline or Missing”
•
Section 9.6, “Upgrading the Firmware”
Initializing a Virtual Drive
To initialize a virtual drive after completing the configuration process,
follow these steps:
1. Select the Logical tab in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage
Manager window, and click the icon of the virtual drive that you want
to initialize.
2. Select Group Operations->Initialize.
The Group Initialize dialog box appears.
3. Select the virtual drive(s) to initialize.
Caution:
Initialization erases all data on the virtual drive. Be sure to
back up any data you want to keep before you initialize.
Be sure the operating system is not installed on the virtual
drive you are initializing.
MegaRAID SAS Software User’s Guide
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
9-1
4. Select the Fast Initialization check box if you want to use this
option. If you leave the box unchecked, MegaRAID Storage Manager
software will run a Full Initialization on the virtual drive. (For more
information, see Section 7.1.1, “Understanding Virtual Drive
Parameters.”)
5. Click Start to begin the initialization.
You can monitor the progress of the initialization. See Section 8.9,
“Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes” for more information.
9.2
Running a Consistency Check
You should periodically run a consistency check on fault-tolerant virtual
drives. It is especially important to do this if you suspect that the virtual
drive consistency data may be corrupted. Be sure to back up the data
before running a consistency check if you think the consistency data may
be corrupted.
To run a consistency check, follow these steps:
1. Select Group Operations->Check Consistency.
The Group Consistency Check window appears.
2. Select the virtual drives that you want to check, or click Select All to
select all virtual drives.
3. Click Start to begin.
You can monitor the progress of the consistency check. See
Section 8.9, “Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes” for more
information.
Note:
9-2
You can also run a consistency check by selecting the
virtual drive icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage
Manager window and selecting the option on the Operation
tab in the right panel.
Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
9.3
Scanning for New Drives
MegaRAID Storage Manager software normally detects newly installed
drives and displays icons for them in the MegaRAID Storage Manager
window. If for some reason MegaRAID Storage Manager software does
not detect a new drive (or drives), you can use the Scan for Foreign
Config command to find it. To do this, follow these steps:
1. Select a controller icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage
Manager window.
2. Select Operations->Scan for Foreign Configuration.
If MegaRAID Storage Manager software detects any new drives, it
displays a list of them on the screen.
3. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the drive detection.
9.4
Rebuilding a Drive
If a single drive in a RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 10, or RAID 50 virtual drive
fails, the system is protected from data loss. A RAID 6 virtual drive can
survive two failed drives. A failed drive must be replaced, and the data
on the drive must be rebuilt on a new drive to restore the system to fault
tolerance. (You can choose to rebuild the data on the failed drive if the
drive is still operational.) If hot spare drives are available, the failed drive
is rebuilt automatically without any user intervention.
If a drive has failed, a red circle appears to the right of the drive icon:
. A small yellow circle appears to the right of the icon of the virtual
drive that uses this drive:
. This indicates that the virtual drive is in
a degraded state; the data is still safe, but data could be lost if another
drive fails.
Follow these steps if you need to rebuild a drive:
1. Right-click the icon of the failed drive, and select Rebuild.
2. Click Yes when the warning message appears. If the drive is still
good, a rebuild will start.
Scanning for New Drives
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
9-3
You can monitor the progress of the rebuild in the Group Show
Progress window by selecting Group Operations->Show Progress.
If the drive cannot be rebuilt, an error message appears. Continue
with the next step.
3. Shut down the system, disconnect the power cord, and open the
computer case.
4. Replace the failed drive with a new drive of equal capacity.
5. Close the computer case, reconnect the power cord, and restart the
computer.
6. Restart the MegaRAID Storage Manager software.
When the new drive spins up, the drive icon changes back to normal
status, and the rebuild process begins automatically. You can monitor
the progress of the rebuild in the Group Show Progress window by
selecting Group Operations->Show Progress.
9.5
Making a Drive Offline or Missing
If a drive is currently part of a redundant configuration and you want to
use it in another configuration, you can use MegaRAID Storage Manager
commands to remove the drive from the first configuration. When you do
this, all data on that drive is lost.
To remove the drive from the configuration without harming the data on
the virtual drive, follow these steps:
1. In the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, rightclick the icon of a drive in a redundant virtual drive.
2. Select Make drive offline from the pop-up menu. The drive status
changes to Offline.
3. Right-click the drive icon again, and select Mark physical disk as
missing.
4. Select File->Rescan. The drive status changes to Unconfigured
Good. At this point, the data on this drive is no longer valid.
5. If necessary, create a hot spare drive for the virtual drive from which
you have removed the drive. (See Section 7.2, “Adding Hot Spare
Drives.”)
9-4
Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
When a hot spare is available, the data on the virtual drive will be
rebuilt. You can now use the removed drive for another configuration.
Caution:
9.6
If MegaRAID Storage Manager software detects that a
drive in a virtual drive has failed, it makes the drive offline.
If this happens, you must remove the drive and replace it.
You cannot make the drive usable for another configuration
by using the Mark physical disk as missing and Rescan
commands.
Upgrading the Firmware
MegaRAID Storage Manager software enables you to easily upgrade the
controller firmware. To do this, follow these steps:
1. In the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, click the
icon of the controller you need to upgrade.
2. In the right panel, click the Operations tab, and select Flash
Firmware.
3. In the right panel, click Browse to locate for the .rom update file.
4. After you locate the file, click OK.
MegaRAID Storage Manager software displays the version of the
existing firmware and the version of the new firmware file.
5. When you are prompted to indicate whether you want to upgrade the
firmware, click Yes.
The controller is updated with the new firmware code contained in
the .rom file.
6. Reboot the system after the new firmware is flashed.
The new firmware does not take effect until reboot.
Upgrading the Firmware
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
9-5
9-6
Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Appendix A
Events and Messages
This appendix lists the MegaRAID Storage Manager events that may
appear in the event log.
MegaRAID Storage Manager software monitors the activity and
performance of all controllers in the workstation and the devices attached
to them. When an event occurs, such as the start of an initialization, an
event message appears in the log at the bottom of the MegaRAID
Storage Manager window.
Each message that appears in the event log has an error level that
indicates the severity of the event, as shown in Table A.1.
Table A.1
Event Error Levels
Error Level
Meaning
Information
Informational message. No user action is necessary.
Warning
Some component may be close to a failure point.
Critical
A component has failed, but the system has not lost data.
Fatal
A component has failed, and data loss has occurred or will
occur.
Table A.2 lists all of the MegaRAID Storage Manager event messages.
The event message descriptions include placeholders for specific values
that are determined when the event is generated. For example, in
message No. 1 in the Event Messages table, “%s” is replaced by the
firmware version, which is read from the firmware when the event is
generated.
MegaRAID SAS Software User’s Guide
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
A-1
w
Table A.2
Event Messages
Number Type
Event Text
0x0000
MegaRAID firmware initialization started (PCI ID
%04x/%04x/%04x/%04x)
Information
0x0001
Information
MegaRAID firmware version %s
0x0002
Fatal
Unable to recover cache data from TBBU
0x0003
Information
Cache data recovered from TBBU successfully
0x0004
Information
Configuration cleared
0x0005
Warning
Cluster down; communication with peer lost
0x0006
Information
Virtual drive %s ownership changed from %02x to
%02x
0x0007
Information
Alarm disabled by user
0x0008
Information
Alarm enabled by user
0x0009
Information
Background initialization rate changed to %d%%
0x000a
Fatal
Controller cache discarded due to memory/battery
problems
0x000b
Fatal
Unable to recover cache data due to configuration
mismatch
0x000c
Information
Cache data recovered successfully
0x000d
Fatal
Controller cache discarded due to firmware version
incompatibility
0x000e
Information
Consistency Check rate changed to %d%%
0x000f
Fatal
Fatal firmware error: %s
0x0010
Information
Factory defaults restored
0x0011
Information
Flash downloaded image corrupt
0x0012
Critical
Flash erase error
0x0013
Critical
Flash timeout during erase
0x0014
Critical
Flash error
0x0015
Information
Flashing image: %s
0x0016
Information
Flash of new firmware image(s) complete
0x0017
Critical
Flash programming error
0x0018
Critical
Flash timeout during programming
0x0019
Critical
Flash chip type unknown
0x001a
Critical
Flash command set unknown
0x001b
Critical
Flash verify failure
(Sheet 1 of 13)
A-2
Events and Messages
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Table A.2
Event Messages (Cont.)
Number Type
Event Text
0x001c
Information
Flush rate changed to %d seconds
0x001d
Information
Hibernate command received from host
0x001e
Information
Event log cleared
0x001f
Information
Event log wrapped
0x0020
Fatal
Multi-bit ECC error: ECAR=%x, ELOG=%x, (%s)
0x0021
Warning
Single-bit ECC error: ECAR=%x, ELOG=%x, (%s)
0x0022
Fatal
Not enough controller memory
0x0023
Information
Patrol Read complete
0x0024
Information
Patrol Read paused
0x0025
Information
Patrol Read Rate changed to %d%%
0x0026
Information
Patrol Read resumed
0x0027
Information
Patrol Read started
0x0028
Information
Rebuild rate changed to %d%%
0x0029
Information
Reconstruction rate changed to %d%%
0x002a
Information
Shutdown command received from host
0x002b
Information
Test event: %s
0x002c
Information
Time established as %s; (%d seconds since power on)
0x002d
Information
User entered firmware debugger
0x002e
Warning
Background Initialization aborted on %s
0x002f
Warning
Background Initialization corrected medium error (%s at
%lx
0x0030
Information
Background Initialization completed on %s
0x0031
Fatal
Background Initialization completed with uncorrectable
errors on %s
0x0032
Fatal
Background Initialization detected uncorrectable double
medium errors (%s at %lx on %s)
0x0033
Critical
Background Initialization failed on %s
0x0034
Progress
Background Initialization progress on %s is %s
0x0035
Information
Background Initialization started on %s
0x0036
Information
Policy change on %s from %s to %s
0x0038
Warning
Consistency Check aborted on %s
0x0039
Warning
Consistency Check corrected medium error (%s at %lx
(Sheet 2 of 13)
A-3
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Table A.2
Event Messages (Cont.)
Number Type
Event Text
0x003a
Information
Consistency Check done on %s
0x003b
Information
Consistency Check done with corrections on %s
0x003c
Fatal
Consistency Check detected uncorrectable double
medium errors (%s at %lx on %s)
0x003d
Critical
Consistency Check failed on %s
0x003e
Fatal
Consistency Check completed with uncorrectable data
on %s
0x003f
Warning
Consistency Check found inconsistent parity on %s at
strip %lx
0x0040
Warning
Consistency Check inconsistency logging disabled on
%s (too many inconsistencies)
0x0041
Progress
Consistency Check progress on %s is %s
0x0042
Information
Consistency Check started on %s
0x0043
Warning
Initialization aborted on %s
0x0044
Critical
Initialization failed on %s
0x0045
Progress
Initialization progress on %s is %s
0x0046
Information
Fast initialization started on %s
0x0047
Information
Full initialization started on %s
0x0048
Information
Initialization complete on %s
0x0049
Information
LD Properties updated to %s (from %s)
0x004a
Information
Reconstruction complete on %s
0x004b
Fatal
Reconstruction of %s stopped due to unrecoverable
errors
0x004c
Fatal
Reconstruct detected uncorrectable double medium
errors (%s at %lx on %s at %lx)
0x004d
Progress
Reconstruction progress on %s is %s
0x004e
Information
Reconstruction resumed on %s
0x004f
Fatal
Reconstruction resume of %s failed due to
configuration mismatch
0x0050
Information
Reconstructing started on %s
0x0051
Information
State change on %s from %s to %s
0x0052
Information
Drive Clear aborted on %s
0x0053
Critical
Drive Clear failed on %s (Error %02x)
(Sheet 3 of 13)
A-4
Events and Messages
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Table A.2
Event Messages (Cont.)
Number Type
Event Text
0x0054
Progress
Drive Clear progress on %s is %s
0x0055
Information
Drive Clear started on %s
0x0056
Information
Drive Clear completed on %s
0x0057
Warning
Error on %s (Error %02x)
0x0058
Information
Format complete on %s
0x0059
Information
Format started on %s
0x005a
Critical
Hot Spare SMART polling failed on %s (Error %02x)
0x005b
Information
Drive inserted: %s
0x005c
Warning
Drive %s is not supported
0x005d
Warning
Patrol Read corrected medium error on %s at %lx
0x005e
Progress
Patrol Read progress on %s is %s
0x005f
Fatal
Patrol Read found an uncorrectable medium error on
%s at %lx
0x0060
Critical
Predictive failure: CDB: %s
0x0061
Fatal
Patrol Read puncturing bad block on %s at %lx
0x0062
Information
Rebuild aborted by user on %s
0x0063
Information
Rebuild complete on %s
0x0064
Information
Rebuild complete on %s
0x0065
Critical
Rebuild failed on %s due to source drive error
0x0066
Critical
Rebuild failed on %s due to target drive error
0x0067
Progress
Rebuild progress on %s is %s
0x0068
Information
Rebuild resumed on %s
0x0069
Information
Rebuild started on %s
0x006a
Information
Rebuild automatically started on %s
0x006b
Critical
Rebuild stopped on %s due to loss of cluster ownership
0x006c
Fatal
Reassign write operation failed on %s at %lx
0x006d
Fatal
Unrecoverable medium error during rebuild on %s
at %lx
0x006e
Information
Corrected medium error during recovery on %s at %lx
0x006f
Fatal
Unrecoverable medium error during recovery on %s
at %lx
0x0070
Information
Drive removed: %s
(Sheet 4 of 13)
A-5
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Table A.2
Event Messages (Cont.)
Number Type
Event Text
0x0071
Warning
Unexpected sense: %s, CDB%s, Sense: %s
0x0072
Information
State change on %s from %s to %s
0x0073
Information
State change by user on %s from %s to %s
0x0074
Warning
Redundant path to %s broken
0x0075
Information
Redundant path to %s restored
0x0076
Information
Dedicated Hot Spare Drive %s no longer useful due to
deleted drive group
0x0077
Critical
SAS topology error: Loop detected
0x0078
Critical
SAS topology error: Unaddressable device
0x0079
Critical
SAS topology error: Multiple ports to the same SAS
address
0x007a
Critical
SAS topology error: Expander error
0x007b
Critical
SAS topology error: SMP timeout
0x007c
Critical
SAS topology error: Out of route entries
0x007d
Critical
SAS topology error: Index not found
0x007e
Critical
SAS topology error: SMP function failed
0x007f
Critical
SAS topology error: SMP CRC error
0x0080
Critical
SAS topology error: Multiple subtractive
0x0081
Critical
SAS topology error: Table to table
0x0082
Critical
SAS topology error: Multiple paths
0x0083
Fatal
Unable to access device %s
0x0084
Information
Dedicated Hot Spare created on %s (%s)
0x0085
Information
Dedicated Hot Spare %s disabled
0x0086
Critical
Dedicated Hot Spare %s no longer useful for all drive
groups
0x0087
Information
Global Hot Spare created on %s (%s)
0x0088
Information
Global Hot Spare %s disabled
0x0089
Critical
Global Hot Spare does not cover all drive groups
0x008a
Information
Created %s}
0x008b
Information
Deleted %s}
0x008c
Information
Marking LD %s inconsistent due to active writes at
shutdown
(Sheet 5 of 13)
A-6
Events and Messages
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Table A.2
Event Messages (Cont.)
Number Type
Event Text
0x008d
Information
Battery Present
0x008e
Warning
Battery Not Present
0x008f
Information
New Battery Detected
0x0090
Information
Battery has been replaced
0x0091
Critical
Battery temperature is high
0x0092
Warning
Battery voltage low
0x0093
Information
Battery started charging
0x0094
Information
Battery is discharging
0x0095
Information
Battery temperature is normal
0x0096
Fatal
Battery needs to be replacement, SOH Bad
0x0097
Information
Battery relearn started
0x0098
Information
Battery relearn in progress
0x0099
Information
Battery relearn completed
0x009a
Critical
Battery relearn timed out
0x009b
Information
Battery relearn pending: Battery is under charge
0x009c
Information
Battery relearn postponed
0x009d
Information
Battery relearn will start in 4 days
0x009e
Information
Battery relearn will start in 2 day
0x009f
Information
Battery relearn will start in 1 day
0x00a0
Information
Battery relearn will start in 5 hours
0x00a1
Information
Battery removed
0x00a2
Information
Current capacity of the battery is below threshold
0x00a3
Information
Current capacity of the battery is above threshold
0x00a4
Information
Enclosure (SES) discovered on %s
0x00a5
Information
Enclosure (SAFTE) discovered on %s
0x00a6
Critical
Enclosure %s communication lost
0x00a7
Information
Enclosure %s communication restored
0x00a8
Critical
Enclosure %s fan %d failed
0x00a9
Information
Enclosure %s fan %d inserted
0x00aa
Critical
Enclosure %s fan %d removed
0x00ab
Critical
Enclosure %s power supply %d failed
(Sheet 6 of 13)
A-7
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Table A.2
Event Messages (Cont.)
Number Type
Event Text
0x00ac
Information
Enclosure %s power supply %d inserted
0x00ad
Critical
Enclosure %s power supply %d removed
0x00ae
Critical
Enclosure %s SIM %d failed
0x00af
Information
Enclosure %s SIM %d inserted
0x00b0
Critical
Enclosure %s SIM %d removed
0x00b1
Warning
Enclosure %s temperature sensor %d below warning
threshold
0x00b2
Critical
Enclosure %s temperature sensor %d below error
threshold
0x00b3
Warning
Enclosure %s temperature sensor %d above warning
threshold
0x00b4
Critical
Enclosure %s temperature sensor %d above error
threshold
0x00b5
Critical
Enclosure %s shutdown
0x00b6
Warning
Enclosure %s not supported; too many enclosures
connected to port
0x00b7
Critical
Enclosure %s firmware mismatch
0x00b8
Warning
Enclosure %s sensor %d bad
0x00b9
Critical
Enclosure %s phy %d bad
0x00ba
Critical
Enclosure %s is unstable
0x00bb
Critical
Enclosure %s hardware error
0x00bc
Critical
Enclosure %s not responding
0x00bd
Information
SAS/SATA mixing not supported in enclosure; Drive %s
disabled
0x00be
Information
Enclosure (SES) hotplug on %s was detected, but is
not supported
0x00bf
Information
Clustering enabled
0x00c0
Information
Clustering disabled
0x00c1
Information
Drive too small to be used for auto-rebuild on %s
0x00c2
Information
BBU enabled; changing WT virtual drives to WB
0x00c3
Warning
BBU disabled; changing WB virtual drives to WT
0x00c4
Warning
Bad block table on drive %s is 80% full
0x00c5
Fatal
Bad block table on drive %s is full; unable to log
block %lx
(Sheet 7 of 13)
A-8
Events and Messages
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Table A.2
Event Messages (Cont.)
Number Type
Event Text
0x00c6
Information
Consistency Check Aborted due to ownership loss
on %s
0x00c7
Information
Background Initialization (BGI) Aborted Due to
Ownership Loss on %s
0x00c8
Critical
Battery/charger problems detected; SOH Bad
0x00c9
Warning
Single-bit ECC error: ECAR=%x, ELOG=%x, (%s);
warning threshold exceeded
0x00ca
Critical
Single-bit ECC error: ECAR=%x, ELOG=%x, (%s);
critical threshold exceeded
0x00cb
Critical
Single-bit ECC error: ECAR=%x, ELOG=%x, (%s);
further reporting disabled
0x00cc
Critical
Enclosure %s Power supply %d switched off
0x00cd
Information
Enclosure %s Power supply %d switched on
0x00ce
Critical
Enclosure %s Power supply %d cable removed
0x00cf
Information
Enclosure %s Power supply %d cable inserted
0x00d0
Information
Enclosure %s Fan %d returned to normal
Information
BBU Retention test was initiated on previous boot
0x00d2
Information
BBU Retention test passed
0x00d3
Critical
BBU Retention test failed!
0x00d4
Information
NVRAM Retention test was initiated on previous boot
0x00d5
Information
NVRAM Retention test passed
0x00d6
Critical
NVRAM Retention test failed!
0x00d1
0x00d7
Information
%s test completed %d passes successfully
0x00d8
Critical
%s test FAILED on %d pass. Fail data: errorOffset=%x
goodData=%x badData=%x
0x00d9
Information
Self check diagnostics completed
0x00da
Information
Foreign Configuration Detected
0x00db
Information
Foreign Configuration Imported
0x00dc
Information
Foreign Configuration Cleared
0x00dd
Warning
NVRAM is corrupt; reinitializing
0x00de
Warning
NVRAM mismatch occurred
0x00df
Warning
SAS wide port %d lost link on PHY %d
0x00e0
Information
SAS wide port %d restored link on PHY %d
(Sheet 8 of 13)
A-9
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Table A.2
Event Messages (Cont.)
Number Type
Event Text
0x00e1
Warning
SAS port %d, PHY %d has exceeded the allowed error
rate
0x00e2
Warning
Bad block reassigned on %s at %lx to %lx
0x00e3
Information
Controller Hot Plug detected
0x00e4
Warning
Enclosure %s temperature sensor %d differential
detected
0x00e5
Information
Drive test cannot start. No qualifying drives found
0x00e6
Information
Time duration provided by host is not sufficient for self
check
0x00e7
Information
Marked Missing for %s on drive group %d row %d
0x00e8
Information
Replaced Missing as %s on drive group %d row %d
0x00e9
Information
Enclosure %s Temperature %d returned to normal
0x00ea
Information
Enclosure %s Firmware download in progress
0x00eb
Warning
Enclosure %s Firmware download failed
0x00ec
Warning
%s is not a certified drive
0x00ed
Information
Dirty cache data discarded by user
0x00ee
Information
Drives missing from configuration at boot
0x00ef
Information
Virtual drives (VDs) missing drives and will go offline at
boot: %s
0x00f0
Information
VDs missing at boot: %s
0x00f1
Information
Previous configuration completely missing at boot
0x00f2
Information
Battery charge complete
0x00f3
Information
Enclosure %s fan %d speed changed
0x00f4
Information
Dedicated spare %s imported as global due to missing
arrays
0x00f5
Information
%s rebuild not possible as SAS/SATA is not supported
in an array
0x00f6
Information
SEP %s has been rebooted as a part of enclosure
firmware download. SEP will be unavailable until this
process completes.
0x00f7
Information
Inserted PD: %s Info: %s
0x00f8
Information
Removed PD: %s Info: %s
0x00f9
Information
VD %s is now OPTIMAL
0x00fa
Warning
VD %s is now PARTIALLY DEGRADED
(Sheet 9 of 13)
A-10
Events and Messages
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Table A.2
Event Messages (Cont.)
Number Type
Event Text
0x00fb
Critical
VD %s is now DEGRADED
0x00fc
Fatal
VD %s is now OFFLINE
0x00fd
Warning
Battery requires reconditioning; please initiate a LEARN
cycle
0x00fe
Warning
VD %s disabled because RAID-5 is not supported by
this RAID key
0x00ff
Warning
VD %s disabled because RAID-6 is not supported by
this controller
0x0100
Warning
VD %s disabled because SAS drives are not supported
by this RAID key
0x0101
Warning
PD missing: %s
0x0102
Warning
Puncturing of LBAs enabled
0x0103
Warning
Puncturing of LBAs disabled
0x0104
Critical
Enclosure %s EMM %d not installed
0x0105
Information
Package version %s
0x0106
Warning
Global affinity Hot Spare %s commissioned in a
different enclosure
0x0107
Warning
Foreign configuration table overflow
0x0108
Warning
Partial foreign configuration imported, PDs not
imported:%s
0x0109
Information
Connector %s is active
0x010a
Information
Board Revision %s
0x010b
Warning
Command timeout on PD %s, CDB:%s
0x010c
Warning
PD %s reset (Type %02x)
0x010d
Warning
VD bad block table on %s is 80% full
0x010e
Fatal
VD bad block table on %s is full; unable to log block %lx
(on %s at %lx)
0x010f
Fatal
Uncorrectable medium error logged for %s at %lx (on
%s at %lx)
0x0110
Information
VD medium error corrected on %s at %lx
0x0111
Warning
Bad block table on PD %s is 100% full
0x0112
Warning
VD bad block table on PD %s is 100% full
0x0113
Fatal
Controller needs replacement, IOP is faulty
0x0114
Information
CopyBack started on PD %s from PD %s
(Sheet 10 of 13)
A-11
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Table A.2
Event Messages (Cont.)
Number Type
Event Text
0x0115
Information
CopyBack aborted on PD %s and src is PD %s
0x0116
Information
CopyBack complete on PD %s from PD %s
0x0117
Progress
CopyBack progress on PD %s is %s
0x0118
Information
CopyBack resumed on PD %s from %s
0x0119
Information
CopyBack automatically started on PD %s from %s
0x011a
Critical
CopyBack failed on PD %s due to source %s error
0x011b
Warning
Early Power off warning was unsuccessful
0x011c
Information
BBU FRU is %s
0x011d
Information
%s FRU is %s
0x011e
Information
Controller hardware revision ID %s
0x011f
Warning
Foreign import shall result in a backward incompatible
upgrade of configuration metadata
0x0120
Information
Redundant path restored for PD %s
0x0121
Warning
Redundant path broken for PD %s
0x0122
Information
Redundant enclosure EMM %s inserted for EMM %s
0x0123
Information
Redundant enclosure EMM %s removed for EMM %s
0x0124
Warning
Patrol Read can't be started, as PDs are either not
ONLINE, or are in a VD with an active process, or are
in an excluded VD
0x0125
Information
Copyback aborted by user on PD %s and src is PD %s
0x0126
Critical
Copyback aborted on hot spare %s from %s, as hot
spare needed for rebuild
0x0127
Warning
Copyback aborted on PD %s from PD %s, as rebuild
required in the array
0x0128
Fatal
Controller cache discarded for missing or offline VD %s
When a VD with cached data goes offline or missing
during runtime, the cache for the VD is discarded.
Because the VD is offline, the cache cannot be saved.
0x0129
Information
Copyback cannot be started as PD %s is too small for
src PD %s
0x012a
Information
Copyback cannot be started on PD %s from PD %s, as
SAS/SATA is not supported in an array
0x012b
Information
Microcode update started on PD %s
0x012c
Information
Microcode update completed on PD %s
(Sheet 11 of 13)
A-12
Events and Messages
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Table A.2
Event Messages (Cont.)
Number Type
Event Text
0x012d
Warning
Microcode update timeout on PD %s
0x012e
Warning
Microcode update failed on PD %s
0x012f
Warning
Microcode update failed on PD %s
0x0130
Information
Controller properties changed
0x0131
Information
Patrol Read properties changed
0x0132
Information
CC Schedule properties changed
0x0133
Information
Battery properties changed
0x0134
Warning
Periodic Battery Relearn is pending. Please initiate
manual learn cycle as Automatic learn is not enabled
0x0135
Information
Drive security key created
0x0136
Information
Drive security key backed up
0x0138
Information
Drive security key from escrow, verified
0x0139
Information
Drive security key changed
0x013a
Warning
Drive security key, re-key operation failed
0x013b
Warning
Drive security key is invalid
0x013c
Information
Drive security key destroyed
0x013d
Warning
Drive security key from escrow is invalid
0x013e
Information
VD %s is now secured
0x013f
Warning
VD %s is partially secured
0x0140
Information
PD %s security activated
0x0141
Information
PD %s security disabled
0x0142
Information
PD %s is reprovisioned
0x0143
Information
PD %s security key changed
0x0144
Fatal
Security subsystem problems detected for PD %s
0x0145
Fatal
Controller cache pinned for missing or offline VD %s
0x0146
Fatal
Controller cache pinned for missing or offline VDs: %s
0x0147
Information
Controller cache discarded by user for VDs: %s
0x0148
Information
Controller cache destaged for VD %s
0x0149
Warning
Consistency Check started on an inconsistent VD %s
0x014a
Warning
Drive security key failure, cannot access secured
configuration
0x014b
Warning
Drive security pass phrase from user is invalid
(Sheet 12 of 13)
A-13
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Table A.2
Event Messages (Cont.)
Number Type
Event Text
0x014c
Warning
Detected error with the remote battery connector cable
0x014d
Information
Power state change on PD %s from %s to %s
0x014e
Information
Enclosure %s element (SES code 0x%x) status
changed
0x014f
Information
PD %s rebuild not possible as HDD/SSD mix is not
supported in an array
0x0150
Information
Copyback cannot be started on PD %s from %s, as
HDD/SSD mix is not supported in an array
(Sheet 13 of 13)
A-14
Events and Messages
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Appendix B
Glossary
access policy
A virtual drive property indicating what kind of access is allowed for a
particular virtual drive. The possible values are Read/Write, Read Only,
or Blocked.
alarm enabled
A controller property that indicates whether the controller’s onboard
alarm is enabled.
alarm present
A controller property that indicates whether the controller has an onboard
alarm. If present and enabled, the alarm is sounded for certain error
conditions.
array
See drive group.
BBU present
A controller property that indicates whether the controller has an onboard
battery backup unit to provide power in case of a power failure.
BGI rate
A controller property indicating the rate at which the background
initialization of virtual drives will be carried out.
BIOS
Basic Input/Output System. The computer BIOS is stored on a flash
memory chip. The BIOS controls communications between the
microprocessor and peripheral devices, such as the keyboard and the
video controller, and miscellaneous functions, such as system messages.
cache
Fast memory that holds recently accessed data. Use of cache memory
speeds subsequent access to the same data. When data is read from or
written to main memory, a copy is also saved in cache memory with the
associated main memory address. The cache memory software monitors
the addresses of subsequent reads to see if the required data is already
stored in cache memory. If it is already in cache memory (a cache hit),
it is read from cache memory immediately and the main memory read is
aborted (or not started). If the data is not cached (a cache miss), it is
fetched from main memory and saved in cache memory.
MegaRAID SAS Software User’s Guide
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
B-1
cache flush
interval
A controller property that indicates how often the data cache is flushed.
caching
The process of using a high speed memory buffer to speed up a
computer system’s overall read/write performance. The cache can be
accessed at a higher speed than a drive subsystem. To improve read
performance, the cache usually contains the most recently accessed
data, as well as data from adjacent drive sectors. To improve write
performance, the cache may temporarily store data in accordance with
its write back policies.
capacity
A property that indicates the amount of storage space on a drive or
virtual drive.
coerced
capacity
A drive property indicating the capacity to which a drive has been
coerced (forced) to make it compatible with other drives that are
nominally the same capacity. For example, a 4 Gbyte drive from one
manufacturer may be 4,196 Mbytes, and a 4 Gbyte from another
manufacturer may be 4,128 Mbytes. These drives could be coerced to a
usable capacity of 4,088 Mbytes each for use in a drive group in a
storage configuration.
coercion mode
A controller property indicating the capacity to which drives of nominally
identical capacity are coerced (forced) to make them usable in a storage
configuration.
consistency
check
An operation that verifies that all stripes in a virtual drive with a
redundant RAID level are consistent and that automatically fixes any
errors. For RAID 1 drive groups, this operation verifies correct mirrored
data for each stripe.
consistency
check rate
The rate at which consistency check operations are run on a computer
system.
controller
A chip that controls the transfer of data between the microprocessor and
memory or between the microprocessor and a peripheral device such as
a drive. RAID controllers perform RAID functions such as striping and
mirroring to provide data protection. MegaRAID Storage Manager
software runs on LSI SAS controllers.
copyback
The procedure used to copy data from a source drive of a virtual drive
to a destination drive that is not a part of the virtual drive. The copyback
operation is often used to create or restore a specific physical
B-2
Glossary
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
configuration for a drive group (for example, a specific arrangement of
drive group members on the device I/O buses). The copyback operation
can be run automatically or manually.
Typically, a drive fails or is expected to fail, and the data is rebuilt on a
hot spare. The failed drive is replaced with a new drive. Then the data is
copied from the hot spare to the new drive, and the hot spare reverts
from a rebuild drive to its original hot spare status. The copyback
operation runs as a background activity, and the virtual drive is still
available online to the host.
current write
policy
A virtual drive property that indicates whether the virtual drive currently
supports Write Back mode or Write Through mode.
•
In Write Back mode the controller sends a data transfer completion
signal to the host when the controller cache has received all of the
data in a transaction.
•
In Write Through mode the controller sends a data transfer
completion signal to the host when the drive subsystem has received
all of the data in a transaction.
default write
policy
A virtual drive property indicating whether the default write policy is Write
Through or Write Back. In Write Back mode the controller sends a data
transfer completion signal to the host when the controller cache has
received all of the data in a transaction. In Write Through mode the
controller sends a data transfer completion signal to the host when the
drive subsystem has received all of the data in a transaction.
device ID
A controller or drive property indicating the manufacturer-assigned device
ID.
device port
count
A controller property indicating the number of ports on the controller.
drive cache
policy
A virtual drive property indicating whether the virtual drive cache is
enabled, disabled, or unchanged from its previous setting.
drive group
A group of drives attached to a RAID controller on which one or more
virtual drives can be created. All virtual drives in the drive group use all
of the drives in the drive group.
drive state
A drive property indicating the status of the drive. A drive can be in one
of the following states:
B-3
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
•
Unconfigured Good: A drive accessible to the RAID controller but not
configured as a part of a virtual drive or as a hot spare.
•
Hot Spare: A drive that is configured as a hot spare.
•
Online: A drive that can be accessed by the RAID controller and will
be part of the virtual drive.
•
Rebuild: A drive to which data is being written to restore full
redundancy for a virtual drive.
•
Failed: A drive that was originally configured as Online or Hot Spare,
but on which the firmware detects an unrecoverable error.
•
Unconfigured Bad: A drive on which the firmware detects an
unrecoverable error; the drive was Unconfigured Good or the drive
could not be initialized.
•
Missing: A drive that was Online, but which has been removed from
its location.
•
Offline: A drive that is part of a virtual drive but which has invalid data
as far as the RAID configuration is concerned.
•
None: A drive with an unsupported flag set. An Unconfigured Good
or Offline drive that has completed the prepare for removal operation.
drive
subsystem
A collection of drives and the hardware that controls them and connects
them to one or more controllers. The hardware can include an intelligent
controller, or the drives can attach directly to a system I/O bus controller.
drive type
A drive property indicating the characteristics of the drive.
fast
initialization
A mode of initialization that quickly writes zeroes to the first and last
sectors of the virtual drive. This allows you to immediately start writing
data to the virtual drive while the initialization is running in the
background.
fault tolerance
The capability of the drive subsystem to undergo a single drive failure
per drive group without compromising data integrity and processing
capability. LSI SAS RAID controllers provides fault tolerance through
redundant drive groups in RAID levels 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60. They also
support hot spare drives and the auto-rebuild feature.
firmware
Software stored in read-only memory (ROM) or programmable ROM
(PROM). Firmware is often responsible for the behavior of a system
when it is first turned on. A typical example would be a monitor program
B-4
Glossary
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
in a system that loads the full operating system from drive or from a
network and then passes control to the operating system.
foreign
configuration
A RAID configuration that already exists on a replacement set of drives
that you install in a computer system. MegaRAID Storage Manager
software allows you to import the existing configuration to the RAID
controller, or you can clear the configuration so you can create a
new one.
formatting
The process of writing a specific value to all data fields on a drive, to
map out unreadable or bad sectors. Because most drives are formatted
when manufactured, formatting is usually done only if a drive generates
many media errors.
hole
In MegaRAID Storage Manager, a hole is a block of empty space in a
drive group that can be used to define a virtual drive.
host interface
A controller property indicating the type of interface used by the
computer host system: for example, PCIX.
host port count
A controller property indicating the number of host data ports currently
in use.
host system
Any computer system on which the controller is installed. Mainframes,
workstations, and standalone desktop systems can all be considered
host systems.
hot spare
A standby drive that can automatically replace a failed drive in a virtual
drive and prevent data from being lost. A hot spare can be dedicated to
a single redundant drive group or it can be part of the global hot spare
pool for all drive groups controlled by the controller.
When a drive fails, MegaRAID Storage Manager software automatically
uses a hot spare to replace it and then rebuilds the data from the failed
drive to the hot spare. Hot spares can be used in RAID 1, 5, 6, 10, 50,
and 60 storage configurations.
initialization
The process of writing zeros to the data fields of a virtual drive and, in
fault-tolerant RAID levels, generating the corresponding parity to put the
virtual drive in a Ready state. Initialization erases all previous data on the
drives. Drive groups will work without initializing, but they can fail a
consistency check because the parity fields have not been generated.
B-5
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
IO policy
A virtual drive property indicating whether Cached I/O or Direct I/O is
being used. In Cached I/O mode, all reads are buffered in cache
memory. In Direct I/O mode, reads are not buffered in cache memory.
Data is transferred to cache and the host concurrently. If the same data
block is read again, it comes from cache memory. (The IO Policy applies
to reads on a specific virtual drive. It does not affect the read ahead
cache.)
learning cycle
A battery calibration operation performed by a RAID controller
periodically to determine the condition of the battery.
load-balancing
A method of spreading work between two or more computers, network
links, CPUs, drives, or other resources. Load balancing is used to
maximize resource use, throughput, or response time.
media error
count
A drive property indicating the number of errors that have been detected
on the drive media.
migration
The process of moving virtual drives and hot spare drives from one
controller to another by disconnecting the drives from one controller and
attaching them to another one. The firmware on the new controller will
detect and retain the virtual drive information on the drives.
mirroring
The process of providing complete data redundancy with two drives by
maintaining an exact copy of one drive’s data on the second drive. If one
drive fails, the contents of the other drive can be used to maintain the
integrity of the system and to rebuild the failed drive.
multipathing
The firmware provides support for detecting and using multiple paths
from the RAID controllers to the SAS devices that are in enclosures.
Devices connected to enclosures have multiple paths to them. With
redundant paths to the same port of a device, if one path fails, another
path can be used to communicate between the controller and the device.
Using multiple paths with load balancing, instead of a single path, can
increase reliability through redundancy.
name
A virtual drive property indicating the user-assigned name of the virtual
drive.
non-redundant
configuration
A RAID 0 virtual drive with data striped across two or more drives but
without drive mirroring or parity. This provides for high data throughput
but offers no protection in case of a drive failure.
B-6
Glossary
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
NVRAM
Acronym for non-volatile random access memory. A storage system that
does not lose the data stored on it when power is removed. NVRAM is
used to store firmware and configuration data on the RAID controller.
NVRAM present
A controller property indicating whether an NVRAM is present on the
controller.
NVRAM size
A controller property indicating the capacity of the controller’s NVRAM.
offline
A drive is offline when it is part of a virtual drive but its data is not
accessible to the virtual drive.
patrol read
A process that checks the drives in a storage configuration for drive
errors that could lead to drive failure and lost data. The patrol read
operation can find and sometimes fix any potential problem with drives
prior to host access. This enhances overall system performance because
error recovery during a normal I/O operation may not be necessary.
patrol read rate
The user-defined rate at which patrol read operations are run on a
computer system.
product info
A drive property indicating the vendor-assigned model number of the
drive.
product name
A controller property indicating the manufacturing name of the controller.
RAID
A group of multiple, independent drives that provide high performance by
increasing the number of drives used for saving and accessing data.
A RAID drive group improves input/output (I/O) performance and data
availability. The group of drives appears to the host system as a single
storage unit or as multiple virtual drives. Data throughput improves
because several drives can be accessed simultaneously. RAID
configurations also improve data storage availability and fault tolerance.
Redundant RAID levels (RAID levels 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60) provide data
protection.
RAID 0
Uses data striping on two or more drives to provide high data throughput,
especially for large files in an environment that requires no data
redundancy.
RAID 00
Uses data striping on two or more drives in a spanned drive group to
provide high data throughput, especially for large files in an environment
that requires no data redundancy.
B-7
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
RAID 1
Uses data mirroring on pairs of drives so that data written to one drive
is simultaneously written to the other drive. RAID 1 works well for small
databases or other small applications that require complete data
redundancy.
RAID 5
Uses data striping and parity data across three or more drives
(distributed parity) to provide high data throughput and data redundancy,
especially for applications that require random access.
RAID 6
Uses data striping and parity data across three or more drives
(distributed parity) to provide high data throughput and data redundancy,
especially for applications that require random access. RAID 6 can
survive the failure of two drives.
RAID 10
A combination of RAID 0 and RAID 1 that uses data striping across two
mirrored drive groups. It provides high data throughput and complete
data redundancy.
RAID 50
A combination of RAID 0 and RAID 5 that uses data striping across two
drive groups with parity data. It provides high data throughput and
complete data redundancy.
RAID 60
A combination of RAID 0 and RAID 6 that uses data striping across two
drive groups with parity data. It provides high data throughput and
complete data redundancy. RAID 60 can survive the failure of two drives
in each RAID set in the spanned drive group.
RAID level
A virtual drive property indicating the RAID level of the virtual drive.
LSI SAS controllers support RAID levels 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60.
raw capacity
A drive property indicating the actual full capacity of the drive before any
coercion mode is applied to reduce the capacity.
read policy
A controller attribute indicating the current Read Policy mode. In Always
Read Ahead mode, the controller reads sequentially ahead of requested
data and stores the additional data in cache memory, anticipating that the
data will be needed soon. This speeds up reads for sequential data, but
there is little improvement when accessing random data. In No Read
Ahead mode, read ahead capability is disabled. In Adaptive Read Ahead
mode, the controller begins using read ahead if the two most recent drive
accesses occurred in sequential sectors. If the read requests are
random, the controller reverts to No Read Ahead mode.
B-8
Glossary
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
rebuild
The regeneration of all data to a replacement drive in a redundant virtual
drive after a drive failure. A drive rebuild normally occurs without
interrupting normal operations on the affected virtual drive, though some
degradation of performance of the drive subsystem can occur.
rebuild rate
The percentage of central processing unit (CPU) resources devoted to
rebuilding data onto a new drive after a drive in a storage configuration
has failed.
reclaim virtual
drive
A method of undoing the configuration of a new virtual drive. If you
highlight the virtual drive in the Configuration Wizard and click the
Reclaim button, the individual drives are removed from the virtual drive
configuration.
reconstruction
rate
The user-defined rate at which a reconstruction operation is carried out.
redundancy
A property of a storage configuration that prevents data from being lost
when one drive fails in the configuration.
redundant
configuration
A virtual drive that has redundant data on drives in the drive group that
can be used to rebuild a failed drive. The redundant data can be parity
data striped across multiple drives in a drive group, or it can be a
complete mirrored copy of the data stored on a second drive.
A redundant configuration protects the data in case a drive fails in the
configuration.
revertible hot
spare
When you use the Replace Member procedure, after data is copied from
a hot spare to a new drive, the hot spare reverts from a rebuild drive to
its original hot spare status.
revision level
A drive property that indicates the revision level of the drive’s firmware.
SAS
Acronym for Serial Attached SCSI. SAS is a serial, point-to-point,
enterprise-level device interface that leverages the Small Computer
System Interface (SCSI) protocol set. The SAS interface provides
improved performance, simplified cabling, smaller connectors, lower pin
count, and lower power requirements when compared to parallel SCSI.
SATA
Acronym for Serial Advanced Technology Attachment. A physical storage
interface standard. SATA is a serial link that provides point-to-point
connections between devices. The thinner serial cables allow for better
airflow within the system and permit smaller chassis designs.
B-9
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
SCSI device
type
A drive property indicating the type of the device, such as drive.
serial no.
A controller property indicating the manufacturer-assigned serial number.
strip size
The portion of a stripe that resides on a single drive in the drive group.
stripe size
A virtual drive property indicating the length of the interleaved data
segments that the RAID controller writes across multiple drives, not
including parity drives. For example, consider a stripe that contains
64 KB of drive space and has 16 KB of data residing on each drive in
the stripe. In this case, the stripe size is 64 KB and the strip size is
16 KB. The user can select the stripe size.
striping
A technique used to write data across all drives in a virtual drive.
Each stripe consists of consecutive virtual drive data addresses that are
mapped in fixed-size units to each drive in the virtual drive using a
sequential pattern. For example, if the virtual drive includes five drives,
the stripe writes data to drives one through five without repeating any of
the drives. The amount of space consumed by a stripe is the same on
each drive. Striping by itself does not provide data redundancy. Striping
in combination with parity does provide data redundancy.
subvendor ID
A controller property that lists additional vendor ID information about the
controller.
uncorrectable
error count
A controller property that lists the number of uncorrectable errors
detected on drives connected to the controller. If the error count reaches
a certain level, a drive will be marked as failed.
vendor ID
A controller property indicating the vendor-assigned ID number of the
controller.
vendor info
A drive property listing the name of the vendor of the drive.
virtual drive
A storage unit created by a RAID controller from one or more drives.
Although a virtual drive may be created from several drives, it is seen by
the operating system as a single drive. Depending on the RAID level
used, the virtual drive may retain redundant data in case of a drive
failure.
virtual drive
state
A virtual drive property indicating the condition of the virtual drive.
Examples include Optimal and Degraded.
B-10
Glossary
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
write-back
In Write-Back Caching mode, the controller sends a data transfer
completion signal to the host when the controller cache has received all
of the data in a drive write transaction. Data is written to the drive
subsystem in accordance with policies set up by the controller.
These policies include the amount of dirty/clean cache lines, the number
of cache lines available, and elapsed time from the last cache flush.
write policy
See Default Write Policy.
write-through
In Write-Through Caching mode, the controller sends a data transfer
completion signal to the host when the drive subsystem has received all
of the data and has completed the write transaction to the drive.
B-11
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
B-12
Glossary
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Customer Feedback
We would appreciate your feedback on this document. Please copy the
following page, add your comments, and fax it to us at the number
shown.
If appropriate, please also fax copies of any marked-up pages from this
document.
Important:
Please include your name, phone number, fax number, and
company address so that we may contact you directly for
clarification or additional information.
Thank you for your help in improving the quality of our documents.
MegaRAID SAS Software User’s Guide
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Reader’s Comments
Fax your comments to:
LSI Corporation
Technical Publications
M/S E-198
Fax: 408.433.4333
Please tell us how you rate this document: MegaRAID SAS Software
User’s Guide. Place a check mark in the appropriate blank for each
category.
Excellent Good Average
Completeness of information
Clarity of information
Ease of finding information
Technical content
Usefulness of examples and
illustrations
Overall manual
Fair
Poor
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
What could we do to improve this document?
If you found errors in this document, please specify the error and page
number. If appropriate, please fax a marked-up copy of the page(s).
Please complete the information below so that we may contact you
directly for clarification or additional information.
Name
Telephone
Date
Fax
Title
Department
Company Name
Street
City, State, Zip
Customer Feedback
Copyright © 2005-2009 by LSI Corporation. All rights reserved.
Mail Stop
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement